Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Rural Energy Waste Heat Program J.B. Mechanical & Electrical est 1975
RURAL ENERGY WASTE HEAT PROGRAM ST. MARY'S, ALASKA CONTRACT 08-3007 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL OWNER: ENGINEER/ARCHITECT: MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR: ALASKA POWER AUTHORITY 334 West Fifth Avenue Second Floor Anchorage, Alaska 99501 (907) 277-7641 POLARCONSULT ALASKA, INC. 2735 East Tudor Road Suite #201 Anchorage, Alaska 99507 (907) 561-1933 JB MECHANICAL CONTRACTORS, INC. 941 Kirkland Avenue P.O. Box 2549 Kirkland, Washington 98033 (206) 822-5548 RURAL ENERGY WASTE HEAT PROGRAM ST. MARY'S, ALASKA CONTRACT 08-3007 INDEX LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS OPERATING SEQUENCE AND PROCEDURES VALVE TAG DIRECTORY EQUIPMENT DIRECTORY HEATING: Electronic Probe Level Control BTU Meter Flow Meter Glycol Artic Pipe Pressure Relief Valve Expansion Tank Safety Relief Valve Guages . Thermometers Valves - Vic Butterfly Exhaust Fans w/Backdraft Dampers Pumps: P-1l and P-2 Heat Exchangers: HX-1 HX-2 HX-3 HX-4 CONTROLS: Base Relay Siren Fitting Remote Bulb Controller Astro Flash Integral Controller Detector Fire Alarm Control Panel Actuator Motor McDonnell-Miller #900M Hersey Products, Inc. Hersey Products, Inc. Dowtherm SR-7 Perma-Pipe Watts #17A 3/4 Wood Industrial #JBER-25-011 Conbraco #10-321-70 Set @ 30# Trerice #500xX Trerice Bx 914034 Victaulic #700 Acme 1-FQ-129-1 Armstrong Series 4030 Armstrong Series 4030 Armstrong S-45 Armstrong Series 1000 Armstrong Series 4260 Armstrong Series 4030 APV R860 APV SR35M-T APV SR35M-T APV SR15 Curtis CUS 8 Deltrol 20108-82 Federal 300GC Honeywell 104484A Honeywell T678A1080 Lectric Lite Model LL800 Robertshaw CXT-8603 Robertshaw DWT-8204 Robertshaw FMS-500 AZM-8401 CONTROLS CONTINUED: Temp Controller Temp Controller Well Valve Differential Pressure Switch ELECTRICAL: General Material Fixtures Gear Robertshaw T316 Robertshaw T1317 Robertshaw 100-52 Robertshaw V6800 United Electric J21K As Specified As Noted Cutler Hammer RURAL ENERGY WASTE HEAT PROGRAM ST. MARY'S, ALASKA LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS APV EQUIPMENT, INC. 395 Fillmore Avenue Tonawanda, New York 14150 (716) 692-3000 BRANOM INSTRUMENT COMPANY 5500 - 4th Avenue South P.O. Box 80307 Seattle, Washington 98108-0307 (206) 762-6050 COAST PRODUCTS 954 Elliott Avenue West Seattle, Washington 98119 (206) 285-5120 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 1011 Aurora Fairbanks, Alaska 99701 (907) 456-8000 GIBSON COMPANY 1400 Corgiat Drive P.O. Box 3714 Seattle, Washington 98124 (206) 767-4300 HOOPER ELECTRIC 16715 Aurora Avenue North P.O. Box 33579 Seattle, Washington 98133 (206) 363-1703 LIBERTY EQUIPMENT 2744 - 16th S.W. Seattle, Washington 98124 (206) 682-8700 MC DOUGALL CONTROL 2020 - 124th N.E. P.O. Box 746 Bellevue, Washington 98009 (206) 883-9000 HEAT EXCHANGERS BTU METERS, FLOW METERS EXHAUST FANS TEMPERATURE CONTROLS LEVEL CONTROL, PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES, EXPANSION TANK, SAFETY REFIEF VALVES, PUMPS ELECTRICAL VICTAULIC VALVES THERMOMETERS, GUAGES LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS CONTINUED RURAL ENERGY WASTE HEAT PROGRAM, ST. MARY'S, ALASKA MIDWESCO, INC. Perma-Pipe Division 7720 Lehigh Avenue Niles, Illinois 60648 (312) 966-2150 PRECISION AIR BALANCE, INC. 4451 Caravelle Drive Anchorage, Alaska 99502 (907) 248-1261 SALCO INSULATION, INC. P.O. Box 1914 Anchorage, Alaska 99501 (907) 277-5688 VAN WATERS & ROGERS Glycol Chemical Division 8201 S. 212th, Kent, Washington P.O. Box 3541 Seattle, Washington 98124 (206) 872-5000 PERMA-PIPE BALANCE INSULATION GLYCOL ST. MARY'S WASTE HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SYSTEM PURPOSE: The heat recovery system has been installed to capture heat generated by the diesel engines in the AVEC plant, that would otherwise be rejected to the atmosphere via the radiators, and transfer this heat to certain buildings in the village. The objective being to heat the buildings with waste heat in- stead of expensive fuel oil. SYSTEM DISCRIPTION AND OPERATION: There are two loops, one serving the Mission School and the other serving the City Cold Storage Euilding. The flat plate heat exchanger is piped in parallel to the existing PHS shell tube heat exchanger. Valves on lines into the existing shell and tube must be throttled back to force more flow thru the exchanger. After passing through the FPHE, the coolant goes to an existing amot valve, which is in a diverting mode. If less than 1809, coolant returns to the engine. Above 180° it continues on to the radiators and back to the engine. The two existing 15 H.P. motors used to control radiator fans have been replaced by two-speed fan units controlled by a two- stage aquastat with time delays to limit cycling. Return temperature of coolant to engines shall be controlled to 175° - 180°. (adjustable) Pressure relief valve EPHE is 30 psi. High temperature alarm is 190° supply line. Low temperature alarm is 160° return line, Low pressure alarm is 6 psi pump suction. No flow alarm on the return line. Glycol pump pressure switch is 12 psi. Control vaive bypass line opens at 175° and closes at 180°. There are three pumps serving the school loop. The module exhaust fan shall operate on thermostatic temperature using 80° (adjustable). During the heating season, one of the larger pumps would be operating. The other is a standby. The small pump is for summer use. The operator shall manually select the operating pump. The system should always be kept warm and operational. There are two pumps serving the city building. One is operating at all times. The other is for standby. The control valve in the bypass should be adjusted using the balancing valve to pass about 1Z3 the flow rate. When engine return temperature is below 175 Par control valve is open and when temperature is above 180°F., valve is closed. START-UP AND MAINTENANCE: System should be maintained full of 50% glycol solution and pressurized to approximately 15 psi. Air should be vented at system high points by slowly opening manual air vent valves. Valves taged N.O. should be open. Valves taged N.C. should be closed. Pumps are switched on manually in the Module. The system should be hot 160° - 180° before circulating pumps are turned on. The loop must always be maintained at a higher temperature than that which the boilers are set to come on in the buildings. The piping system should be maintenance free. The pumps must be lubricated periodically (every 6 months). See pump manu- facturers literature. Maintain an adequate level of glycol in the make-up barrel. SYSTEM TROUBLE-SHOOTING: Because the components of this system are relatively few, the process of locating any problems should be relatively simple. Some potential problems and solutions may be; LOW FLOW OR LACK OF HEAT: If the diesel generators are running and producing heat, check to be sure the pumps are running. If they are not be sure the proper circuit breaker is on, then switch the pump to the ON position at the starter. Check the fluid level in the system by 1. Make sure there is water/glycol in make-up tank 2. That system has approximately 15 psi pressure. If system still does not operate properly system may be air bound. To check this condition open valves at system high points slightly to vent air then close tightly. If the diesel generator fans are running constantly and the temperature in the Heat Recovery System is still low it may indicate a problem with the amot valves located in the engine cooling system. RURAL ENERGY WASTE HEAT PROGRAM ST. MARY'S, ALASKA VALVE TAG DIRECTORY Abbreviations: DH District Heating P Pump EW Engine Water HX Heat Exchanger NORMAL VALVE _# FUNCTION LOCATION SIZE POSITION DH-1 DH Supply Cold Storage 3" Open DH-2 DH Return Cold Storage 3" Open DH-3 Balancing Valve Cold Storage 3 Open DH-4 Air Vent Cold Storage 3/4" Closed DH-5 Drain Cold Storage 3/4" Closed DH-6 Glycol Vent AVEC 3/4" Closed DH-7 Glycol Vent AVEC . 3/4" Closed DH-8 Glycol Vent AVEC 3/4" Closed -9 Glycol Vent AVEC 3/4" Closed 4-10 Glycol Drain AVEC - 3/4" Closed DH-11 Glycol Drain AVEC 3/4" Closed DH-12 DH Supply : AVEC 5” Open DH-13 DH Return AVEC 5" Open DH-14 DH Supply Main Building 4° Open DH-15 DH Return Main Building 4" Open DH-16 Balancing Main Building 4" Open DH-17 Balancing Main Building ° qe Open DH-18 Glycol Drain Main Building 3/4" Open DH-19 Glycol Drain Main Building 3/4" ie DH-20 HX Supply Main Building a Open DHK-21 HX Supply Main Building 2" Open DH-22 HX Return Main Building 3" Open DH-23 HX Return Main Building 3" Open DH-24 DH Supply Gym Boiler Room 3” Open DH-25 DH Return Gym Boiler Room 3" Open DH-26 Balancing Gym Boiler Room 3” Open DH-27 Glycol Drain Gym Boiler Room 3/4" Closea DH-28 Glycol Drain Gym Boiler Room 3/4" Closed DH-29 Glycol Vent Gym Boiler Room 3/4" Closed DH-30 Glycol Vent Gym Boiler Room 3/4" Closed H-31 Glycol Vent Gym Boiler Room 3/4" Closed |e: Glycol Vent Gym Boiler Room 3/4" Closed | -33 Boiler By-Pass Gym Boiler Room 2" Closed DH-34 HX Supply Gym Boiler Room a* Open DH-35 HX Return Gym Boiler Room 2" Open NORMAL VALVE # FUNCTION LOCATION SIZE POSITION -36 P-1 Isolation Valve Module 3" Lean fi P-1 Isolation Valve Module 3" ipa H-38 p-2 Isolation Valve Module 3" aon DH-39 P-2 Isolation Valve Module 3" Coen DH-40 P-3 Isolation Valve Module 3" Goan DH-41 P-3 Isolation Valve Module 3" Cpen DH-42 P-4 Isolation Valve Module 3/4" Cisesd DH-43 P-4 Isolation Valve Module 3/4" Closed DH-44 P-7 Isolation Valve Module 3" pee DH-45 P-7 Isolation Valve Module 3" pists DH-46 P-8 Isolation Valve Module 3" Gea DH-47 P-8 Isolation Valve Module 3" ese DH-48 Expansion Tank Isolation Valve Module 3/4" Open DH-49 Gym/Main Bldg. DH Supply - Module 5" Open DH-50 Gym/Main, Bldg. DH Return Module 5" Open DH-51 AVEC Supply Module 5" Sie DH-52 AVEC Return Module 5" Heat DH-53 Hotel Cold Storage DH Supply Module 3" Open DH-54 Hotel Cold Storage DH Return Module a Open DH-55 HX-1 By-Pass Module Q" ou DH-56 Low Temperature Switch Module DH-57 High Temperatur Switch Module DH-58 No Flow Switch Module EwW-1 Engine Water Supply AVEC 6" Open y— 2 Engine Water Return AVEC 6" D Open ITEM # EQUIE HX-1 HEAT HX-2 HEAT HX-3 HEAT HX-4 HEAT CP-1 CIRC, CP-2 CIRC, CP-3 CIRC. CPp-4 CIRC. Cp-5 CIRC. CP-6 CIRC. CP-7 CIRC; EF-1 EXHAI EXP.TANK-1 EXPAl EXP.TANK-2 EXPAl 57 Maeys — A Vow M Mew. _* aa McDONNELL & MILLER Bulletin SL-900 330N McDONNELL 900 SERIES ELECTRONIC PROBE LEVEL CONTROL There are many ways to control liquid levels in boilers and tanks. The McDonnell 900 Series Control is an electrical device that utilizes an electrode inserted into the liquid, and the conductivity of the liquid, to complete the circuit to ground. This principle can be utilized to open and close relays, turn pumps on and off, or control the operation of heat generating equipment, all in relation to liquid level. McDONNELL & MILLER ITT FLUID HANDLING DIVISION HYDRONIC APPLICATIONS McDonnell 900 Series Probe Controls Good engineering practice has always recognized that hot water boilers should be safeguarded against low water condition. Such a safeguard is now required by Section IV of the ASME Boiler Code. The McDonnell 900 Series Probe Control is a simple, dependable way to provide such a safeguard. Whenever the water level drops below a minimum levei—whether caused by a relief valve discharge, a leak, or other un- (Preferred location for No. 902-M) ((C foreseen condition—it automatically breaks the electrical circuit to the burner. NN In the 900 Series, models are available— e With or without manual reset; e With or without test lamp; —__ ss ar e With or without retard feature (prevents nuisance ee tripping due to short power interruptions.) | | = Location on Hot Water Boilers The 900 Series may be installed in the boiler above the minimum water level established by the boiler manufacturer. Some man- ufacturers provide a suitable opening in the side of the boiler m7 qi —_— rF—-~ —_— If necessary, the cut-off may be installed in a 1% inch, or larger, y= Tee in the vertical riser above the boiler. Caution: If installed aah McDonnell 900 Series above the boiler, make sure the system is properly designed and Level Control fitted with vents to prevent air binding which could break the Maximum Pressure, 160 psi. control circuit. gs Maximum Temperature, 250° F. The 900 Series may also be installed vertically in a top opening of Minimum Underwriters’ Listed the boiler, providing there is no possibility of air binding around Water Level the probe. NOTE — On the Model No. 902-M, there is a short delay (approximately 35 seconds) after the water levei drops below = the probe before the burner circuit is de-energized. Because of =—_—__ this delay it is recommended that the No. 902-M be located above the boiler if at all possible. Boiler Water Control will function satisfactorily in ordinary tap water as sup- plied by practically all public water systems. Demineralized or distilled water with a specific resistance greater than 50,000 ohm-cm may require the addition of boiler compound. On models with test circuits, the resistance of the boiler water can be checked by the test button; if lamp lights, the circuit is complete through water to ground. Installation on Hot Water Boilers Caution: Do not tighten by turning cover or housing. Use 5 wrench on brass hex adapter the aa — Internally Wired Internally Wired ——_— —— | |- ) Average Make-up } | —— A" for 44” NPT p Caution: Do not tighten by oa } turning cover or housing. Use wrench on brass hex adapter | _— ty 120 Voit Claas Burner + T Circuit + Alarm [~ & : | , j— 2 —-| | Ut | Minimum width” | of Boiler Section | ——J ae a — Hot Neutral Horizontal Vertical ao hsatillaton Installations Supply 120 Volts A.C. Supply 120 Volts A.C. INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS McDonnell 900 Series Probe Controls No. 901 Level Control McDonnell No. 900 or Ms Maximum Pressure, 160 psi. HIGH LEVEL ALARM HIGH LEVEL SIGNAL HIGH LEVEL CUT-OFF START PUMP AT HIGH LEVEL STOP PUMP AT LOW LEVEL OR START PUMP AT LOW LEVEL STOP PUMP AT HIGH LEVEL LOW LEVEL ALARM LOW LEVEL SIGNAL LOW LEVEL CUT-OFF Maximum Temperature, 250° F. Underwriters’ Listed ete McDonnell Control for Tanks and Pressure Vessels up to 160 psi. For tanks or pressure vessels up to 160 psi., any of the essential functions listed above—either singly or in combination—can be accomplished by use of the McDonnell 900 Series Level Controls. Whether the desired operation is to ring an alarm, turn indi- cating lights on or off at a remote control panel, start and/or stop feed or drain pumps, or energize an electric valve . . . it can be done automatically. McDonnell 900 Series Controls will operate in ordinary tap water or other compatible liquids with a resistance no grea- ter than 50,000 ohm-cm. Typical Example: A water storage tank installed in an indus- trial plant. A high level alarm (Wiring Diagram 2) is utilized to indicate a flooding condition, and a low level alarm (Wiring Diagram 1) is utilized to indicate a below normal level condi- tion. These situations could occur from a sticking or leaking fill valve, or an inoperative pump. Typical Example: A smail storage tank from which liquid is drawn for amanufacturing process. To maintain an adequate level at all times, a solenoid valve (or pump) is turned on ata predetermined low level, and remains on until a predeter- mined high level is reached (Wiring Diagram 3). Low Level Signal or High Level Cut-off High Level Signal | or Low Levei Cut-off Stop Pump at High Level (Fill Tank or Pressure Vessel) High Level Control Low Level Control High Level Contro! High Level Contro! Internally Wired Internally Wired | Internally Wired Internally Wired SS = | r* | ‘eo [ae Interlock Interlock cf} | | ry | sare Terminats Terminals | 415 | Ors i ut L | ac | Vy lags eae eee [| Supply 120 Volts A.C | } Lo Low Level Control | Low Level Controi 1 | i Internally Wired | Internally Wired os" i 71 | load | q | J | | | | | | | 120 V. Coil Only 120 V. Coil Only Hot | | Neutral Hot | | Neutral (Contro! Circuit (Control Circuit Ww ——— Operating Current esratiee Catrent : Supplied by a supplied by Supply 120 Volts A.C Supply 120 Volts A C Supply 120 Volts AC M & M Controller.) Supply 120 Volts AC. M & M Controller.) 1. As main Line Switch 2. As main Line Switch for for 3. To Start Pump at Low Level, 4. To Start Pump at High Level, Stop Pump at Low Level (Drain Tank or Pressure Vessel) SPECIFICATIONS—McDonnell 900 Series Probe Level Controls These electrical devices utilize the conductivity of water. An elec- l tric circuit, composed of an electrode inserted in the liquid and the liquid itself, conducts current to ground, which then com- OPERATING DUTY pletes the circuit back to a control relay. If the liquid should drop Maximum Pressure—160 psi below the electrode, the electrical circuit will be broken and Seon Cee i e ° de-energize the relay. An isolation type transformer separates the 330N Maximum Temperatun 250° F. main power supply from the electrode circuits. 2 : ae El TRICA! Optional features include Manual Reset, Test Lamp for continuity Reece nal arce nl AME EES check of electrode circuitry, and Retard Feature to prevent man- Motor Duty: 120 V.A.C. 240 V.A.C. ual lock-out on short power interruptions. Full Load 5.8 2.9 a ea 125 ed 240 V.A e “ - = ilot Duty: = AC. Model | Automatic} Manual | Test | Retard eer IMPORTANT: Terminals. No. 7, No. 2 and No. 5, if — Reset_| Reset® | Light | Circuit | Test used, must always be wired to 120 volts 60 Hz x x Terminals No. 3 and 4 are isolated contacts, and __ 900€ x } x may be wired tor 24 volts, 120 volts or 240 volts | x 300M Caution: Voltage across probe to ground is 120 v | 901 x | = | liquid is not in contact with probe. + + [901m x | | | | | 902M qT Rea _J 4 *Manual Reset Feature Pat. 3,834,357 Circuit Test Lamp ’ Arcul Circuit Test Switch § 900, 900M, 902M No. 900 —One make circuit, one break circuit. Test lamp for continuity testing. No. 900-C —One make circuit, one break circuit. Test switch for burner continuity. I 63" 206 ole a | No. 900-M—One make circuit, one break circuit. ahs } 1 150" Test lamp for continuity testing. = 7 | Manual! reset feature on failing level | No.901 —One make circuit, one break circuit. No. 901-M—One make circuit, one break Circuit. 56" Manual reset feature on falling level. a4 No. 902-M—One make circuit, one break circuit. | Ya" Pipe Thread Test lamp for continuity testing. 7%" Knockouts Manual reset feature on falling level. Retard feature to prevent nuisance SS - 4 TOP VIEW tripping on short power interruptions. FRONT VIEW ; Note: Momentary power interruptions will cause No. 900-M and No. 901-M Manual Reset Switch (900M, 901M, vow | to break circuit: manual reset button must be pushed to restore opera- tion. If objec! je, use Automatic Reset No. 900, No. 900-C or No. 901, or Manual Reset No. 902-M which has special reterd circuit. Test Button and Lamp. Reset Button. Terminal Panel. nore cee Lcaaati Teagan ee Teflon Sleeve Brass Adapter Stainless Steel and alarm circuits. Electrode Rod Stainless Stee! ; Probe \ \¢ fh COMPLETE PROBE ASSEMBLY Porcelain Insulator Stainless Steel Bushing CONTROL HEAD ASSEMBLY (No.900-M Shown) Relay Isolation-Type Transformer McDONNELL & MILLER 3500 N. Spaulding Ave., Chicago, Ili. 60618 Printed in U.S.A. 5-80 Telephone: (312) 267-1600 elex: 25-3376 INTERNATIONAL TELEPHONE AND TELEGRAPH CORPORATION sail syau Veet cy 5 | Industrial Measurement Division | “Per Sey PRODUCTS, INC DEO Calvl { adaptable to a wide variety of Mh i i ira @neter inputs.Offers precise | eT measurement,economically, | ? i How it works: The surface-mounted display unit receives signals from a liquid flow meter and two temperature sensors that measure temperature differentials. A signal processor located inside the display unit translates this information into BTU's of heating or cooling Each temperature sensor is a monolithic circuit encapsulated into an immersible probe Electronics are packaged in a type NEMA 4 enclosure which iS dustproof and splashproof for Model 7001 and Model 7002 Enclosure for Mode! 7003 has NEMA 1 rating When to use: The Niagara 7000 Series is used to measure energy consumption for heat- INg and Cooling whenever it is necessary to isolate measurements within certain areas of a liquid heating/cooling system Flexibility: The Niagara 7000 Series is appropriate for virtually any situation because of its adaptability to various types of flow meters and inputs. The 7000 Series will utilize meters from the 400/500 Series. MHR and MVR Turbine Meters. Niagara Meters or Doppier Meters And the 7000 Series is also flexible in terms of the information you want it to provide The 7001 continually displays BTU consumption on an electromechanical totalizer. The 7002 continually displays both BTU consumption and the liquid units metered on electromechanical totalizers The 7003 features an LCD display which shows either instantaneous BTU consumption, flow rate or the temperature differential between the two measure- ment positions. according to which readout is selected by the push of a button At the same time, the 7003 records BTU consumption and totalizes the flow continuously on electromechanical totalizers The 7003 has 4 to 20 ma pro- portional output for BTU and flow rate i ero moleconecnaa |) ox? -to-the-minute Tune e) ue nenergy consumption. aie Use the Niagara 7000 Series BTU Measurement System to monitor energy consumption and— 1. Help identify areas where energy can be saved 2. Allocate charges among individual! consumers’ or departments within liquid heating/cooling systems 3. Evaluate equipment efficiency. The Niagara 7000 Series BTU Measurement System can be well-suited for use in — 1. Shopping centers 2. College and university buildings 3. Apartment complexes 4. Condominiums 5. Office buildings 6. Hotels and motels 7. Virtually any situation where liquid heating/cooling systems are used and individual accounting for consumption would be desirable or useful SPECIFICATIONS Model 7001 BTU totalization. remote totalization output ~ Model7002. ‘BI Utotaization and liquid units totalization remote totalization outputs S ~~ Model 7003 | BTU and liquid units totalization with e displ lay of BTU rate. f'ow rate or temperature Citferentials 4-20 ma pr Output for BTU andt os rate MPERATURE SENSORS _ __ype ~~ Operating | Temp R Range Response T Time Mounting Connecting Cable Length CONTROL UNIT 20°C to 125°C max over full operating rance ,) Max Les 5$ tn an 5 seconds Sensors have NPT threads for mating with standard plumbina connections Overall length 3 625° Insertion length 2 500 Insertion diameter 0 320 for % bore thermowell As required up to Maximum of 500 teet’*52 4m} each sensor Power Requirements Housing Mounting _ Dimensions Models 7001 & 7002 Model 7003 IL ooo Totalizers __ System Accuracy Display (7003 only) Differential Temperature Ranges 110 VAC at % AMP on an instrument grade line (clean) NEMA type 4 Model 7001 and 7002 NEMA type 1 Model 7003 — ec Ln 8 WwW. x 10 Hx4D (203 2mm x 254mm « 1 6mm) 8 W x10 Hx6 D (203 2mm x 25 sant EDS 5 digit non-reset t electromechanical _Within 2% of full scale B BTU/ hour rate for specified operati ing range __3% Dig CD 1-10°F (-17 210-12 2°C) _ 2-20°F (-16 7 to -6 79°C) 5-50°F (-15 Oto 10 0°C) 10-100°F (-12 21037 8°C) 20-200°F (-6 7 to 93 3°C) inciahied Measurement Division PRODUCTS, INC / Old Valley Falls Road. Spartanburg.S C 29303 Phone 803/578-3800 Telex 80-9430 Features Cast Bronze Outer Case Measuring Chamber Composed of a Foamed Polypropylene inlet Hub and a Polypro- pylene Rotor With A Stainless Steel Ring Strainer The Rotor is the Only Moving Part in the Measuring Chamber Exclusive Retro-Thrust® Feature Dura-Ori™ Register for Continuous Totali- zation or R-38 Pulse Output for Interface Recommended Service The Hersey MVR Models 350 & 650 are recommended for use with most liquids non- corrosive to bronze. _ MVR INDUSTRIAL TURBINE METER MODELS 350 & 650 The Hersey Model MVR is a Magnetic Drive Turbine Meter with an exclusive patented Retro- Thrust® feature which provides for longer life over a wide range of accurate flow rates. At low flow rates the rotor’s tungsten carbide thrust bearing floats against the tungsten carbide bearing located in the meter casing. As flow rates increase the retro-thrust allows the rotor to float away from the tungsten car- bide bearing. At high flow rates the rotor's stainless stee} shaft floats against the up stream sapphire bearing, thereby minimizing wear and thus assuring extended operating life. PERCENT REGISTEREO 22 2 ee 6 8 ©. LOSS OF PRESSUME-P BI Due to the design of the Model MVR it will operate with some small particles in the liquid and is usually not affected by turbulence so it does not require straight diameters of pipe before the meter. PERCENT REGISTERED 0 5000 200 300 “00 50 600 700 Specifications aa eee 350 650 jistration 100 USG/Sweephand Revolution 100 USG/Sweephand Revolution WED oie civic ce 0 wie wien ein cine eie vic cei eesereecraeees 12” 14” WIG ssi ce hs reser aes cme ses oe swe see eels 7h’ 9%" HIGH ...... connec ccc ccccctenccncrsecccctssacnes 8 7/16". ,9 ”" VNUs rresater cre 2 te tea eta ca tecetete etre epee wiecete te naeieaees 39 Lbs 65 Lbs. FN AING C ings ste ses 5 are oye eres wie oie 5 2s po ele vine eee STE OTE Tes 3” 150 Los. ANSI . 4” 150 Lbs. ANSI Operating Range...............0.eeeeee eee ees 5-350 GPM....... .. 5-650 GPM Max. Operating Pressure ..................... 150 PSI cssnssesm: -. 150 PSI Operating Temp. Range ....................-. BDO O seo seen wrote ies crt ca epsere ss ert exond 0 32-200° F TYPICAL APPLICATIONS Meter with R-38 Transmitter Hersey’ PRODUCTS INC. Old Valley Falls Road + Spartanburg, S.C. 29303 Phone (803) 578-3800 « Telex 80-9430 BTU Calculator Flow Rate Indication & Control Batching | - Chart Chart [necttsn | [ computer | Ea [ come | Proportional Output -Herse NIAGARA TURBINE WATER METERS MODEL MHR SIZES: 2”-3”-4"-6"-8"-10” REGISTER INLET HUB BOTTOM CASE DESCRIPTION The Hersey Model MHR Turbine Meter’ features a simple yet unique design which provides for along maintenance-free working life. while stressing ease of repair in the field or meter shop The MHR Turbine Meter measures cold water flowing in one direction The exclusive Hersey Retro-Thrust’ feature eliminates wear on the thrust bearing at nigh flow rates. thereby assuring extended operating life. At low flows the rotor’s tungsten carbide thrust bearing floats against the sapphire bearing assuring maximum accuracy METER CONSTRUCTION The Turbine has four basic parts: top case. bottom case. inlet hub. and rotor (see photo above). Register and change gears are easily accessible for meter recalibration No need to remove meter top case to calibrate. Flow straightening vanes are molded as part of the inlet hub — additional straightening vanes are not required Iniet hub and rotor are removed from the top case by merely loosening one retaining screw ROTOR The polypropylene rotor is the only moving part exposed to water. It floats in water thereby exerting minimum wear on the bearings. Rotor blades are designed for maximum efficiency at low flows. while fluid shear is controlled in order to maintain uniform registration at higher flows MAGNETIC DRIVE A ceramic magnet is mounted on the face of the rotor As the rotor turns, the one-piece magnet-worm gear located inside a hermetically sealed section engages the train gear spindle INSTALLATION In normal installations turbulence will not affect registration. thereby making it unnecessary to install straight pipe diameters ahead of the meter On6 and larger size turbine meters two eye bolts are provided to assist meter installation and for removal of the top case. it is recommended that a bypass pipe and gate valves be provided so that service to the customer will not be interrupted. If the meter is to be tested in the field. a test tee should be installed after the meter MAINTENANCE The top case assembly (which includes inlet hub and rotor) can be calibrated in a bottom case and then transferred to another case without recalibration. A spare unit. therefore, can be placed in the meter case while the unit to be serviced is removed to the meter shop Alternately, a cover plate is available to keep the customer's line in service while the measuring module is serviced An optional bronze strainer is available in 3° — 6” sizes. A cast iron strainer is available in 8 and 10" sizes. ae ae i a a | 2 ‘ad a ml 6" 8" 10° Opurating Range 5-160 gpm 8-450 gpm | 10-800 gpm | 15-1800 gpm} 20-3500 35-5500 +. Pressure Loss (at Max. recommended flow range) | Meter 3.5 psi 3.5 psi 4.0 psi 45 psi 4.4 psi 5.8 psi | Meter and . . ; Strainer WA 7.5 psi 6.5 psi 7.5 psi 7.3 psi 9.0 psi | Rotor Revolutions Par Gallon 115 | 3.7 23 55 32 14 + + = Rotor Revolutions | Per Cu. Ft. 86.0 | 277 17.2 41 24 1.0 - t 2-bolt 1 fi | -bolt oval flanges or End Detail | female spuds tapped Contorm to ASA 150 Ib. drilling | for 2" pipe thread { | ‘ a | Minimum Capacity of U.S. 100,000,000 gallons 1,000,000,000 gations Register Gallons 100 gallon/sweep hand revolution 1,000 gallons/sweep hand revolution | Cubic | 10,000,000 cu. ft. 100,000,000 cu. ft. ; i ' Feet | 10 cu. ft/sweep hand revolution 100 cu. ft./sweep hand revolution | | 10° 1,000,000,000 Cu. Ft L j | 1,000 Cu. Ft/swi hand revolut Accuracy 100% + 1.5% of actual inpuc Maximum Operating Pressure 175 psi Temperature Range 32° 130° VETER MATERIALS - All Sizes Top and bottom case - bronze . Rotor - polypropylene Thrust bearings - sapphire and tungsten carbide Magnets - ceramic Shafts and bolts - stainless steel Iniet Hub — synthetic polymer STRAINER MATERIAL 3” - 6" Sizes Bolts — Stainless Steel Cover — Bronze Gasket — Accopac Strainer — Stainless Steel Case — Bronze 8” and 10” Sizes. Bolts — Stainless Stee! Gasket — Accopac Strainer — Stainless Steel Case — Cast Iron Cover — Cast Iron | | | | | | ! APPLICATIONS * Irrigation systems Plant process lines * Golf courses ¢ Pierhead installations ° Water softeners « Car wash facilities ° Pump discharge Master metering Specialized industrial, applications METER SIZE AND DIAMETER OF WNLET AND OUTLET F—NO OF HOLES G — BOLT DIA — HOLE DIA Net Weight Pounds Maximum Recommended Fiow Range Screwed Flanged] Screwed Flanged 160 gpm 450 gpm 800 gpm *2 Bolt Flange 1800 gpm 3500 gpm 5500 gpm 4 (OPTIONAL) STRAINER WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS -——-—-—-—_,-_-_ | _- STRAINER (optional) ORDERING INFORMATION When ordering indicate: % DIA HOLES 1. Size of meter. 2. Registration-gals., cu. ft., or other units. 3. Cast iron or bronze companion F —NO OF HOLES flanges. Bolts, nuts, and gaskets included with companion fianges at no extra charge. G — BOLT DIA 4. Optional equipment: Bronze or cast iron strainer and/or bronze cover plate. aGaat ion H — HOLE DIA ACCURACY CURVE Ty HEAD LOSS ° 20 40 o 80 100 120 40 0 170 ° 20 «o o “0 100 120 40 60 170 “7 — 108 22 100 4 0 8 =: S90 = Eve if * a Ree T ‘ of — va 5 Be +—1 92 F = 90 | fo 90 & = 68 o 8 6 rs + 1 Be as tt eo - ° 20 «o 0 “0 0 RATE OF FLOW-US GPM ‘° 8 3 3 si 200 250300800 #1094 2 wo 190200 290300 38040080, 102 Pewee n dann pana fan -p ana penndemnnfennnpnnn fame fannnbmmnpewepemedicnadeceebewns = aioe 20} 1 | oot | +—t—| 20 100 100 +—— = fmpmtnt: / 1 1 B [ 8 2 g++ ++ t ; + } 6 o e; ] i} | | 96 wth —f. =e @ see sto , $ oO Bit leas + 4 +—he 5% H Fo—+— =e: ei 4 —- g 90) is : e - + v0 3 s 86 a +H 0 SCO RATE OF FLOW US GPM us GPM PERCENT REGISTERED OF PRESSURE ORwaLSI03M LNIDUE GRWBASIONY AwaouDe Old Valley Falls Road, Spartanburg, S. C. 29303 Phone 803/578-3800 Telex 80-9430 PRODUCTS eC GLYCOL: DOWTHERM SR-7 SUPPLIER: VAN WATERS & ROGERS Glycol-Chemical Division 8201 S. 212th Kent, Washington 98002 P.O. Box 3541 Seattle, Washington 98124 (206) 872-5000 Collect and distribute hot or chilled water, cryogenic liquids, fuel oil, chemicals and other fluids above or below ground with PolyTherm another performance piping system from Perma-Pipe. INSULATION INTEGRITY. Excellent thermal efficiency is attained because the Poly-Therm spray process assures void-free insulation. In some systems, when insulation is pumped into the air space between carrier pipe and the jacket, gas entrapments can cause voids or gaps. By contrast, Poly-Therm insulation goes on before the jacket is applied, permitting fool-proof visual inspection FILAMENT-WOUND JACKET. The Poly-Therm jacket provides maximum protection in all climates and environments and for high soil loadings and corrosiveness. A multi-directional filament winding process produces a maximum strength fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin jacket over the insulation. Ultraviolet inhibitors are added to the resin for aboveground applications. MATERIALS FOR ANY APPLICATION. Poly-Therm’s flexibility is vital because applications are seldom created equal. Carrier pipe can be made of such materials as steel, PVC, FRP. cement asbestos, copper, and ductile iron, ina wide range of sizes, to meet the rigors of projects ranging from chemically-treated water to highly-corrosive fluids, above or below ground CRITICAL-TIME FIELD SUPERVISION. Highest level of system integrity and installation ease is assured because Perma-Pipe’s certified field technicians visit your site to supervise unloading, preliminary installation and testing. By training your contractors, these experts help guarantee a quick and smooth installation Because only POLY-THERM combines features that assure specified performance now and for years to come. FULLY ENGINEERED. Because you probably need more than just an off-the-shelf product. Perma-Pipe's in-house engineering team considers stress analysis, thermal constraints, soil loadings, installed costs and other factors in designing your system. We build more inside and engineer more, too. So, you get the system you need—never less. MORE FACTORY FABRICATION. Your Poly-Therm system arrives with most of the work completed under factory-controlled conditions. Depending on requirements, T’s, loops, elbows, anchors and other fittings are normally finished in our plant. With most segments welded and tested, insulated, and sealed in a vapor-tight jacket before shipment, you are assured of the performance you're paying for. FEWER FIELD CONNECTIONS. Economies of reduced labor and a speedy, trouble- free installation result from maximum fabrication under factory-controlled processes. Poly-Therm’s design even speeds up the few required field connections. TRUE CONCENTRICITY Uneven insulation of the carrier pipe cannot occur with Poly-Therm’s exclusive patented process. Insu- lation is applied and measured before the jacket is wound on, thus assuring true concentricity of carrier pipe within the insulation. Reduces chance of heat loss or gain often occurring in piping that has unevenly applied insulation. brings exceptional reliability to these applications. GEOTHERMAL COLLECTION AND DISTRIBUTION. As energy costs spiral upward and tough environmental standards continue, alternative heat sources such as geothermal have become economically feasible in some regions. To make a geothermal resource Pay, many collection and distribution systems rely on precisely- engineered and prefabricated Poly-Therm from Perma-Pipe for efficient heat conserving fluid transmission WASTE HEAT RECOVERY. Energy conservation conserves resources. Innovative techniques, using Poly-Therm, collect and deliver heat formerly exhausted as waste. Industrial plants, electric generating stations and the like now take this heat by-product and use it for other processes or to heat facilities CRYOGENIC LIQUID PIPING. Flexibility of Poly-Therm preinsulated piping systems is vital to the delicate maintenance of cryogenic temperatures. Systems are indi- vidually designed to meet the stringent requirements of COz, LN2 and LNG wherever they occur. Poly-Therm’s urethane is the most efficient, cost-effective insulating material available. SOLAR COLLECTION AND DISTRIBUTION. From applications as simple as home heating to far more complex designs for offices, plants and institutions, solar installa- tions in this country and others signal the growth potential of this energy source. Maximum thermal efficiency from Perma-Pipe’s "4 Poly-Therm in collection and distribution of hot water helps make many of them possible. DISTRICT HEATING AND COOLING. Central systems for cities, developments, neighborhoods and industrial areas can deliver hot or chilled water via underground Poly-Therm. Their success can depend on the thorough Perma-Pipe engineering and prefabrication at our factory that > provide simplified installation, minimized heat losses and gains, and long-term reliability. PROCESS FLUID TRANSPORT. Process fluids and chemicals need to be transported at precise temperatures to prevent spoilage, stoppage, mixing problems and higher heating or cooling bills. Poly-Therm’s preinsulated consistency pays dividends. The non-corrosive jacket withstands virtually any environment HOT AND COLD WATER DISTRIBUTION. Whether above or below ground, Perma-Pipe’s Poly-Therm systems are designed and prefabricated for the most efficient delivery of hot or chilled water for each specific application. A compromise in heat loss or gain can be costly. FUEL AND HEAVY CRUDE OIL TRANSPORT. Viscous materials that travel well at prescribed temperatures can stop cold at the wrong ones. Perma-Pipe engineers carefully calculate insulation requirements for each Poly-Therm system to meet specified flow rates at ambient temperatures and even offer heat tracing to help insure constant pumping. FREEZE PROTECTION. Many fluids, including water, can be transported without worry about maintaining consistent temperatures. However, inclement weather can cause freezing, and frozen lines can be costly in many ways. Poly-Therm takes the worry out of temperature drops DISIRI —— ABOVEGROUND ANCHOR When fluids need freeze protection beyond the limits of the insulation, integral heat tracing can be engineered and supplied with each Poly-Therm system. Techniques include both steam and electrical tracing to meet the requirements of any conditions of your project. Simplified field connections. ROMANS SISRRES et rete tkcr er General. All underground and aboveground chilled and hot water lines, as indicated on contract drawings, shall be the Poly-Therm type, as manufactured by PERMA-PIPE. All straight sec- tions, fittings, anchors and other accessories shall be factory-fabricated to job dimensions and designed to rhinimize the number of field welds. Each system layout shall be computer analyzed by the piping system manufacturer to determine stresses on the carrier pipe, and anticipated thermal movement of the service pipe. The sys- tem design shall be in strict conformance with ANSI B31.1, latest addition. Factory-trained field supervision shall be provided for the critical periods of installatin, i.e., unloading, field joint instruction, and testing. Service Piping. Internal piping shall be standard weight carbon steel. All joints shall be butt-welded for sizes 2%" and greater, and socket-welded for 2" and below. Where possible, straight sections shall be supplied in 40' random lengths with 8" (200 mm) of piping exposed at each end for field, joint fabrication. Accessories. End seals, gland seals and anchors shall be designed and factory-fabricated to pre- vent the ingress of moisture into the system. Insulation. Carrier pipe insulation shall be spray- applied nominal 2 lb. per cubic ft. density (32 KG/m3), polyurethane foam for straight sections and preformed polyurethane foam for all fittings. All insulation shall be visually inspected prior to application of the protective jacket. The insulation shall be applied to a thickness of ____ inches (___ mm). Protective Jacket. All straight sections of the insulated piping system shall be jacketed in a filament-wound, polyester resin/fiberglass rein- forcement. composite, directly applied on the insulating foam to the nominal thicknesses specified below: Table of Thicknesses Pipe 1- 6"/ 25-150mm 8- 20" / 200 - 500 mm 180 mils / 4.5 mm 22 - 36" / 550 - 900 mm 240 mils / 6.0 mm All fittings of the insulated piping system shall be jacketed in a chopped spray-up, polyester resin/ fiberglass reinforcement composite, directly applied onto the insulating foam to a thickness related to the filament wound jacket thickness. Field Joints. After the internal pipe has been hydrostatically hammer-tested to 150 PSIG (10.5 kg/sq.cm.) or 1% times the operating pres- sure, whichever is greater. Insulation shall then be placed in the field weld area. The installer shall seal the field joint with wrappings of glass rein- forcement fully saturated with a catalyzed resin identical in properties to the factory-applied resin. a ialem(e)[al@elacr=Msar- lim ol ey-(e1.il| (cre mela are li(clml als) jacket has hardened, and has been visually inspected. All insulation and coating materials for making the field joint shall be furnished by lata lee Backfill. A 4" layer (100 mm) of sand or fine gravel shall be placed and tamped in the trench to provide a uniform bedding for the pipe. The entire trench width shall be evenly backfilled with a similar material as the bedding in 6" (150 mm) compacted layers to a minimum height of 6 - 12" (150 - 200 mm) above the top of the insulated piping system. The remaining trench shall be evenly and continuously backfilled in uniform layers with suitable excavated soil. oe Jacket 120 mils / 3.0 mm Perma-P ipe America’s Performance Piping Systems c PERMA-PIPE Division of Midwesco Inc 7720 Lehigh Avenue NTISSSMM Ae) ol @ Lette) 312/966-2150 TWX 910/223-0825 Poly-Therm Installation Instructions For Steel Pipe PVC Pipe Epoxy Lined Cement Asbestos Pipe APRIL 1, 1975 = PERMA-PIPE | 7720 Lehigh Avenue, Niles, I!linois 60648 AC 312/966-2150 A Division of Midwesco, Inc. CONTENTS Page SECTION I ee Te PUI 1 RL PIPE. i cs) eee Oa aa est ca ewan e 1 MUN sic fae Re Se hn Sok ey aS a ee OU Ae coy Re aay Od ae ok 1 REV TING MAIN) COPE RGENG 5 705.3 sss che 's5) ode Seder als ad aan sak rhe Dee Me aCe aad tee 1 ee RUINS PRED MEE TEAIO § os ks uhh 2b « 6S =): Cece Ue ss PR ge oe 1 REE sa OR ees ee witness Chases oN bass ca kis Cade eso bme ee 2 WELDING Cr 4A SL Ce BOR VICE PIPING © o.oo Pee ce FS 2 (GOED SPRING IN prec Be es ivi. Sie ahem cy shaganel NERD este se 00 co NRU Sana men ata, hase 3 Uy eres GI OR I ee awa wale ce dk a ae eee + PONT eID iin oOo os Si ng 1 Opie Aang ge ae os ale ea sewers eons 6 SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS FOR PVC AND EPOXY LINED CEMENT ESB ESOS MBUPE (Pe APS Megha: Phel Seba ays Ge thats. 0 euga< dahthancle co ahgs gh ee ahcor ee 7 CINTA os: eu er BIN Soe tre Fic ete Eg. Seo stmt nis CAM Mees RY cakes 7 EVAR OTS TIN GoSe oS ORIG a pon ag capt berks sa Us) ofall 4. 0 Mn et eee es abies gestae ia J i. es AT RANE OS Ais oe ER) aye kw odin eo ee ee wh Pele ESOP ESTE ENS Ly On| CERI caus? PR Ane a PL CO RR tS SM, Sy ih PUTA URSS Leg: 1s 1s OOGEIN Gs. sGr me ee Cresta Ma Wishes Mee 6 a tds ud topes oy 0’ aecge acomiel gv eon! sueuMalls, 1, 7 INSTAL AION OF PV G-GARRIER: PIPE, 32). .%5¢ 0.3 icienieis biel olretaiens rete ett oe 10 INSTALLATION: OF EROXY LINED CEMENT ASBESTOS-PIPE - (07 2c os 14 1.0 Ll 2.0 24 22 SECTION I POLY-THERM INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR STEEL PIPE General The Poly-Therm Prefabricated Piping System is a carefully engineered and fabricated insulated piping system. These instructions are written to explain how to install the system economically, simply and sensibly. The handling of individual components is an im- portant as the field welding and trench setting. Close supervision of the material handling aspect of the field installation must be maintained by the installing contractor. It is imperative that the outside jacket of the system be free from defects and damage when it is finally covered over. To insure a dependable insulated piping system, carefully follow this step-by-step instruction booklet. If questions arise concerning any aspect of the field handling and installation, contact your PERMA-PIPE serviceman for explicit in- structions. Close attention to details in the field will mean fewer on-the-job expenses for the con- tractor, simpler installation, and a completed job which will meet the specifications, obtain quick approval, and perform reliably in service. Receiving and Checking The PERMA-PIPE components are shipped by truck or gondola car, with protective coverings over all open ends, carefully braced to prevent damage during shipment. It is extremely impor- tant to check the condition of the system as it is unloaded. Packing lists are included with all ship- ments. Note any shortages or damages on the freight company’s bill of lading, otherwise future filing of claims will not be honored. Notify PERMA-PIPE, 1650 N. Elston Avenue, Chicago, Illinois 60622, should replacement components be needed. In accordance with ICC. regulations, freight claims must be filed within nine (9) months of date of shipment. Poly-Therm sections must be handled carefully to avoid damaging the outer jacket. Each section should be supported by one or more nylon slings. On larger systems, or where the com- ponents are heavy, use a spreader bar. The spreader bar is simple to build and will greatly reduce the time and cost of moving the system components. Special nylon unloading slings can be borrowed from PERMA-PIPE, transportation charges to be paid both ways by the user. On site storage of Poly-Therm section shall be in ac- cordance with Illustration No. 1. ILLUSTRATION NO. 1 3.0 Sel SHIPPING SEALS 1” x 6" EVERY 8° BLOCKS Care must be taken to keep the units above the ground and retain the end closures until ready for use to prevent dirt and water getting into the service piping. It is important that the Poly- Therm jacket be protected by excelsior padding — included with shipment — when storing for future use. When lowering into the trenches, avoid side bangs or hard drops. The open ends must always be protected with the Poly-Therm shipping seals until the section are to be assem- bled together. Trenching and Backfilling For trench details see Poly-Therm Drawing MP- 115. The bottom of the trench should be graded to be installed designed slope of the system. The trench should be completely de-watered in the vicinity of the field joints. There should be a packed dirt base 4” thick under the system. As- semble unit by unit in the ditch, dig a 3’-0” bell hole under the weld area only, or dig a deep- er trench and lay entire system on 4 x 4’s, pro- perly aligned to obtain correct system slope. Hand tamp dirt fill into the hole after the joint is closed and remove 4 x 4 in process. ILLUSTRATION NO. 2 TAMPED FILL 4” BASE TRENCH-CROSS SECTION 3.2 To backfill, hand pitch dirt or sand in even layers long runs may be turned for top position weld- —free of rocks —around the Poly-Therm sections ing. Expansion loops, where needed, can be com- until it is covered. Hand tamp. Do not machine pletely made up before lowering into trench. If backfill until the entire system has been tested conditions are right, 90% of the work can be and approved. Do not backfill with heavy wheel- completed above the trench, and considerable ed or tracked moving vehicles. Care should be time can be saved providing adequate equipment taken to backfill from both sides of the sections is available to lower the material into the trench to eliminate side pressures. Traffic should cross without excessive flexing. the trench over timbers at pre-selected locations 42 Hate fill hasisettled Poly-Therm Prefabricated straight pipe units without fittings are shipped where possible in 3.3 Under black topping and other flexible pave- approximate 40 foot lengths for pipe sizes 3” ments, a minimum height covered of 10” is and larger, and 20 foot lengths 2%” and below, satisfactory. Under concrete or other rigid pave- except where design conditions or type of ser- ments, a minimum of 4” cushion should be be- vice pipe materials require smaller lengths. The tween the bottom of the slab and the top of the use of 40 foot lengths will eliminate many field Poly-Therm. For special installation situations, joints. Odd lengths to complete runs, loop and consult the PERMA-PIPE Engineering Depart- other miscellaneous fittings, are shipped as ment. necessary. 4.0 Layout Interior pipe extends 3 beyond each end of the jacketed insulation. Units are installed in ac- 4.1 It is usually best to connect all straight runs of a cordance with the PERMA-PIPE Part Layout system or segment first, and accessories and ter- Drawing. Each section or piece is marked witha minal connections last. Units may then be cou- part number and identified with corresponding pled together before lowering into trench, and part number of the drawing. (Steel Pipe only). ILLUSTRATION NO. 3 ILLUSTRATION NO. 4 DOUBLE RANDOM 40’ -0” FOR PIPE SIZES 3” AND ABOVE 1S RANDOM 20'-0" FOR PIPE SIZES 2%" AND BELOW ee oa INSULATION SERVICE PIPING INSULATION SERVICE PIFEO:D, “SERVICE PIPE REINFORCED POLYESTER O.D. RESIN COATING CLOSURE INSULATION 4.3 5.0 6.0 6.1 Poly-Therm sections must be arranged so that pipes are in proper alignment before they are welded. Check paragraph entitled ‘Cold Spring- ing”, for expansion loops, L and Z bends before making service pipe welds between sections. Welding of Carbon Steel Service Piping First, the weatherproof end closures must be re- moved. The service lines must be properly align- ed before welding of the lines can begin. All steel welding procedures must comply with contract specifications. In the event that welding is not covered in the contract documents then PERMA- PIPE recommends that procedures comply with USAS B31.1 American Standard Code for Pres- sure Piping, latest edition, for the specific ma- terial. All pipe welds should be subjected to a minimum hydrostatic and hammer test of 150 psig or 1% times the working pressure, which- ever is greater, unless otherwise indicated in the contract documents. Cold Springing Depending on service temperatures, PERMA- PIPE design will at times require “‘cold spring at expansion loops, L, and Z bends’. When cold springing is required all Poly-Therm sections shall be properly located according to the part layout drawing furnished by PERMA-PIPE. Dur- ing laying of pipe, make certain that legs of the expansion loop are perpendicular to the main run and parallel to each other. All field welds of the internal service lines shall be made anchor to anchor, with the exception of the field joint where cold springing is required, denoted by the symbols C.S. shown on part layout drawings. ILLUSTRATION NO. 5 6.2 6.3 6.4 The ends of the service lines of adjacent pieces must be separated by a distance equal to the amount of cold springing indicated on the part layout drawing. Note cold springing should not be performed until concrete anchor blocks have been formed and poured. The concrete block shall be cast over the plate and conduit and shall be large enough for firm anchorage into undis- turbed trench side walls and/or bottom (refer to detail drawing). It should be noted that elbows of expansion loops, “L” and “Z” bends requir- ing cold springing have been manufactured to a shorter length so that upon the proper appli- cation of the cold springing procedure the sys- tem will fit exactly to job dimensional require- ments. NOTE: OVERSIZE CASING AT EXPANSION ELBOWS AND LOOPS MUST BE COMPLETE- LY BACKFILLED BEFORE COLD SPRING- ING OF SERVICE PIPING. Tack weld angles with stud holes to the end of adjacent pipes at the field joint(s) denoted on part layout drawing by C.S. Insert a bolt through the stud hole and tighten nut to draw pipe ends together to the specified amount of cold spring. Cold springing must be performed at all joints indicated by the symbol C.S. and to the required amount. Do not exceed this amount. Each leg of an expansion loop must be cold sprung as indi- cated. Cold springing from one side only will not be allowed. After cold springing, tack weld pipe joint, burn off angles, and complete pipe weld. Inspect pipe surface for damage and repair as necessary. *{ ~ 16” PLUS COLD SPRING AMOUNT OF COLD SPRING 3" cael TO ANCHOR PIPE POSITION AFTER COLD SPRING DETAIL X-X OVERSIZED URETHANE|INSULATION ILLUSTRATION NO. 6 =, 5.0 Field Alterations Del Poly-Therm systems can be modified in the field without recourse to special type tools, etc. To shorten a unit, determine the length to be re- moved, mark the coating 8” beyond the cut mark, and with hack saw (coarse tooth) cut the jacket and insulation down to the inner pipe. The insulation and the jacket can then be slipped off the pipe. The pipe can then be cut at the point 8” from the insulation. To lengthen a run, anything over 2’ should require a filler piece from the factory. Less than 2’ can be made up by installing a short pipe length and covering with extra field joint material. 1.0 2.0 3.0 3-1 3.2 SECTION II POLY-THERM INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSULATED PVC AND EPOXY LINED CEMENT ASBESTOS PIPE General Attention is directed to Page 1 of Section I for general instructions, including receiving and checking. Handling and Storage Poly-Therm sections must be handled carefully to avoid damaging the outer jacket and pressure pipe. When lifting cement asbestos pipe, support with a nylon sling. PVC units are light, making it possible to hand-off-load. Storage of units should be on a flat surface free of rocks. For units con- taining PVC avoid prolonged exposure to direct sunlight. Trenching and Backfilling The bottom of the trench should be graded to the installed designed slope of the system. There should be a packed sand base 4” thick under the system without any rocks or hard patches (see Il- lustration 2). Minimum trench depth is deter- mined by local frost penetration and severity of overhead loads. Where frost is a factor, pipe should be buried 6” below lowest recorded frost penetration depth, or a minimum of 24” in areas where frost penetration is not severe. Use clean, washed sand for bedding and backfil- ling. Backfill material shall be inert, free flowing, granular materials with the following character- istics: a. Less than 12% by weight, passing No. 200 sieve. Fines non-plastics b. Size of particles not larger than 3/8” c. Free of organic material, loam, trash, snow, ice, stones, etc. Materials not qualifying as above shall not be used. Note that backfilling must be done by hand, shoveling simultaneously on both sides of the conduit in such a manner that unequal or unbalanced side pressures do not occur. Backfill shall be placed by hand in 6” layers and tamped to a minimum distance of 6’’ over the top of the pipe. The backfill materials shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% of the maximum density as determined in accordance with ASTM D1557 for cohesive soils, or to 75% relative density as determined in accordance with ASTM D2049 for cohesionless soils which fail to produce a well defined moisture-density relationship when test- ed in accordance with ASTM D1557. Compact- ing shall be done as to avoid damage to pipe 333 3.4 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 5.0 Sal wall. Remainder of backfill shall be placed as di- rected by the engineer. In-place tests of soil den- sity shall be made in accordance with ASTM D1556 or ASTM D2167. NOTE: Mechanical compactors may be used pro- vided harmful shock loads are not transmitted to the pipe. Maintaining a space of at least one foot between tamping feet and pipe wall should avoid damage to the pipe wall. From a point 6” above the insulated pipe, back- fill with a 6” layer of sand or excavated soil free of rocks and organic materials. Continue hand shoveling sand or excavated soil, free of rocks, tamping until grade level is obtained. CAUTION: Under no conditions shall heavy ma- chines or traffic crossings be made over the buried pipe system without special precautions. It is recommended that load carrying areas be brought to the attention of PERMA-PIPE’s engi- neering department so that they may make specific recommendations as to minimum depth of burial and sleeving requirements. When an unstable subgrade condition is en- countered and, in the opinion of the engineer it cannot support the pipe, an additional depth shall be excavated and refilled to pipe founda- tion grade with crushed stone or other suitable material as required by the engineer to achieve a satisfactory trench bottom. Pressure Testing Pressure testing should be done in relatively short sections. Backfill pipe immediately after laying pipe in trench, leaving joints exposed for pressure test- ing. Thrust blocks must be installed prior to testing. Test ends should be capped and braced. Before applying pressure, all air should be re- moved from the line. A bleeder valve may be in- stalled at one end of the line to accomplish this. Thrust Blocking Thrust blocks should be used with PVC and as- bestos cement pipe where the pipe (1) changes direction, such as at ells and tees, (2) changes size, (3) capped ends, and (4) at valves. 5.6 Sa 5.8 6.0 Anchorage Of Valves In The Line Under pressure conditions, valves in sizes 3” or larger must be anchored against the thrust cre- ated when the valve is closed. Area of undisturb- ed soil which braces the thrust block must be large enough to withstand the thrust in whatever direction it is exerted. Construction of Thrust Backing Concrete thrust blocks are constructed by pour- ing concrete between the fitting and the undis- turbed bearing wall of the trench. A dry mixture is prepared so that the concrete may be easily shaped into the desired form, a wedge with the wide end against the solid wall. Note the shapes and positions of the thrust blocks in the draw- ings. NOTE: When installing asbestos cement pipe wherever the location and/or size of thrust block requires concrete to extend past the bell of the fitting onto the pipe, a short length of pipe should be used to maintain a flexible pipe joint coming out of the rigid block. Installation of Poly-Therm with PVC Carrier ILLUSTRATION NO. 8 6.1 6.2 Pipe Bell & Spigot Joints for Service at 73°F at 160 p.s.i.g. Receiving and Storing Rubber Gaskets and Lu- bricants Sufficient gaskets and lubricant for as- sembly of a pipe shipment are supplied with the pipe. The quantity received should be checked prior to signing for the shipment. Gaskets and lubricants (see Table 7) should be stored at a central point to avoid loss and damage. Gaskets should be kept clean, away from oil, grease, ex- cessive heat or cold, and ozone producing electric motors. Trench Distribution The following guidelines for stringing out pipe should be followed: a. String pipe as near the trench as possible. b. String only enough pipe for one day’s laying to avoid loss due to vandalism. c. Be sure bell end points in direction of work progress. d. Gaskets may be inserted in the bell prior to stringing pipe. However, this should be limited to the pipe which will be installed immediate- ly to avoid excess dirt and grease getting on gasket. MULTI-DIRECTIONAL FILAMENT WOUND POLYESTER JACKET 1" THICK URETHANE FOAM PVC PIPE (CLASS 160) CROSS SECTION OF FIELD JOINT \ RUBBER SEALING RING LE POLY-THERM INSULATED PVC PIPE PIPE SIZE SCHEDULE A B Fl c L LAYING WT. PER JACKET LENGTH FT. | LIN. FT.LB. | THICKNESS 1-1/2" 1.9” 4.020” | 20'—3” 20’ 379 -060 ae 2.375” 4.495" | 20'— 3-1/4" 20° 583 -060 2-1/2” 2375°" 4.995” | 20’ — 3-1/2” 20° 830 060 3” 3.5” 5.620” | 20’ — 3-1/2” 20° 1.215 060. 4” 45” 6.620” | 20'— 4-1/4" 20° 1.985 060 5” 5.63” 7.683” | 20’—5” 20° 2.963 -060 Ge 6.625” 8.785" | 20'—5-1/4” 20° 4.244 -060 Br 8.625” | 10.785" | 20’—6” 20° 7.176 060 10” 10.75" 12.91" 20’ — 0” 19’-6" 10.596 060 12s 12.75" 14.91” 20’ — 0” 19°-4-1/4"" 14.128 Be 060 10 Ar. 7.3.2 Place rubber gaskets inside coupling groove with holes facing center, After placing, snap the gas- ket at the four quarters of its circumference to insure that the gasket is properly seated in the groove. 7.3.3 Throughly clean pipe ends to be assembled be- fore lubricating. The lubricant should be applied either by a 2” flat paint brush, glove, clothpad, or by hand: to the entire machined pipe end and rubber gasket. Keep lubricated pipe ends and coupling clean after lubricant has been ap- plied. Do not leave dry spots. 7.3.4 Cement asbestos pipe is furnished with common groove gaskets in pipe sizes 6"’ thru 16’. Sizes 4”, 18” 20”, & 24” manufactured to a dif- ferent gasket profile. Refer to table 8 and 9 for details of pipe machined ends. 7.3.5 Align pipe end with coupled end. IMPORTANT: Make sure Certa-Spacer® band is flush against first shoulder of unbelled end of pipe. (For 4”, 18”, 20”, & 24” pipe — refer to table 8). 7.3.6 Shove until assembly is made for pipe sizes 4”, 18’, 20” & 24”, push until coupling is against Certa-Spacer® band. 7.3.7 Proceed to make next joint in the same manner. 7.3.8 Items needed for joining the pipe 3” to 8” Pipe 10” to 24” Pipe Large Crowbar Coupling Puller (optional) Block of Wood Large Crowbar Lubricant Block of Wood 2” Flat Paint Brush Lubricant 2” Flat Paint Brush 7.4.0 Fittings 74.1 Cast iron fittings and valves with common gro- ove profiles aré available for connections to cement asbestos pipe. Sizes 18” thru 24” re- quired special fitting gaskets. Adapters are re- quired for connection to cast iron mechanical and slip joint fittings. 7.4.2 The gasket ring grooves of the C.I. fittings and the gasket must be fully coated with lubricant before inserting the gasket. 7.4.3 Check the location of the gasket after field as- sembly with a feeler gauge inserted between the coupling and the pipe. Where a Certa-Spacer® is used, it should be removed by either cutting or pulling back over the shoulder. To assure total flexibility in the smaller sizes of pipe, the Certa- Spacer® must be positioned to its original lo- cation to prevent “closing” as succeeding as- semblies are made. If the Certa-Spacer® has been 15 cut, it is sufficient to drape it over the pipe in its original position so that there is approximately 180° contact with the pipe. This will prevent further closing of the pipe ends. 7.5.2 At points of entry to manholes and buildings, a short length of not more than 6’ — 6” laying length shall be used to provide flexibility at the wall (Refer to illustration #8) these shorter lengths must be ordered from PERMA-PIPE. ILLUSTRATION NO. 12 Wane CLAMP AND TIE ROD: TO RESIST THRUSTS SHORT LENGTH SAND COVER THRUST BLOCK SHORT LENGTH COUPLING TABLE NO. 8 MACHINED PIPE END DIMENSIONS FOR 4”, 18”, 20”, & 24” PIPE. ———————____—_____, Cc 080" R. MAX. +——— CERTA - SPACER Bond oe Riese He rR BoD * ODa2 0.0, NOM. SIZE NOM. 0.D., O.D., Cc P oc PIPE & CLASS Lon” aD** 202 +.02” +,06” | +.06” | +20 + — 4"" — 150 4.00 5.14 4.81 4.97 2.90 | 15 16° 18” — 150 18.00 21.20 20.94* | 21.10* I 4.88 1.00 | 220 20” — 150 20.00 23.54 23.28* | 23.44* 4.88 1.00 22° 24” — 150 24.00 28.22 27-965. |i. 28125 4.88 | 1.00 22° os TABLE NO. 9 MACHINED PIPE END DIMENSIONS FOR PIPE 6” THRU 16” — COMMON GROOVE. BoD NOM. SIZE NOM. O.D., 0.D., Cc B as PIPE & CLASS 1.D. B:0:D.** +.02 +.02 +.06 | + +.02 he 6” — 150 5.80 ole 6.91 7.07 2.40 75 16 8” — 150 7.80 9.32 9.11 9.27 2.40 75 16 [ 10” — 150 10.00 11.85 11.66 11.82 2.40 75 16 12” — 150 12.00 14.11 13.92 14.08 | 2.90 | 1.00 16 14" — 150 14.00 16.41 [ 16.22 16.38 | 3.25 | 1.00 18 16” — 150 16.00 18.65 18.46 18.62 3:20 | 1/00 18 L = Tb” *-0.D.1 & O.D.2 Tolerance for 18”, 20” & 24” = +.03” + 06” ** . Subject to Manufacturing Tolerances Certa-Spacer is a registered trademark of Certainteed Products Corp., Valley Forge, Pa. 16 7.6.0 Hydrostatic Test 7.6.1 At this point, the line has been partially back- filled, with couplings exposed. The soil around the bottom half of the coupling should be firmly tamped. Be sure the concrete thrust blocks have been cured 24 hours to prevent cracking. If the entire line is not complete at this point, tem- porary test ends may be installed and given tem- porary thrust blocking. Test sections should not be more than 1,000 ft. in length. 7.6.2 The end cap, not furnished by PERMA-PIPE, usually a mechanical type, with a tapped offset bleeder should be temporarily blocked to virgin soil at the ditch end or by timbers set in notches in the ditch wall. A jack should be used be- tween the cap and the blocking to take up any movement of the cap until the blocking is firm- ly set. 7.6.3 Venting air from the line is of major importance. Each coupling is in itself a small air dome. Vents must be installed at all high points in the system. A low static water pressure (SOpsi) held on the line for at least 24 hours will force any normal amount of air from the test section. Before the line is brought up to full test pressure, all air vents should be opened and any remaining air blown from the line again. 7.6.4 A test pressure of 50 psi over the actual work- ing pressure is generally sufficient unless the specifications call for a higher pressure. This pressure should be held constant for two hours. Gauge readings should be taken at the low point in the line to insure that the test pressure does not exceed the specified pressure. 7.6.5 The leakage test should be made with normal constant working pressure. Use leakage al- lowance table (table 10). A straight sided vessel (55 gal. drum) that can be calibrated to gallons per inch of depth can be used to pump from. After the test limit is up, the amount of water pumped from the drum can be measured and checked against the allowable leakage table. 7.6.6 If either of the above tests fail, the following check points may be helpful in locating the leak: 1. Dirt or foreign material under the coupling gasket. . Pipe not sufficiently covered in trench. . Fittings and valves in test section not suf- ficiently blocked. . Air in line (no relief valve). . Leakage through valve at end of test section. . Packing on.valves leaking. . Test pump leaking. Check-valve as well as gatevalve and pressure gauge. 8. Fittings not sufficiently thrust blocked. 9. Testing too long a section of pipeline. 10. Ruptured pipe-cracked, blown out. 11. Broken couplings. Occasionally a leak will not show on the surface due to good draining soil under the pipe. Sensi- tive transistorized leak detectors can be em- ployed to locate a hard-to-find leak. After all tests are made, all couplings left open for in- spection should be covered, tamped and final backfill completed. wn NAW L TABLE NO. 10 EPOXY LINED CEMENT ASBESTOS PIPE ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE PER 100 COUPLINGS* PIPE TEST PRESSURE AT LOWEST POINT IN LINE — psi DIAMETER 50 75 | 100 125 | _ 150 200 225 IN. LEAKAGE — gph 4 0.71 0.87 | 1.00 102) eee 1.42 1.51 6 a] Seite a ae 1.68 1.84 22 2.25 8 1.42 1.72 2.00 2.24 2.45 2.84 S00nual 10 Es 2.15 2.50 2.79 3.07 3.54 3.75 12 2:12 2.58 3.00 3.35 3.68 4.24 452 | 14 2.48 3.01 3.50 3.91 4.28 4.96 5.26 | 16 2.83 s144ih | AOn 4.47 4.89 5.68 6.00 18 3.18 3.87 4.52 5.02 5.52 6.37 6.75 20 3.54 4.30 5.00 5.58 6.12 7.08 7.51 24 4.24 5.16 6.00 6.69 rE 7.34 8.50 9.01 *The data are based on 150 psi and represent a leakage of approximately 30 gpd per mile of pipe per inch of pipe diameter for pipe in 13-ft. lengths. 17 7.7.0 Field Cutting 7.7.1 To shorten a unit, ,determine from illustration No. 10 the “M” dimension. Taking this dimen- sion add the dimension of the pipe length to be removed, and measure this total distance from the plain end of the cement asbestos pipe. Mark the coating, and with a hack saw cut the jacket and insulation to the cement asbestos pipe. The jacket and insulation can then be removed from the pipe. Measuring again from the end of the pipe, mark the length of pipe to be removed. 7.7.2 Pipe cuts and machining can readily be made by using a “Pilot,” “Matthews,” “Tapertool,” “Reed,” or similar cutter. Your PERMA-PIPE agent will be glad to quote prices for hand oper- ated cutters on request. These cutters are ad- justable to the full range of pipe sizes and can be easily dismantled for storage. 7.7.3 In emergencies, if only a few pieces are to be cut, a standard two-man cross-cut saw may be used. Since asbestos cement pipe is abrasive, frequent resharpening and resetting will be necessary. Teeth should be set wide. Before be- ginning cut, mark the pipe all the way around to help keep the cut square. Rotate pipe while cut- ting. Saw should follow a circular pattern. Do not try to cut completely through pipe wall on first cut. Do not use a cold chisel or standard iron pipe cutter as they may fracture the pipe, producing ragged, uneven edges. A portable electric saw with a flexible or abrasive blade may also be used. The pipe is rolled as the cut is made. 7.74 A coupling surface can be machined on the TS rough barrel of the pipe, using “Pilot,” ‘‘Mat- thews,” “Tapertool,” “Reed” or similar machin- ing tools. Mount pipe to provide sufficient clear- ance for the tool. Use the manufactuere’s in- structions for tool use. Refer to tables 8 and 9 for dimensions of machined surface. Using a field epoxy kit, apply a thin 20 mil coating on the field machined pipe end, back to the stop shoulder. Care should be taken to apply epoxy to nose of pipe and inside surface. Fol- low mixing instructions contained on -can. Epoxy field kits are not furnished with pipe. They must be ordered from PERMA-PIPE rep- resentative. 7.7.6 Again using a hack saw, cut jacket 3” to 4” back and remove, tapering insulation at the same time to the pipe surface. Apply glass cloth and resin to exposed insulation surface following procedure described in section I Paragraph 7.4.0. Glass and resin should be applied to bare surface of the pipe to provide a water tight seal. Avoid application of glass and resin on to the machined surface. Refer to Table 11 for quantities of resin and glass. TABLE NO. 11 QUANTITIES OF GLASS & RESIN REQUIRED FOR FIELD CUTS OF EPOXY LINED CEMENT ASBESTOS PIPE CARRIER RESIN NO. of TOTAL AMOUNT OF GLASS PIPE SIZE (QUARTS PER JOINT) GLASS LAYERS CLOTH 6” Wide (ft.) 4 25 2 6 50 2 : 7 8 7.0 4 16.25 70 T.0 4 18.25 72. 125 4 21.25 14 150 4 23.00 16 150 4 26.0 18 1.75 4 29.0 20 2.0 4 32.0 24 2.0 4 38.0 CATALYST IN TEASPOONS PER QUART AT THE FOLLOWING AIR TEMPERATURES — 20 MIN. CURE 60°F 70°F | 80°F I 90°F 100°F 2 1-3/4 | 1-1/2 | 1-1/4 1 NOTE: OCCASIONALLY RESIN MIXTURES WILL VARY AND GIVE CURE TIMES THAT ARE NOT 20 MINUTES. THE ABOVE CATALYST QUANTITIES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT VERY SMALL PORTIONS BE TAKEN AT FIRST TO DETERMINE MIXTURE NEEDED TO OBTAIN DESIRED CURE TIME. 18 7.8.0 Damages 7.8.2 Shallow scratches on the machined end of the pipe should be sanded smooth so the rubber ring can seal the area. Deeper scratches or gouges will prevent the ring from seating and the entire area should be cut off, and the end of the pipe re-machined coat these areas with epoxy. 7.8.1 Pipe sections damaged before installation can be cut off, and the balance used for short lengths where needed. If the coupling area of the pipe has been chipped or cracked more than % inch from the end, cut off the damaged area at least one inch beyond the defect and re-machine the end. 19 He SEE NOTE iio SINGLE SYSTEM MULTIPLE SYSTEM NOMINAL SYSTEMS TRENCH MINIMUM TRENCH WIDTH A FOR DIAMETER | WIDTH A MULTIPLE SYSTEMS IS DETERMINED pn BY ADDING 12" TO THE NOMINAL SYSTEM DIAMETERS REQUIRED. EXAMPLE: B= 4" NOMINAL SYSTEM DIAMETER c= 4'' NOMINAL SYSTEM DIAMETER E= B+C+12" E= 20" —)} SPACING BETWEEN SYSTEMS, DIMENSION X, IS DETERMINED BY ADDING 4" TO THE RADIUSES OF ANY TWO SYSTEMS. EXAMPLE: B= 4'' NOMINAL SYSTEM DIAMETER C= 4" NOMINAL SYSTEM DIAMETER X= 5 OF B+ 4% OF C + 4" X= 8" PERMA-PIPE DIVISION Midwesco, Inc. 7720 Lehigh Avenue *NOTE: Niles, IL 60648 REST IN AN EXCAVATED RADIUS. ATG. CONTR. POLY THERM TRENCH DETAIL pen {sols Z.__[NoAiFe lio RETURN NYLON SLINGS FREIGHT PREPAID TO: PERMA-PIPE 1310 QUARLES DRIVE LEBANON, TENNESSEE 37087 SHIPPING TICKET SHOULD INDICATE PERMA-PIPE JOB NUMBER. IT WLU S — WATTS 174A-740 SERIES ASME WATER PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES for Pressure Protection of Hot Water Heating Boilers Sizes: %'’ thru 2” The 174A-740 Series was developed to offer a complete line of boiler safety relief valve sizes from %” through 2” inclusive and with corresponding high BTU discharge capacity ratings. Watts was the first to offer this full selection of sizes, which afford complete pressure protection for the great majority of all hot water heating and supply boilers with a single valve. Sizes 1” to 2” inclusive are proportionately larger valves to the %’’ size. They are designed for larger institutional and industrial installations to protect high BTU rated boilers that need greater relief capacities. for the latest and finest in relief valves, you'll find them in the Whenever plans call A.S.M.E. Watts line. FEATURES e Seat located above drain: water can’t be trapped and sediment can’t foul seat ¢ Non-mechanical stick or freeze seat-to-disc alignment will not e Water seal of high temperature resisting material isolates spring working parts from water during relief « No. 740 has the same design features as No. 174A except for difference in body construction and material SPECIFICATIONS BOILER RELIEF VALVES Each hot water space heating boiler shall be equipped with a pressure relief valve set to relieve below the aaximum boiler working pressure. The device shall be certified in accordance with the A.S.M.E. low pressure heating boiler code Section 4. The BTU rating of the valve must be in excess of the BTU output heating of the boiler. Watts Regulator Company Series 174A, 740 or equal. WATE */74-A ES-174A-740-2 OPERATION: A hot water heating boiler operates normally full of water and steams Only when there is trouble with the firing controls. When this occurs, it is good ‘’safety”’ procedure to reduce the energy stored in the boiler by lowering the heat content of the boiler as rapidly as practicable. WATER DISCHARGE As thermal expansion conditions develop, pressures may be built up to the setting of the relief valve. In this phase of operation, it acts as a water relief valve, discharging the small quantity of water which is expanded in the system. Lf a J! 1 BOILER” ry . ‘i STEAM DISCHARGE Should operating controls fail, permitting run-away firing, the boiler water may reach steam- forming temperatures, creating a steam pressure condition. Acting as a steam safety valve, it dis- charges steam at the rate or faster than the boiler can gener- ate it, thus restoring system - pressure to a safer level. Sey Wes WATTS REGULATOR COMPANY Box 628, Lawrence, MA 01842 (617) 688-1811 Telex: 94-7460 Toronto, Canada (416) 742-6891 Telex: 06527137 WU St 174A Series e¢ Bronze body construction e Non-metallic disc-to-metal seating 740 Series e Iron body construction ¢ Non-metallic disc-to-metal seating PRESSURE - TEMPERATURE 174A Series Pressure range 30 lbs. to 150 lbs. with corres- ponding high BTU/HR ratings from 650,000 to 14,370,000 BTU/HR. 740 Series Pressure range 30 lbs. to 75 lbs. with corres- ponding high ratings from 925,000 to 10.700.000 BTU/HR. HY) ASME Tested and rated by A.S.M.E. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors. CAPACITY No. 174A Series SETTINGS and RELIEVING CAPACITIES (National Board Certified Ratings) BTU Steam Discharge Capacities Size 30 Ibs. 100 Ibs. 125 Ibs. 150 Ibs. a" 650,000 1,695,000 2,070,000 2,445,000 1” 1,005,000 2,635,000 3,215,000 3,795,000 1%" 1,682,000 4,399,000 5,370,000 6,340,000 1%" —- 2,020,000 5,290,000 6,460,000 7,630,000 2” 3,815,000 9,970,000 12,170,000 14,370,000 NOTE: We recommend No. 740 Series as best buy for hot water space heating boiler requirements between 30 through 75 Ibs. No. 740 Series SETTINGS and RELIEVING CAPACITIES (National Board Certified Ratings) BTU Steam Discharge Capacities Size 30 Ibs. 45 Ibs. 50 Ibs. 75 Ibs. RT 925,000 1,245,000 1,352,000 1,886,000 1"x1%" 1,300,000 +1,749,000 1,899,000 2,649,000 1%"x1%" 2,105,000 2,830,000 3,075,000 4,285,000 1%" x2” 2,900,000 3,903,000 4,238,000 5,910,000 2" x 2%" 5,250,000 7,050,000 7,650,000 10,700,000 NOTE: Valve settings, other than shown above, are available in 5 |b increments between the pressure range of 30 through 75 Ibs. No. 174A Series No. 740 Series No. Size Model Height Length Weight No. Size Model Height Length Weight 174A 3/4" x 3/4" M3 58" 22" 11/2 Ibs. 740 54 Gi M1 55/8” os 17/e Ibs. 174A Tae M1 53/4” art 31s Ibs. 740 17x 146" M 74" 31/2" 31 Ibs. 174A 11/4" x 11/4" M1 83/8” = 43/4" 61/4 Ibs. 740 11/4" x 11/2" M 83/4" = 45/8” 6s Ibs. 174A 14/2" x 11/2" M 9%. AZ/e” 7% Ibs. 740 Tian 2” M 91/4" 51/4" 71/2 Ibs. 174A Dik 2 M 115/8” 61/4" 133/4 Ibs. 740 eke Mes M 115/8” 63/4" 16'/2 Ibs. Ww REGULATOR = 220200 Toronto,Canada_ Soestduinen, The Netherlands WATTS REGULATOR COMPANY ES-174A-740-2 THE NAME THAT PROTECTS YOUR NAME (617) 688-1811 TELEX 94-7460 CANADIAN TELEX 06527137 PRINTED IN US.A. Wood Industrial Products Co. Corishohocken, Pa. 19428 « Phone 215-828-0800 PUM Rem OL LL emer ilg ‘C’ NPT SYSTE CONNECTIO %" NPT BOSS WIAIR VALVE For “use as hydronic expansion tank & non-potable hydropneumatic applications & draw down for pressure booster systems. ** For potable application use JBPR Series (see Specifica- Sheet 716) Ol. MAFY Joo ASME Bag Type Expansion Tank Specifications FORM 715 FEATURES ¢ Fully flexible nylon reinforced Rubber Bag. ¢ Bag design tested to 360,000 cycles. ¢ Bag easily replaceable. e Fluid and air separation eliminates corrosion. ¢ Eliminates water logging. ¢ Smaller tank saves space & installation costs. * Carbon steel construction. SPECIFICATIONS ¢ Type design & construction: ASME ¢ Maximum working pressure: 125 PSI ¢ Maximum operating temperature: 240°F ¢ Factory precharge: 12 PSI—adjustable in field e Finish: Red oxide primer ¢ For vertical or horizontal installation. TYPICAL SPECIFICATION Furnish and install, as shown on the plans, Wood Part # JBER______~~—~—~—SW ASME: «~Precharged Bag Expansion Tank, stamped 125 PSI working pressure. Each tank will be supplied with a heavy duty replaceable bladder good for 240°F. Bag design tested to 360,000 cycles. Tank shall be supplied with a ring base for vertical mount- ing, lifting ring, 1%2” NPT system connection, and %4” NPT drain. An air charging valve connection shall be provided to facil- itate adjusting precharge pressure to meet actual system conditions. pA.” | HT” | NPT” | SHPG. pant y TANK CAPACITY | DIA.” | HT” | NPT” | SHPG. A B c wr. GAL | LITERS | A B c WT. 12 22% 1 51 JBER-25-009 | 120 454 24 65% 1% 245 12 33% 1 64 JBER-25-010 | 135 511 24 72% 1% 265 12 51% 1 85 JBER-25-011 | 158 600 30 58 | 1% 375 14 48% 1 100. JBER-25-012 | 211 800 30 76 1% 447 14 55% 1 113 JBER-25-013 | 264 | 1000 36 67 1% 551 14 63% 1 125 JBER-25-014 | 317 | 1200 36 78% 1% 615 16 72% 1% 152 JBER-25-015 | 370 | 1400 36 91 1h 694 20 625/ 1% 179 -JBER-25-016 | 422 | 1600 48 64% 1% 1098 JBER-25-017 [| 528 | 2000 48 78 1% 1239 * See reverse side for draw down calculations —pubeaco #75 ~32/- yO : SET a2 (CONBRACO,, ST MM4eys Tob SAFETY RELIEF VALVES For Hot Water Heating Boilers, Heating Systems and Unfired Pressure Vessels, Pressure Cookers, Steam Kettles 10 SERIES KEY FINISH PLAIN ROUGH | POLISHED PRESSURE | BRASS CHROME | CHROME 20# - fh 41 67 22 Oat ia) 142 68 25# a | 4 | 69 A.S.M.E. av} 30# 0 | 44 70 Ca a 71 40# 07 46 + 72 434 08 47 73 45# | 09 48 74 50# 10 49 75 55# 11 50 76 60# 12 51 77 SIZE INLET OUTLET PRESSURE WT. PER NO. NPT NPT RANGE HEIGHT 100 PCS. (ak 10-102- ¥, Female 1 Female 20-60 PSI She 109 Ibs. ) * 10-104- ¥, Male 1 Female 20-60 PSI 3%, 113 Ibs. * 10-301- ¥, Male ¥, Female 20-60 PSI 3% 119 Ibs. * 10-303- ¥, Female ¥, Female 20-60 PSI Se 130 Ibs. -—> 10-321- in ¥, Male ¥, Female 20-60 PSI 3% 128 Ibs. 2K STANDARD SET PRESSURE 30 P.S.I. AVAILABLE PRESSURE SETTINGS AS NOTED * REGISTERED IN CANADIAN PROVINCES NATIONAL BOARD CAPACITY CERTIFIED — B.T.U. PER HOURT NO. 30 PSI 35 PSI | 40 PSI 50 PSI 10-102. || _710,000 790,000 870,000 __ 1,035,000 10-104- 710,000 ~ 790,000 870,000 1,035,000 10-301- 550,000 610,000 675,000 805,000 10-303- 550,000 610,000 675,000 805,000 —> 7 10321. 425,000 475,000 525,000 625,000 He + A.S.M.E. BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE — SECTION IV — HEATING BOILERS NO. 10-104 NO. 10-301 NO. 10-303 > NO. 10-321 AVAILABLE ONLY IN POLISHED CHROME ¢ 10 SERIES VALVES ARE CAPACITY CERTIFIED BY THE NATIONAL BOARD A.S.M.E. BOILER AND PRESSURE CODE — SECTION IV. ¢ PROVIDES PROTECTION AGAINST EXCESSIVE WATER PRESSURE DUE TO THERMAL EXPANSION AND AGAINST STEAM GENERATED DUE TO FAILURE OF CONTROLS TO REGULATE B.T.U. INPUT. e ALL BRASS CONSTRUCTION WITH RUST PROOFED STEEL SPRING. ¢ ALSO AVAILABLE IN ROUGH CHROME FINISHES. 3 —_> > Zovbraco #£/0-32)-7O0 SAFETY & SAFETY RELIEF VALVES GENERAL INFORMATION SAFETY VALVE: Safety valves or pop safety valves are automatic, direct-pressure actuated, pressure- relieving devices for use in vapor or gas services. SAFETY RELIEF VALVE: Safety relief valves are basically like pop safety valves and are primarily for liquid service where the thermal expansion in a li- quid laden vessel actuates the valve. When vapor is generated in these vessels, due to uncontrolled heat input, this valve with the huddling chamber, will give a high disc lift and discharge the expanded vapors. This valve is also suitable for gas or vapor service. SELECTION OF VALVE: Valves should be selected for the particular installation on which they are to be used and also on the basis of the rated discharge capacity. This should be equal to or greater than the maximum output of the system. MAINTENANCE: The valve should be tested at max- imum operating pressure. Hold trip lever open for about five seconds in order to flush off of the valve seat any sediment that may lodge on the seat. Then permit the valve disc to snap shut. ___ SAFETY RELIEF VALVE RELIEF VALVE __ sarery |-— RAIN Pipe nam (MUST RUN TO A alse RUN TO A SAFE PLACE OF ‘SAFE PLACE DISPOSAL) OF DISPOSAL) HEATING BOILER HOT WATER HEATER INSTALLATION: The vaive is to be installed in a ver- tical position, into clean fitting using the proper size and type wrench so as not to damage the valve. The discharge piping, without stop valves, shall be in- dependently supported, pitched down and run to a safe place of disposal. GLOSSARY OPERATING PRESSURE: The actual pressure ai which a vessel is maintained in normal operation. ALLOWABLE WORKING PRESSURE: Maximurr design pressure of a new vessel or maximum pressure allowed after test and approval by authorized authority. SET PRESSURE: The pressure at which the valve opens. BLOW DOWN: The difference between the pressures at which a pop type safety valve opens and closes. POP ACTION: The sharp opening action of a safety valve when operating on steam, air or other elastic fluid. ACCUMULATION: The pressure build-up beyond the set pressure of the safety or safety relief valve, at which the capacity is rated. The ratings are a‘ follows: For Low Pressure Heating Boilers — set pressure plus 333% accumulation. For Power Boilers — set pressure plus 3% ac- cumulation. For Safety Relief Valves used on hot water heating and hot water supply boilers — sei pressure plus 10% accumulation. WARN: This is the sound in the valve immediately preceding the pop. This is also called a “simmer.” DISC: The moving member of the valve against which the spring load and also the water, vapor or gas pressure is applied. To convert BTU/HR Steam to LBS/HR divide by 1000. To convert LBS/HR Steam to BTU/HR multiply by 1000. MARKING OF SAFETY AND SAFETY RELIEF VALVES: The requirements of the A.S.M.E. Boiler and pressure Vessel Code with regard to marking o! safety and Safety Relief Valves are as follows: A.S.M.E. - The American Society of Mechanica! Engineers. Section | - Power Boilers Section IV - Heating Boilers Section VIII, Div. 1 - Pressure Vessels capacity of the valve has been certified by the National Board. HOS we This marking is intended to verify that the GAUGE _DIMENSIONAL_DATA FLUSH MOUNTED CASE -BLACK FINISHED CAST ALUMINUM RING - CHR IME PLATED-CLOSE TYPE DAL-WHITE FINISH -BLACK EMBOSSED FIGURES {° MARKINGS PANTER-BLACK MICROMETER TYFE. f= MOUVEMENT - ST: $74.,ROTARY TYPE STANDARD RANGES No 500 X PRESS a ALSZY A |8 1c |ElF1lé6é [AH |v [a [4 | Hee. Fe 2 07 2008 7 if Y 2 4a" \5 Ya 2 #560 4 Fels s¥ee| Ye [1% |/% Je \o% | Yn [5% SOA TDIOMO 7D 400 6° 17% |3 %al 6 in |4 Ue] He |) |/%e 12% | 7 |%e 16% 3O"VAC TO GON O TO 600 en" Wow lan [B24 Hel. V% |/'%u l2% [9% [ve 9% '3°VACTO/00% 0 TO 800 30°VAC.TO K50%0 TO-7000 FOR 12" GAUGE § MOUNTING DIMENSION SEE DRAWING NO, 127-326 TOUURAMCE, 7 PLACE DECKMALE © O78, 7 PLACE DECIMALS 2 ABA ADODAES & 1 WoeLEbS OTMERWIOE WFECHIED, 30 VAC T0200 | 070 1500 070 15* | |0 70 2000 070 30" |0 TO 3000 0 TO 60* |070 5000 070/00 To /Q000 O70 160% DELRIN PINION $ BUSHINGS, ACCURACY- 42 OF 1% OF SCALE RANGE | WAS AONEZ 7-1 - Gel SAAS Sie Te (3-6-6512 |REDRAWN WO C. 7a H. @. Trerice Co. Detroit, Mich.,U.&.A. nen’ DINIENSION DRAWING OF NO. 500X PRESS. GAUGE 299-L21 ON |—-E EA Tei aisnaN Fave "Aa ara L/D 6k 270 DIAVLSNDT saa7e 623) 10" 22/95 IL von) W'S NUSIW 10200 2LZ Of O Eararet BLO sch Of oo Govrsiivys | 206; of 0b | 30t7 01 OF] (05 01 oF [eves of op {03701 0 ot or eee VInE Te al SIONVI DaVONS NO1L/SOP OF B/SIT Qs 95W2 31009 IAW AL .06 40 FO1SN! JIONY OIDISTT ANY LY BON IE NYP LNINLSILOW DSW? 40 20'S LHo/F Ok ANINLENLOW WILE 00 Oe v wsim 424905 9 MIIN NOISNRIXD ILABIND IOVN IT NOD GNINISILOW Bw IONE iW" 3Sw7 90 awse O14 ANIWISILTY WILE 06 NPLHOIL ONY OF2ISIT NOWISOP OL WILS LSNLOW wand f a3aI8 woL00 7 S5vexe vo SHOWN? FOTO WITLI AYVD @WEINIS TEV? WAVAL 406 40 FOISNI JIONY OFDISIO ANY 4 DOWN IG ND ANINLSTLOV * $52 90 JOS L437 OL ANIMASALOW MPLS 06 SSVUD~ IVY (VEN Si -BON MOD wars av xan tf) dan BNET FL ABIAI TOWN IG NW? ANINLSILOY IY TIONY ~-"9S¥2 40 1NOMS OL ANINASNLOV MILF 406 SEV YR vO Sworn? (F079 IWIN NON MEM BMLLd) at BIOTEC OY 2 Croan ' ont ABN29IN BNIB Toew OFF LNOHI ISNIT — FGNL Sonia OPSSOTNI NIVIG HALIM ONNOTONW BD PLN — FIVE ISLS SSDINWLS = OVP Dev 2I¥ & I9DNOT HAIN SWP4S SMLONE? © CavoNws ao LONI? Ja ENOISNINIT WILE 77 — FLON Bulletin 112-B Pe LIBERTY {3 EQUIPMENT & SUPPLY CO. WAU mA SN EGO CA a) "1 Pee ear avon ictaulic BUTTERFLY NATERIALS SCECIFICATIONS KEY 1/2 3+ 4t 5/6 7 ITEM Housing 1%2-6" Sizes Body Seat (Liner) Grade “E" Grade “T" Stem Upper/Lower Disc MATERIAL SPECIFICATION Maileadle Iron conforming to ASTM A-47 or Ductile Iron, conforming to ASTM A-536 65-45-12, electroplated. Carbon steel, electropiated (Specify choice on order) EPDM (Green color code) Temperature Range —30°F to + 200°F Recommended for not water service within tne specified temperature range plus a variety of dilute acids, oil free air, and many chemical services NOT RECOMMENDED FOR PETROLEUM SERVICES. Nitrile (Orange color code) Temperature Range —10°F to +150°F Recommended for petroleum products (except gasoline), mineral and vegetabie oils to a Maximum of + 150°F. NOT RECOMMENDED FOR WATER SERVICE OVER AMBIENT CONDITIONS. Services listed are generai service rec- ommendations only. Refer to Liner/Disc selection pages (11-13) for specific recommendations 416 Stainiess Stee! Aluminum Bronze Optional: Chrome-plated or 316 Stainless steel. SERIES 700 KEY ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION 8 Handle Electropiated malieable iron conforming to ASTM A-47. Optional: Latch Lock Throttling or In- finitely Variable Handle — same ma- terial; manual! gear operator, electric or pneumatic actuators (See Accessories). 9 Indexing Plate Carbon steel, hardened, electroplated 10 Cap 302 Stainless Stee! rt Washer Polyethylene Plastic 12° Spring Tempered Steel, Electroplated 13 “O” Ring Nitrile (see seat above) 14° Retaining Ring 302 Stainless Steel 15° Cap Screws Steel, Hardened & Electropiated 7 Track Boits Steel, Electroplated 18 Nuts Steel, Electroplated 19 Tapping Screw 410 Stainless Stee! 20 Machine Screw Steel, Electroplated 21 Washer Steel, Electroplated 22; Bushing Bronze Bearing 23; Washer Steel, Electroplated 24; Set Screw Steel, Electroplated “Additional external retaining ring used on upper stem of 6° vaives. 3Used on § and 6-inch valves only. +Body and liner are permanently bonded. ASSEMBLY 14 SERIES 700 AND 701 Groove pipe to Victaulic specifications. Check to be sure pipe from end to groove Is clean. STEP 1 LUBRICATE GASKETS - Apply thin coat of Victaulic Lubricant to gasket lips and complete exterior of gaskets. STEP 2 POSITION GASKETS — Place gaskets on each pipe end, being sure gasket lips do not overhang pipe ends. STEP 3 POSITION VALVE — Slide valve between pipe ends and butt to mating pipe ends. Slide gaskets to center between grooves on pipe ends and valve on either side. STEP 4 APPLY COUPLING HOUSING — Assemble housings over gasket while maintaining valve position, being sure keys engage into the grooves on the pipe ends and on the valve. STEP 5 INSERT BOLTS — Insert bolts with track head fully into housing. Apply nuts and tighten finger tight. Valve position can now be adjusted prior to tightening. STEP 6 TIGHTEN — Tighten nuts uniformly until bolt pads are together firmly metal-to-metal. No special torque is required. The above procedure is condensed. Always refer to complete coupling assembly instructions before attempting to Install or remove Victaulic Butterfly Valves. ASSEMBLY SERVICE DATA Victaulic butterfly valves are designed with grooves on both ends to permit assembly with various Victaulic grooved pipe couplings. They are not intended for use with Victaulic Plain End Couplings. The following Victaulic Couplings may be used for installation of Series 700 or 701 butterfly valves: Styles 77,75, 78, HP-70, 750 and 72 (Style 72 must be assem- bled so the outlet and bolt pads do not interfere with handle operation). Victaulic butterfly valves may not be installed using coupling Styles HP-70 EndSeal, 775 or any of the cast iron (AWWA dimension) pipe couplings. Style 741 Vic-Flange may only be used on one side of Series 700 vaives sizes 2”-4” fitted with standard or latch-lock handles. Vic-Flange must be assembled only on the side opposite the handle When Style 741 Vic-Flange is utilized with Series 700 butterfly valves, the small teeth inside the key shoulder must be removed. Vic-Flange may not be used on any Series 700 valves equipped with infinitely variable handles, gear operator, electric or pneumatic actu- ators. Vic-Flange Style 741 may be used on both sides of all Series 701 butterfly valves. DYNAMASTER® FANS . ACME ENGINEERING & MANUFACTURING CORP. sundae Rniew MUSKOGEE, OKLAHOMA MODELS FQ & FN Project Re Rural Energy - 4 Villages 5%" [| 1%" | 1%" Location 7 ¥ 1%" Alaska Tia" [= twat | 10" 3” 18 063" Architect 15” 4¥2" ve" | 10” 4" 18 080° - 7 Sa ngineer 15%" | 5° | 1v%"] 8 | 2%" we ea ane, MacInnes, Hoffman/Vitro 19° 5¥%" {| 1%" | 9°" 2%" 18 080” Gontractor 17%" | 6° 1m" | 10" | 3%" 16 080° J & B Mechanical 20” 6%" 1%" 8” 3” 16 080" Submitted by Taam: [rm | 1m | to" | am 16 125° Coast Products Co. : | | 2am | ar 1%" | 12° | 4¥v" 16 125° Date 5/17/83 172" 6” 1%" 8° 3” 16 14 20° 8° 1%* | 10" | 3%" 1 | 4 WARNING! DO NOT use in HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS where fans elactrical system Could provide ignition to combustible or flammable 20° 9” 1%" | 12” 4%" | 16 14 materials, uniess unit is specifically Duilt for hazardous environments. CAUTION! Guards must be installed when tan is within reach of per- sonnel or within seven (7) feet of working level of when deemed ad- Dimensions given on this sheet are correct within i aaieaieaiahe limits suitable for normal installation requirements MODELS FO9& 10 MODELS FQ12 THRU 18 MODELS FQ21 THRU 36 xf, eet, F F LZ ry If IF « z teal ( fe be € ie: bel" veel war FEATURES LEGEND FQ type has advanced design teardrop bearing motors. Single phase fractional . shape aluminum blades which are fasten- HP motors are resilient mounted. fe 7 Soe eee aa ed to a formed steel hub with heavy-duty 2S - Two Speed Motor oversized rivets. Orifice plate and motor mount are all- WC: Wall Collar steel. . i FN type has 6 steel blades welded to hub. BA Back (motor eo uate Propellers precision balanced. Orifice plate Bonderized and finished with epoxy. Guards thru size 18 are zinc Totally enclosed, continuous duty, ball and yellow chromated. (BAiquard standard on.£ 0.9630) 2 OPTIONAL ‘ee SS = Module 1 ea} 12") FQ129 1035 |%" |1550 | 6.7 St. Mary's sones & 10 Hooper Bay ACME ENGINEERING & MANUFACTURING CORP. P.O. Box 978 MUSKOGEE, OKLAHOMA 74401 STANDARD DUTY FLO-MASTER WALL SHUTTERS For Horizontal Airflow Only [ Project Rural Energy-4 Villages CONSTRUCTION Location Rigid electro-galvanized steel, all welded frame. laska Industrial weight aluminum blades reinforced with galvanized Architect steel rods. Double tie rods. Engi r 1 ‘ .. nginee . Counterbalanced blades open easier, permit higher fan capacity. Crews, MacInnes, Hoffman, Vitro NYLON BEARINGS AND STAINLESS STEEL BEARING PINS [Contractor Corrosion Proof. J & B Mechanical Reduce shutter sticking. Suitable for dusty or humid applications Submitted by Tough, wear resistant, for longer operating life Coast Products Co. FINISH Date 5/17/83 Frame is Bonderized and has a tough baked on powdered epoxy finish. Blades are solid aluminum. AMIN | BLADES Dimensions given on this sheet are correct within lin suitable for normal installation requirements. AIR 4 4 Pro iichiactiarsianihiinddaagay OLES La - +8 Bi otal re ate : A AUTOMATIC MOTORIZED MANUAL TYPES: AU - Automatic, MT - Motorized, ML - Manually Operated W1212 12" | 9" 3" W4545 W1414 14> 11" St W4646 Fo129 | 2 Ww1616 16" 13" | 7" W4848 —T_ w1618 18° | 15° 7 ] W5454 w2i2i [21" | 18" | 12° W6060 w2323 23° | 20° | 14° I W2626 [ 26" | 23" [17° | w2727 | 27" | 2a" [18° | a w2628 | al a | w3030 | 30° | 27" [| 21° W3333 mi waa34_| AU Cc W3737 w3939 wa4040 | — To W1212 Thru W3939 Are Single Panel; W4040 Thru W6060 Are Two Panel. FORM 6100097 ACME ENGINEERING & any MANUFACTURING CORP. P.O. Box 978 MUSKOGEE, OKLAHOMA 74401 INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS WINDMASTER MODEL DCH, PROPMASTER MODEL K AND DYNAMASTER MODELS FQ & FN 11. 12. INSTALLATION . This unit has rotating parts and safety precau- tions should be exercised during installation, operation and maintenance. . WARNING! DO NOT use in HAZARDOUS EN- VIRONMENTS where fans electrical system could provide ignition to combustible or flam- mable materials, unless unit is specifically built for hazardous environments. Provide a square opening in the wall equal to the outside dimensions of the fan. It is preferable to frame in the opening with 2 x 6 material, or similar suitable material or metal channels adequate for support of fan. . Slide the fan into the framed opening in the wall. Securely fasten with bolts or screws pro- vided by the installer. A distance of at least one and one-half times the diameter of the fan should be allowed bet- ween the fan inlet or discharge opening and any adjacent wall or large obstruction. Guards must be installed when fan is within reach of personnel or within seven (7) feet of working level or when deemed advisable for safety. . CAUTION: Before proceeding, make sure elec- trical service to fan is locked in “OFF” position. . All wiring should be in accordance with local or- dinances and the National Electrical Code. Before starting, check all fasteners for tightness; particularly in the propeller hub. Turn the propeller by hand to make sure it is in align- ment with the orifice and fan blades do not strike. . WARNING! Check voltage at the fan to see if it corresponds with the motor nameplate; high or low voltage can seriously damage the motor. Extra care should be taken when wiring two or three speed motors since improper connec- tions will damage motor and void motor warran- ty. On belt driven units leave enough slack in wiring to allow for motor movement when ad- justing belt tension. Operate under power and compare propeller rotation with directional arrow on fan. In the case of three phase motors, the direction can be changed by interchanging any two of the three motor leads. In the case of single phase motors, the reversing instruction will appear on the wiring diagram in the motor wiring compart- ment, or on the side of the motor.. When supply type fans are used with motorized wall shutters, it is necessary that a time delay switch be used between the power source and the fan motor which will allow the shutter to PAGE 1 open fully before the fan is activated. MAINTENANCE 1. Motor bearings are prelubricated. Consult infor- mation printed on motor for lubrication instruc- tions. 2. Propeller shaft bearings on belt driven units are prelubricated and sealed. Units with captured bearings in stamped sheet metal housing re- quire no service. Units with pillow blocks have grease fittings and under normal operation will need no relubrication for 3 to 5 years. For nor- mal operating conditions, use a grease confor- ming to NLGI No. 2. Caution should be used in greasing bearing with a high pressure gun which can blow bearing seals and overfill the bearing with grease. This condition can result in excessive churning and overheating. For nor- mal operating conditions it is a standard prac- tice to fill only 30% of the bearing void with grease. DO NOT OVERLUBRICATE. 3. On belt driven units check belt tension after first 48 hours of operation and thereafter an- nually. Belt should depress its width when pressed firmly inward at midway point between the pulleys. Too much tension will damage bearings; belt should be tight enough to pre- vent slippage. When replacing worn belt, replace motor pulley if ‘‘shoulder” is worn in groove. WARNING! Do not operate at speeds higher than that catalogued for this equipment. Do not replace motor pulley with a larger diameter. The pulley ratios are set so that the motor will not be overloaded. 4. If motor requires replacement, a comparable one to the original with the same service factor and enclosure must be used. 5. If propeller shaft bearings need replacement, replace with bearings comparable to original equipment. If die formed type support housing is used, install new bearings into neoprene rings, check correct position of propeller with orifice, position bearings in die formed recess and tighten set screws. Replace die formed bearing cap and tighten four bolts. NOTE: If locking collar type bearing is used, collar must first be positioned against inner race on bear- ing nearest propeller and turned in direction of pro- peller rotation with drift pin and hammer until it locks. Locking collars must be on inboard (facing) sides of the bearings. Secure bearing to shaft with set screw. Lock and secure other bearing to shaft in same mannner. If pillow block type bearings are used, slide bear- ings on to shaft to desired location and bolt bearing (over) MAINTENANCE CONT’D block securely to support base. Slide shaft back and forth in secured bearing (do not drive with hammer) and rotate to make certain it turns freely. Check correct position of propeller with inlet orifice. Then secure bearings to shaft by tightening set screws. DISCLAIMER Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. has made a diligent effort to illustrate and describe the products in this literature accurately; however, such illustrations and descriptions are for the sole purpose of identification, and do not express or imply a warranty that the products are merchantable, or fit for a particular purpose, or that the products will necessarily conform to the illustrations or descriptions or dimen- sion. WARNING Acme products are designed and manufactured to provide reliable performance, but they are not guaranteed to be 100% free of defects. Even reliable products will experience occasional failures, and this possibility should be recognized by the User. If these products are us- ed ina life support ventilation system where failure could result in loss or injury, the user should provide adequate back-up ventilation, supplementary natural ventilation or failure alarm system, or acknowledge willingness to accept the risk of such loss or injury. ad LIMITED WARRANTYwanrranTY AND DISCLAIMER: Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Corporation extends this limited warranty to the original buyer and war- rants that products manufactured by Acme shall be free from original defects in workman- ship and rials for one year from date of shipment, provided same have been properly stored, installed, serviced, maintained and operated. This warranty shall not apply to pro- ducts which have been altered or repai jithout Acme's express authorization, or red of repaired in any way so as, in Acme's judgement, to affect its performance or ility, nor which have been improperly installed or subjected to misuse, negligence, or accident, or incorrectly used in combination with other substances. The buyer assumes all risks and liability for results of use of the products. Warranties on purchased parts, such as electric motors and controls, are limited to the terms of warranty extended by our ‘supplier. LIMITATION OF REMEDY AND DAMAGES: All claims under this warranty must be made in writing and delivered to Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corporation, Box 978, Muskogee, Oklahoma 74401, within 15 days after discovery of the defect and prior to the expiration of one year from the date of shipment Py Acme of the product claimed defec- tive, and Buyer shall be barred from any remedy if Buyer fails to make such claim within such period. Within 30 days after receipt of a timely claim, Acme shall have the option either to inspect the product while in Buyer's possession or to request Buyer to return the Product to Acme at Buyer's expense for inspection by Acme. Acme shall replace, or at its option repair, fr ge, any product it determines to be defective, and it shall ship the repaired or replacement product to Buyer 8. point of shipment; provided, however, if circumstances ich as in Acme's judge it to prohibit repair or replacement to remedy th ant fetects, the buyer's sole and exclusive remedy shall be a refund to the buyer gf any part of the invoice price, paid to Acme, for the defective product or part. Acme is not responsible for the cost of removal of the defective product or part, damages ACME ENGINEERING & MANUFACTURING CORP. 782 due to removal, or any expenses incurred in shipping the product or part to or from Acme's plant, or the installation of the repaired or replaced product or part. Implied warranties, when applicable, shall commence upon the same date as the express warranty provided above, and shall, except for warranties of title, extend only for the dura- tion of the express warranty. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you. The only remedy provided to you under an appli le implied warranty and the express warranty shall be the edy provided under the express varenty, subject to the terms and condition contained therein. Acme shall not be liable for incidental and consequential losses and damages under the express warranty, any applicable implied warranty, or claims for negligen cept to the extent that this limitation is found to be unenforceable under applicable st law. Som do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or conseque: damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from je to st No employer ent, dealer, or other person is authorized to give any warranties on behalf ‘of Acme or to assume for Acme any other liability in connection with any of its products except in writing and signed by an officer of Acme. TECHNICAL ADVICE AND RECOMMENDATIONS, DISCLAIMER: Not withstanding any past practice or dealings or any custom of the trade, sales shall not inc! he furnishing of technical advice or assistance or system d: . Any such assistance shall be at Acme's sole option and may be subject to additi charge. Acme assumes no obligation or liability on account of any recommendatio: pinions or advice as to the choice, in- stallation or use of products. Any such recommendations, 0; Ss Of advice are given and shall be accepted at your own risk and shall not constitute any warranty or guarantee of such products or their performance. FORM 6100097 REV. B PAGE 2 arts PRODUCTS 101 Volute 102 Impeller 103 Volute gasket 104 Volute capscrew 117 Impeller capscrew 118 Impeller washer 201 Coverplate 202 Coverplate capscrew 208 Mechanical Seal Assembly 209 Seat insert 210 Seat insert gasket 301 Bearing frame 302 Ball bearing (Inboard) 303 Ball bearing (Outboard) 310 Bearing cover (Inboard) 311 Bearing cover (Outboard) 312 Bearing cover gasket (Inboard) p-\ + ?* ~RMSTRONG CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS SERIES 4030 sBase mounteD PuMP oT. M FILE NO.: 5040.66 DATE: Jan. 31,1968 SUPERSEDES: New DATE: 313 Bearing cover gasket (Outboard) 314 Bearing cover capscrew (Inboard) 315 Bearing cover capscrew (Outboard) 316 Snap ring (Inside) 317 Snap ring (Outside) 319 Constant level oiler 321 Oil seal (Inboard) 322 Oil seal (Outboard) 337 Vent 338 Shaft 339 Shaft sleeve 340 Impeller key 341 Coupler key 342 Water slinger 601 Bearing frame support 602 Support retaining pin 604 Support levelling screw CAUTION Particular care must be taken to check the following before pump is started up:- 1. Is the pump primed? 2. Alignment OK? 3, Rotation OK? 4. Lubrication OK? Pipework properly supported? 5. 6. Voltage supply OK? Vic Overload protection OK? Is the system clean? Armstrong Warranty does not cover any damage to the equipment resulting from failure to observe the above precautions. GENERAL: Armstrong Centrifugal Pumps, properly installed and given reasonable care and maintenance. will perform satisfactorily for a long period of time. These instructions describe the procedures which should be followed to ensure trouble-free operation. LOCATION LOCATE THE PUMP WHERE IT IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE FOR INSPECTION AND SERVICING, AND PROVIDE ADEQUATE HEADROOM FOR HOIST FACILITIES IN THE CASE OF LARGER PUMPS. MOTOR-DRIVEN UNITS SHOULD NOT BE LOCATED IN DAMP ATMOSPHERES UNLESS THIS CONDITION HAS BEEN PRO- VIDED FOR IN THE MOTOR ENCLOSURE. FICIENTLY SUBSTANTIAL TO AB- FOUNDATION SORB ANY VIBRATION AND TO FORM A PERMANENT RIGID SUPPORT FOR THE BASEPLATE. THIS IS ESSENTIAL IN MAINTAINING THE ALIGNMENT OF A DIRECT-CONNECTED UNIT. A GOOD CONCRETE FOUNDATION SHOULD WEIGH TWO-AND-ONE-HALF TIMES THE SHIPPING WEIGHT OF THE PUMP. IN BUILD- ING THE FOUNDATION, MAKE AMPLE ALLOWANCE FOR GROUTING. FOUNDATION BOLTS OF THE PROPER SIZE SHOULD BE AR- RANGED AS SHOWN, WITH A PIPE SLEEVE EMBEDDED IN THE CON- CRETE TO PERMIT ADJUSTMENT OF THE BOLTS AFTER THE CON- CRETE HAS BEEN POURED. USE SLEEVES WITH A DIAMETER TWO- AND-ONE-HALF TIMES THE DIA- METER OF THE BOLTS. THE FOUNDATION SHOULD BE SUF- Litha in Canada LEVELLING WHEN THE UNIT HAS BEEN PLACED ON ITS FOUNDATION, SLACKEN OFF THE COUPLING SET SCREWS AND SLIDE BACK THE COUPLING HALVES SO THAT THE PUMP AND MOTOR SHAFTS ARE FREE TO ROTATE INDEPENDENTLY. RE-TIGHTEN THE SET SCREWS IN THIS POSITION. DO NOT RE-CONNECT THE COUPLING UNTIL AFTER THE UNIT HAS BEEN PIPED UP, FINALLY ALIGNED AND CHECKED FOR CORRECT DIREC- TION OF ROTATION. INSERT METAL WEDGES APPROXIMATELY 1” THICK ON EITHER SIDE OF THE FOUN- DATION BOLTS UNDER THE BASE- PLATE AS SHOWN. ADJUST WEDGES UNTIL THE SHAFTS OF THE PUMP AND MOTOR ARE LEVEL, ON FLANGED PUMPS, CHECK SUCTION AND DISCHARGE FLAN- GES FOR VERTICAL OR HORI- ZONTAL POSITION, USING A LEVEL, AND CORRECT AS NECES- SARY BY ADJUSTING THE WEDGES. WHEN THE BASEPLATE IS COMPLETELY LEVEL, THE FOUN- DATION BOLTS SHOULD BE TIGHTENED EVENLY AND FIRMLY. DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN BOLTS AT THIS STAGE. Form No. 6216 ALIGNMENT THE PUMP UNIT IS ACCURATELY ALIGNED IN OUR FACTORY PRIOR TO BEING SHIPPED. HOWEVER, ALL BASEPLATES ARE FLEXIBLE TO SOME EXTENT AND MUST NOT BE RELIED UPON TO MAINTAIN FACTORY ALIGNMENT. RE-ALIGNMENT IS NECESSARY AS FOLLOWS: 1. AFTER THE UNIT HAS BEEN SET LEVEL ON ITS FOUNDATION. 2. AFTER THE GROUT HAS SET AND THE FOUNDATION BOLTS HAVE BEEN TIGHTENED. 3. AFTER THE PIPES HAVE BEEN CONNECTED. ACCURATE ALIGNMENT IS ABSOLUTELY ESSENTIAL. PROPER MECHANICAL OPERATION OF THE EQUIPMENT CANNOT BE GUARANTEED UNLESS THE FACTORY ALIGNMENT IS RE- PRODUCED IN THE FIELD. COUPLING ALIGNMENT CHECK THE ALIGNMENT BY PLAC- ING A STRAIGHT EDGE ACROSS THE COUPLING RIMS AT THE TOP, BOTTOM AND BOTH SIDES. CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO HAVE THE STRAIGHT EDGE PARALLEL TO THE AXIS OF THE PUMP AND MOTOR SHAFT. ALIGNMENT IS OBTAINED WHEN THE STRAIGHT EDGE RESTS EVENLY ON BOTH RIMS IN ALL FOUR PO- SITIONS. ADJUST AS NECESSARY BY PLACING SHIMS UNDER THE MOTOR FEET. GROUTING AFTER LEVELLING THE UNIT AND CHECK- ING THE ALIGNMENT, FILL THE BASE- PLATE COMPLETELY WITH GROUT, AL- LOWING IT TO FLOW AROUND THE WEDGES UNDER THE BASEPLATE. ALLOW 48 HOURS FOR THE GROUT TO HAR- DEN BEFORE FINAL TIGHTENING OF THE FOUNDATION BOLTS. PIPING SHOULD BE INDEPENDENTLY SUPPORTED NEAR THE PUMP SO THAT NO STRAIN IS IMPOSED ON THE PUMP WHEN THE PIPES ARE CONNECTED. ALL CONNECTING PIPEWORK SHOULD BE ACCURATELY LOCATED - DO NOT ATTEMPT TO FORCE THE SUCTION AND DISCHARGE PIPES INTO POSITION. SUCTION PIPING USE SHORT DIRECT SUCTION PIPING ONE OR TWO TIMES LARGER THAN THE PUMP SUCTION NOZZLE. ARRANGE PIPING TO ELIMINATE POTENTIAL AIR POCKETS AND USE AN ECCENTRIC REDUCER TO CONNECT TO THE SUCTION NOZ- ZLE. A STRAINER THREE OR FOUR TIMES THE AREA OF THE SUCTION PIPE WILL PREVENT FOREIGN MATERIALS ENTERING THE PUMP. DISCHARGE PIPING A CHECK VALVE AND GATE VALVE SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN THE DISCHARGE LINE. IF AN INCREASER IS USED ON THE DISCHARGE SIDE TO INCREASE THE SIZE OF THE BOTH THE SUCTION AND DISCHARGE PIPES SYSTEM CLEANLINESS: Before starting the pump, cleaned, flushed and drained and then replenished with clean liquid. Welding slag and other foreign materials - “Stop Leak" and cleaning compounds - exces- sive or improper water treatment - are all detrimental to the pump internals. INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS SERIES 4030 BASE MOUNTED PUMP DISCHARGE PIPE, IT SHOULD BE PLACED BETWEEN THE CHECK VALVE AND THE PUMP. FINAL WHEN THE PIPING HAS BEEN CON- NECTED, CHECK THE ALIGNMENT ALIGNMENT AND MAKE CORRECTIONS IF NECES- SARY. ENERGISE THE MOTOR (WITH COUPLING HALVES DISCONNECTED) AND CHECK THAT THE ROTATION CORRESPONDS WITH THE DIRECTION ARROW ON THE PUMP. TO REVERSE THE RO- TATION ON A THREE-PHASE MOTOR, INTERCHANGE TWO LEADS. WHEN ROTATION AND ALIGNMENT ARE CORRECT, RE-CONNECT THE COUPLING WITH BOTH HALVES BUTTING AGAINST THE RUBBER INSERT. TIGHTEN THE COUPLING SET SCREWS. PUMP THE PUMP BEARINGS ARE LUBRI- CATED IN OUR FACTORY BEFORE LUBRICATION THE UNIT IS SHIPPED AND THE OIL SHOULD BE CAREFULLY CHECKED PRIOR TO START-UP. MAKE SURE THE OIL LEVEL IS APPROXIMATELY HALF WAY UP THE TRANSPARENT CUP ON THE CONSTANT LEVEL OILER. WHEN THE UNIT IS IN OPERATION, THE OIL SHOULD BE CHANGED EVERY SIX MONTHS. DRAIN THE OLD OIL FROM THE HOUSING AND THOROUGHLY FLUSH WITH KEROSENE. TIP THE OIL CUP AND FILL THE HOUSING WITH FRESH OIL THROUGH THE VENT IN THE BEARING COVER UNTIL THE OIL SHOWS IN THE LEG OF THE CONSTANT LEVEL OILER. FILL THE TRANSPARENT OIL CUP TO THE HALF- WAY MARK AND RETURN THE CUP TO ITS NORMAL POSITION. LUBRICATE WITH A NON-DETERGENT OIL HAVING A VIS- COSITY EQUAL TO A NO. 10 MOTOR OIL. WHEN THE PUMP IS PROVIDED WITH GREASE-LUBRICATED BEARINGS, USE THE BEST GRADE ANTI-FRICTION BEARING GREASE. BEARINGS SHOULD BE NOT MORE THAN TWO-THIRDS FULL - DO NOT OVER-GREASE. MOTOR FOLLOW THE LUBRICATION PRO- CEDURES RECOMMENDED BY THE LUBRICATION MOTOR MANUFACTURER. IN MOST CASES IT WILL BE FOUND THAT THE MOTOR BEARINGS ARE CUSTOM- GREASED FOR SEVERAL YEARS’ OPERATION AND REQUIRE LITTLE OR NO ATTENTION. THE MECHANICAL SEAL REQUIRES MECHANICAL NO SPECIAL ATTENTION OR ADJUST- SEAL MENT. HOWEVER, DO NOT RUN THE PUMP DRY AS THE SEAL MUST HAVE A FILM OF LIQUID BETWEEN THE SEAL FACES FOR PROPER OPERATION. the system must be thoroughly Proper operation cannot be guaranteed if any of these conditions are allowed in to exist. STARTING AND STOPPING: The pump must be fully primed on start-up. Fill the pump casing with water, remove the air release plug in the top of the volute and rotate the shaft by hand to remove any air trapped in the impeller. Start PUR L PRODUCTS the pump with the discharge gate valve closed, then open gradually after the motor is up to speed. To stop the pump, close the discharge valve and trip the motor starter. ARMSTRONG PUMPS INC. NORTH TONAWANDA, N.Y. 14120 ° ARMSTRONG CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FILE NO.: 5040.66 DATE: Jan. 31,1968 SUPERSEDES: New DATE: CYS |S PRODUCTS 101 Volute 102 Impeller 103 Volute gasket 104 Volute capscrew 117 Impeller capscrew 118 Impeller washer 201 Coverplate 202 Coverplate capscrew 208 Mechanical Seal Assembly 209 Seat insert 210 Seat insert gasket 301 Bearing frame 302 Ball bearing (Inboard) 303 Ball bearing (Outboard) 310 Bearing cover (Inboard) 311 Bearing cover (Outboard) 312 Bearing cover gasket (Inboard) SERIES 4030 sBase mountTeD PumMP 313 Bearing cover gasket (Outboard) 314 Bearing cover capscrew (Inboard) 315 Bearing cover capscrew (Outboard) 316 Snap ring (Inside) 317 Snap ring (Outside) 319 Constant level oiler 321 Oil seal (Inboard) 322 Oil seal (Outboard) 337 Vent 338 Shaft 339 Shaft sleeve 340 Impeller key 341 Coupler key 342 Water slinger 601 Bearing frame support 602 Support retaining pin 604 Support levelling screw CAUTION Particular care must be taken to check the following before pump is started up:- 1. Is the pump primed? 2. Alignment OK? 3. Rotation OK? 4. Lubrication OK? Pipework properly supported? 5. 6. Voltage supply OK? es Overload protection OK? Is the system clean? Armstrong Warranty does not cover any damage to the equipment resulting from failure to observe the above precautions. GENERAL: Armstrong Centrifugal Pumps, properly installed and given reasonable care and maintenance. will perform satisfactorily for a long period of time. These instructions describe the procedures which should be followed to ensure trouble-free operation. LOCATION LOCATE THE PUMP WHERE IT IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE FOR INSPECTION AND SERVICING, AND PROVIDE ADEQUATE HEADROOM FOR HOIST FACILITIES IN THE CASE OF LARGER PUMPS. MOTOR-DRIVEN UNITS SHOULD NOT BE LOCATED IN DAMP ATMOSPHERES UNLESS THIS CONDITION HAS BEEN PRO- VIDED FOR IN THE MOTOR ENCLOSURE. FICIENTLY SUBSTANTIAL TO AB- FOUNDATION SORB ANY VIBRATION AND TO FORM A PERMANENT RIGID SUPPORT FOR THE BASEPLATE. THIS IS ESSENTIAL IN MAINTAINING THE ALIGNMENT OF A DIRECT-CONNECTED UNIT. A GOOD CONCRETE FOUNDATION SHOULD WEIGH TWO-AND-ONE-HALF TIMES THE SHIPPING WEIGHT OF THE PUMP. IN BUILD- ING THE FOUNDATION, MAKE AMPLE ALLOWANCE FOR GROUTING. FOUNDATION BOLTS OF THE PROPER SIZE SHOULD BE AR- RANGED AS SHOWN, WITH A PIPE SLEEVE EMBEDDED IN THE CON- CRETE TO PERMIT ADJUSTMENT OF THE BOLTS AFTER THE CON- CRETE HAS BEEN POURED. USE SLEEVES WITH A DIAMETER TWO- AND-ONE-HALF TIMES THE DIA- METER OF THE BOLTS. THE FOUNDATION SHOULD BE SUF- Tieha in Cannde WHEN THE UNIT HAS BEEN PLACED ON ITS FOUNDATION, SLACKEN OFF THE LEVELLING COUPLING SET SCREWS AND SLIDE BACK THE COUPLING HALVES SO THAT THE PUMP AND MOTOR SHAFTS ARE FREE TO ROTATE INDEPENDENTLY. RE-TIGHTEN THE SET SCREWS IN THIS POSITION. DO NOT RE-CONNECT THE COUPLING UNTIL AFTER THE UNIT HAS BEEN PIPED UP, FINALLY ALIGNED AND CHECKED FOR CORRECT DIREC- TION OF ROTATION. INSERT METAL WEDGES APPROXIMATELY 1” THICK ON EITHER SIDE OF THE FOUN- DATION BOLTS UNDER THE BASE- PLATE AS SHOWN. ADJUST WEDGES UNTIL THE SHAFTS OF THE PUMP AND MOTOR ARE LEVEL. ON FLANGED PUMPS, CHECK SUCTION AND DISCHARGE FLAN- GES FOR VERTICAL OR HORI- ZONTAL POSITION, USING A LEVEL, AND CORRECT AS NECES- SARY BY ADJUSTING THE WEDGES. WHEN THE BASEPLATE IS COMPLETELY LEVEL, THE FOUN- DATION BOLTS SHOULD BE TIGHTENED EVENLY AND FIRMLY. DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN BOLTS AT THIS STAGE. Form No. 6216 ALIGNMENT THE PUMP UNIT IS ACCURATELY ALIGNED IN OUR FACTORY PRIOR TO BEING SHIPPED. HOWEVER, ALL BASEPLATES ARE FLEXIBLE TO SOME EXTENT AND MUST NOT BE RELIED UPON TO MAINTAIN FACTORY ALIGNMENT. RE-ALIGNMENT IS NECESSARY AS FOLLOWS: AFTER THE UNIT HAS BEEN SET LEVEL ON ITS FOUNDATION. AFTER THE GROUT HAS SET AND THE FOUNDATION BOLTS HAVE BEEN TIGHTENED. AFTER THE PIPES HAVE BEEN CONNECTED. ACCURATE ALIGNMENT IS ABSOLUTELY ESSENTIAL. PROPER MECHANICAL OPERATION OF THE EQUIPMENT CANNOT BE GUARANTEED UNLESS THE FACTORY ALIGNMENT IS RE- PRODUCED IN THE FIELD. COUPLING ALIGNMENT CHECK THE ALIGNMENT BY PLAC- ING A STRAIGHT EDGE ACROSS THE COUPLING RIMS AT THE TOP, BOTTOM AND BOTH SIDES. CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO HAVE THE STRAIGHT EDGE PARALLEL TO THE AXIS OF THE PUMP AND MOTOR SHAFT. ALIGNMENT IS OBTAINED WHEN THE STRAIGHT EDGE RESTS EVENLY ON BOTH RIMS IN ALL FOUR PO- SITIONS. ADJUST AS NECESSARY BY PLACING SHIMS UNDER THE MOTOR FEET. GROUTING ING THE ALIGNMENT, FILL THE BASE- PLATE COMPLETELY WITH GROUT, AL- LOWING IT TO FLOW AROUND THE WEDGES UNDER THE BASEPLATE. ALLOW 48 HOURS FOR THE GROUT TO HAR- DEN BEFORE FINAL TIGHTENING OF THE FOUNDATION BOLTS. PIPING SHOULD BE INDEPENDENTLY SUPPORTED NEAR THE PUMP SO THAT NO STRAIN IS IMPOSED ON THE PUMP WHEN THE PIPES ARE CONNECTED. ALL CONNECTING PIPEWORK SHOULD BE ACCURATELY LOCATED - DO NOT ATTEMPT TO FORCE THE SUCTION AND DISCHARGE PIPES INTO POSITION. SUCTION PIPING USE SHORT DIRECT SUCTION PIPING ONE OR TWO TIMES LARGER THAN THE PUMP SUCTION NOZZLE. ARRANGE PIPING TO ELIMINATE POTENTIAL AIR POCKETS AND USE AN ECCENTRIC REDUCER TO CONNECT TO THE SUCTION NOZ- ZLE. A STRAINER THREE OR FOUR TIMES THE AREA OF THE SUCTION PIPE WILL PREVENT FOREIGN MATERIALS ENTERING THE PUMP. DISCHARGE PIPING A CHECK VALVE AND GATE VALVE SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN THE DISCHARGE LINE. IF AN INCREASER IS USED ON THE DISCHARGE SIDE TO INCREASE THE SIZE OF THE AFTER LEVELLING THE UNIT AND CHECK- BOTH THE SUCTION AND DISCHARGE PIPES SYSTEM CLEANLINESS: Before starting the pump, cleaned, flushed and drained and then replenished with clean liquid. Welding slag and other foreign materials - “Stop Leak'' and cleaning compounds - exces- sive or improper water treatment - are all detrimental to the pump internals. INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS SERIES 4030 BASE MOUNTED PUMP DISCHARGE PIPE, IT SHOULD BE PLACED BETWEEN THE CHECK VALVE AND THE PUMP. FINAL WHEN THE PIPING HAS BEEN CON- NECTED, CHECK THE ALIGNMENT ALIGNMENT AND MAKE CORRECTIONS IF NECES- SARY. ENERGISE THE MOTOR (WITH COUPLING HALVES DISCONNECTED) AND CHECK THAT THE ROTATION CORRESPONDS WITH THE DIRECTION ARROW ON THE PUMP. TO REVERSE THE RO- TATION ON A THREE-PHASE MOTOR, INTERCHANGE TWO LEADS. WHEN ROTATION AND ALIGNMENT ARE CORRECT, RE-CONNECT THE COUPLING WITH BOTH HALVES BUTTING AGAINST THE RUBBER INSERT. TIGHTEN THE COUPLING SET SCREWS. PUMP THE PUMP BEARINGS ARE LUBRI- CATED IN OUR FACTORY BEFORE LUBRICATION THE UNIT IS SHIPPED AND THE OIL SHOULD BE CAREFULLY CHECKED PRIOR TO START-UP. MAKE SURE THE OIL LEVEL IS APPROXIMATELY HALF WAY UP THE TRANSPARENT CUP ON THE CONSTANT LEVEL OILER. WHEN THE UNIT IS IN OPERATION, THE OIL SHOULD BE CHANGED EVERY SIX MONTHS. DRAIN THE OLD OIL FROM THE HOUSING AND THOROUGHLY FLUSH WITH KEROSENE. TIP THE OIL CUP AND FILL THE HOUSING WITH FRESH OIL THROUGH THE VENT IN THE BEARING COVER UNTIL THE OIL SHOWS IN THE LEG OF THE CONSTANT LEVEL OILER. FILL THE TRANSPARENT OIL CUP TO THE HALF - WAY MARK AND RETURN THE CUP TO ITS NORMAL POSITION. LUBRICATE WITH A NON-DETERGENT OIL HAVING A VIS- COSITY EQUAL TO A NO. 10 MOTOR OIL. * WHEN THE PUMP IS PROVIDED WITH GREASE-LUBRICATED BEARINGS, USE THE BEST GRADE ANTI-FRICTION BEARING GREASE. BEARINGS SHOULD BE NOT MORE THAN TWO-THIRDS FULL - DO NOT OVER-GREASE. MOTOR FOLLOW THE LUBRICATION PRO- CEDURES RECOMMENDED BY THE LUBRICATION MOTOR MANUFACTURER. IN MOST CASES IT WILL BE FOUND THAT THE MOTOR BEARINGS ARE CUSTOM- GREASED FOR SEVERAL YEARS’ OPERATION AND REQUIRE LITTLE OR NO ATTENTION. THE MECHANICAL SEAL REQUIRES MECHANICAL NO SPECIAL ATTENTION OR ADJUST- SEAL MENT. HOWEVER, DO NOT RUN THE PUMP DRY AS THE SEAL MUST HAVE A FILM OF LIQUID BETWEEN THE SEAL FACES FOR PROPER OPERATION. the system must be thoroughly Proper operation cannot be guaranteed if any of these conditions are allowed I to exist. STARTING AND STOPPING: The pump must be fully primed on start-up. Fill the pump casing with water, remove the air release plug in the top of the volute and rotate the shaft by hand to remove any air trapped in the impeller. Start PY eH PRODUCTS the pump with the discharge gate valve closed, then open gradually after the motor is up to speed. To stop the pump, close the discharge valve and trip the motor starter. ARMSTRONG PUMPS INC. NORTH TONAWANDA, N.Y. 14120 . Armstrong “~~ PUMPS Lf ARMSTRONG CIRCULATING PUMPS INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ST. Mah s Fe, No: 5010.65 Date: Feb. 28, 1983 Supersedes: 5010.65 Date: Sept. 3, 1976 MODELS S-25 to S-69, S-610 to S-630, H-32 to H-68, and SERIES 1000 and 1020 CAUTION: ALWAYS DISCONNECT POWER SUPPLY FROM MOTOR BEFORE SERVICING. INSTALLATION For convenience, Armstrong Circulators generally are installed in vertical pipelines, but may be changed easily on the job for horizontal pipelines or for opposite flow directions. To make the change, remove the body capscrews, taking care body gasket is kept in position, and rotate body to desired direction at 90° or 180° from the original position. With arrow on body pointing in direction of flow, insert body capscrews and tighten evenly. (On Models S-25 to S-57, H-32 to H-54 and Series 1000 (1B to 2B), a gap between bearing bracket and pump body (volute) is normal. Do not overtighten body capscrews!) Turn pump shaft manually at coupler to make sure shaft turns freely and impeller does not rub in body. Always install with motor shaft in a horizontal position with pump oil cups or oil well cover on top. Models S-25 to S-46 and H-32 to H-41 are shipped for down- discharge. All other models are shipped for up-discharge, as pumps of this size usually are installed to pump upward on hydronic systems, so the point of zero pressure change - namely, the compression tank connection - can be made easily to the system on the suction side of the circulator. The pump should be installed in a position to permit proper lubrication and servicing. Motor and bearing bracket are to be kept free of insulation. Pump and motor unit are designed to be supported by the inline piping only. Do not support in any other manner. A height of approximately 4 feet above floor is recommended. When placing pump between flanges, tighten flange bolts evenly and do not tighten excessively. Gate valves should be installed on discharge and suction side of pump to facilitate service. On larger pump sizes, a check valve should be located on discharge side of pump between pump body and gate valve to prevent damage due to water hammer. SYSTEM Before starting the pump, the system must CLEANLINESS be thoroughly cleaned, flushed and drained, then replenished with clean liquid. Welding slag and other foreign materials, "stopleak" and cleaning compounds, excessive or improper water treatment - ail are detrimental to the pump internals. Guarantee will be void if any of these conditions are allowed to exist. (Refer to File No. 6090.645 - Design and Care of Closed Hydronic Systems.) STARTING The pump must be fully primed on start-up. PUMP Fill system piping and pump body with liquid and vent complete system, turning pump by hand to dislodge air from body. Make sure fittings and drain valves are air-tight, then add any additional fill required. Check motor electrics against available supply, then start pump, making sure rotation is correct. When viewed from motor end, rotation is counter-clockwise on Models S-25 to S-46 and H-32 to H-41. On all other models, rotation is clockwise. If pressure does not develop, stop pump, re-check, vent and fill. Never attempt to fill system when pump is running. LUBRICATION CAUTION: STOP MOTOR BEFORE LUBRICATING. DO NOT OVER-OIL OR SPILL ON RESILIENT MOTOR RINGS. Do NOT force oil into cups, and stop if cup fills before addition of specified amount. Pump Lubrication Immediately after pump is installed and before running, slowly add the oil (SAE 30 non-detergent regular, supplied with pump) to pump oil cup, located on top of bearing bracket: S-25 to S-57, H-32 to H-54 and Series 1000 (1B to 2B) 1/2 oz. S-69, H-63 to H-68, S-610 to S-630, Series 1000 (1-1/2D, 2D) and Series 1020 (3D) 3-3/4 oz. At the start of each following heating season, lubricate with SAE 30 oil. For Models S-25 to S-57, H-32 to H-54 and Series 1000 (1B to 2B), add approximately 1/2 oz. (Lubricate every 6 months for high temperature or constant operation.) On Models S-69, H-63 to H-68, S-610 to S-630, Series 1000 (1-1/2D, 2D) and Series 1020 (3D), be sure oil is visible at the top and center of window on side of bracket and maintain this level at all times. Motor Lubrication CAUTION: STOP MOTOR BEFORE LUBRICATING. DO NOT OVER-OIL OR SPILL ON RESILIENT MOTOR RINGS. This motor has been lubricated properly at the factory. At the start of each following heating season, however, on motors with gil cups, add 15 drops SAE 30 non-detergent oil to each motor cup. If motor is fitted with grease fittings, follow the motor manufacturer's recommended procedure. Motors without oil cups or grease fittings are custom-greased for several years' operation and require little or no attention. SEAL Remove pump bracket from body. Remove the REPLACEMENT impeller, damaged seal assembly, ceramic insert and rubber cup. Clean the recess in bearing bracket coverplate and install a new retainer cup and ceramic. Check the condition of the shaft sleeve. If scored, replace the shaft assembly. Otherwise, clean shaft extension and polish sleeve with fine crocus cloth, using a rotating motion, if required. Press against coupler end of shaft to take up end play while pressing new seal firmly against the stationary face. A slight amount of clean vaseline may be put on shaft sleeve to assist installation. Press down firmly and evenly, using 2 screwdrivers and pushing against the 4 ears of driving band (the metal ring around rubber bellows), or around top outer edge of driving band on Models S-25 to S-57, H-32 to H-54 and Series 1000 (1B to 2B). Do not use spring washer on Models S-25, S-35 and H-32 current style circulators, where recess to locate spring is provided on impeller hub. Continue pressing against coupler end of shaft, re-mount impeller and re-assemble the seal bearing assembly into body. If necessary, install a new body gasket and clean gasket surface of both volute and bracket. Does the power supply agree with data on motor nameplate? CAUTION: Before operating pump, carefully check: 1, Is the pump primed? 4, 2. Is rotation correct? Be 3, Is pump properly lubricated? 6. Is overload protection provided? Is the system clean? FOR DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS USE BRONZE BODY PUMPS Form No. 6474-8 Sue ARMSTRONG PUMPS INC. NORTH TONAWANDA, N.Y. 14120 _ Armstrong ) 5, PUMPS p ARMSTRONG CIRCULATING PUMPS ~ INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS sr Weg’ Jas File No: 5010.65 Date: Feb. 28, 1983 Supersedes: 5010.65 Date: Sept. 3, 1976 MODELS S-25 to S-69, S-610 to S-630, H-32 to H-68, and SERIES 1000 and 1020 CAUTION: ALWAYS DISCONNECT POWER SUPPLY FROM MOTOR BEFORE SERVICING. INSTALLATION For convenience, Armstrong Circulators generally are installed in vertical pipelines, but may be changed easily on the job for horizontal pipelines or for opposite flow directions. To make the change, remove the body capscrews, taking care body gasket is kept in position, and rotate body to desired direction at 90° or 180° from the original position. With arrow on body pointing in direction of flow, insert body capscrews and tighten evenly. (On Models S-25 to S-57, H-32 to H-54 and Series 1000 (1B to 2B), a gap between bearing bracket and pump body (volute) is normal. Do not overtighten body capscrews!) Turn pump shaft manually at coupler to make sure shaft turns freely and impeller does not rub in body. Always install with motor shaft in a horizontal position with pump oil cups or oil well cover on top. Models S-25 to S-46 and H-32 to H-41 are shipped for down- discharge. All other models are shipped for up-discharge, as pumps of this size usually are installed to pump upward on hydronic systems, so the point of zero pressure change - namely, the compression tank connection - can be made easily to the system on the suction side of the circulator. The pump should be installed in a position to permit proper lubrication and servicing. Motor and bearing bracket are to be kept free of insulation. Pump and motor unit are designed to be supported by the inline piping only. Do not support in any other manner. A height of approximately 4 feet above floor is recommended. When placing pump between flanges, tighten flange bolts evenly and do not tighten excessively. Gate valves should be installed on discharge and suction side of pump to facilitate service. On larger pump sizes, a check valve should be located on discharge side of pump between pump body and gate valve to prevent damage due to water hammer. SYSTEM Before starting the pump, the system must CLEANLINESS be thoroughly cleaned, flushed and drained, then replenished with clean liquid. Welding slag and other foreign materials, "stopleak" and cleaning compounds, excessive or improper water treatment - all are detrimental to the pump internals. Guarantee will be void if any of these conditions are allowed to exist. (Refer to File No. 6090.645 - Design and Care of Closed Hydronic Systems.) STARTING The pump must be fully primed on start-up. PUMP Fill system piping and pump body with liquid and vent complete system, turning pump by hand to dislodge air from body. Make sure fittings and drain valves are air-tight, then add any additional fill required. Check motor electrics against available supply, then start pump, making sure rotation is correct. When viewed from motor end, rotation is counter-clockwise on Models S-25 to S-46 and H-32 to H-41. On all other models, rotation is clockwise. If pressure does not develop, stop pump, re-check, vent and fill. Never attempt to fill system when pump is running. LUBRICATION CAUTION: STOP MOTOR BEFORE LUBRICATING. DO NOT OVER-OIL OR SPILL ON RESILIENT MOTOR RINGS. Do NOT force oil into cups, and stop if cup fills before addition of specified amount. Pump Lubrication Immediately after pump is installed and before running, slowly add the oil (SAE 30 non-detergent regular, supplied with pump) to pump oil cup, located on top of bearing bracket: $-25 to S-57, H-32 to H-54 and Series 1000 (1B to 2B) 1/2 oz. S-69, H-63 to H-68, S-610 to S-630, Series 1000 (1-1/2D, 2D) and Series 1020 (3D) 3-3/4 oz. At the start of each following heating season, lubricate with SAE 30 oil. For Models S-25 to S-57, H-32 to H-54 and Series 1000 (1B to 2B), add approximately 1/2 oz. (Lubricate every 6 months for high temperature or constant operation.) On Models S-69, H-63 to H-68, S-610 to S-630, Series 1000 (1-1/2D, 2D) and Series 1020 (3D), be sure oil is visible at the top and center of window on side of bracket and maintain this level at all times. Motor Lubrication CAUTION: STOP MOTOR BEFORE LUBRICATING. DO NOT OVER-OIL OR SPILL ON RESILIENT MOTOR RINGS. This motor has been lubricated properly at the factory. At the start of each following heating season, however, on motors with oil cups, add 15 drops SAE 30 non-detergent oil to each motor cup. If motor is fitted with grease fittings, follow the motor manufacturer's recommended procedure. Motors without oil cups or grease fittings are custom-greased for several years' operation and require little or no attention. SEAL Remove pump bracket from body. Remove the REPLACEMENT impeller, damaged seal assembly, ceramic insert and rubber cup. Clean the recess in bearing bracket coverplate and install a new retainer cup and ceramic. Check the condition of the shaft sleeve. If scored, replace the shaft assembly. Otherwise, clean shaft extension and polish sleeve with fine crocus cloth, using a rotating motion, if required. Press against coupler end of shaft to take up end play while pressing new seal firmly against the stationary face. A slight amount of clean vaseline may be put on shaft sleeve to assist installation. Press down firmly and evenly, using 2 screwdrivers and pushing against the 4 ears of driving band (the metal ring around rubber bellows), or around top outer edge of driving band on Models S-25 to S-57, H-32 to H-54 and Series 1000 (1B to 2B). Do not use spring washer on Models S-25, S-35 and H-32 current style circulators, where recess to locate spring is provided on impeller hub. Continue pressing against coupler end of shaft, re-mount impeller and re-assemble the seal bearing assembly into body. If necessary, install a new body gasket and clean gasket surface of both volute and bracket. Does the power supply agree with data on motor nameplate? CAUTION: Before operating pump, carefully check: 1, Is the pump primed? 4, 2. Is rotation correct? 5. 3, Is pump properly lubricated? 6. Is overload protection provided? Is the system clean? FOR DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS USE BRONZE BODY PUMPS Form No. 6474-B Sie ARMSTRONG PUMPS INC. NORTH TONAWANDA. N.Y. 14120 St. Makys OOS A mstron ARMSTRONG CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS [FILE wos 5002-65 p- PUMPS INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS SUPERSEDES: "NEW SERIES 4260 motor mount PUMP 101 Volute 102 Impeller 103 Volute gasket 104 Volute capscrew 116 Impeller nut 206 Motor/pump bracket 207 Motor capscrew 208 Mechanical seal 209 Seat insert 210 Seat insert gasket 338 Shaft 340 Impeller key 501 Motor CAUTION Particular care must be taken to check the following before pump is started up:- 1. Is the pump primed? 4. Voltage supply OK? 2. Rotation OK? 5. Overload protection OK? 3. Pipework properly supported? 6. Is the system clean? Armstrong Warranty does not cover any damage to the equipment resulting from failure to observe the above precautions. GENERAL: Armstrong Centrifugal Pumps, properly installed and given reasonable care and maintenance will perform satisfactorily for a long period of time. These in- structions describe the procedures which should be followed to ensure trouble-free operation. LOCATION LOCATE THE PUMP WHERE IT IS EASILY LOCATE THE PUMP ON ITS FOUNDATION AND MARK OFF ACCESSIBLE FOR INSPECTION AND THE FOUNDATION HOLES USING THE MOTOR FEET AS A SERVICING, AND PROVIDE ADEQUATE TEMPLATE. ORILL FOUR HOLES OF THE REQUIRED SIZE HEADROOM FOR HOIST FACILITIES IN THE CASE OF AND INSERT THE ANCHORS. TAKE THE TAMPING TOOL LARGER PUMPS. MOTOR-DRIVEN UNITS SHOULD NOT (SUPPLIED WITH THE ANCHORS) AND DRIVE HOME THE BE LOCATED IN DAMP ATMOSPHERES UNLESS THIS LEAD SLEEVE UNTIL IT IS BELOW THE LEVEL OF THE CONDITION HAS BEEN PROVIDED FOR IN THE MOTOR FOUNDATION AND FIRMLY FIXED IN THE CONCRETE. ENCLOSURE. PROTRUDING BOLTS AS SHOWN AT THE RIGHT SHOULD BE AVOIDED SINCE THIS ARRANGEMENT DOES NOT ALLOW FOUNDATION MOUNT THE PUMP ON A FOUNDATION p resereeY Or eS eo ego ot une ara Ge SUFFICIENTLY SUBSTANTIAL TO 7 ABSORB ANY VIBRATION. A GOOD FOUNDATION SHOULD WEIGH APPROXIMATELY TWO AND ONE HALF TIMES THE SHIPPING WEIGHT OF THE LEVELLING BEFORE INSTALLING THE UNIT, USE A - STRAIGHT EDGE TO CHECK THAT THE MOUNTING SURFACE IS LEVEL. PLACE THE UNIT ON ITS -FOUNDATION AND INSERT SHIMS UNDER THE MOTOR FEET TO TAKE UP ANY | RREGULAR- ITLES IN THE CONCRETE. ON FLANGED PUMPS, CHECK THE SUCTION AND DISCHARGE FLANGES FOR HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL POSITION USING A STRAIGHT EDGE AND LEVEL. TIGHTEN FOUNDATION BOLTS EVENLY. INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS SERIES 4260 MOTOR MOUNT PUMP PIPING BOTH THE SUCTION AND DISCHARGE PIPES SHOULD BE INDEPENDENTLY SUPPORTED NEAR THE PUMP SO THAT NO STRAIN IS IMPOSED ON THE PUMP WHEN THE PIPES ARE CONNECTED. ALL CONNECTING PIPEWORK SHOULD BE ACCURATELY LOCATED DO NOT ATTEMPT TO FORCE THE SUCTION AND DISCHARGE PIPES INTO POSITION. SUCTION PIPING USE SHORT DIRECT SUCTION PIPING ONE OR TWO TIMES LARGER THAN THE PUMP SUCTION NOZZLE. ARRANGE PIPING TO ELIMINATE POTENTIAL AIR POCKETS AND USE AN ECCENTRIC REDUCER TO CONNECT TO THE SUCTION NOZZLE. A STRAINER THREE OR FOUR TIMES THE AREA OF THE SUCTION PIPE WILL PREVENT FOREIGN MATERIALS ENTERING THE PUMP. DISCHARGE PIPING A CHECK VALVE AND GATE VALVE SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN THE DISCHARGE LINE. IF AN INCREASER IS USED ON THE DISCHARGE SIDE TO INCREASE THE SIZE OF THE DISCHARGE PIPE, IT SHOULD BE PLACED BETWEEN THE CHECK VALVE AND THE PUMP. PUMP NOT REQUIRED - THERE ARE NO LUBRICATION BEARINGS IN THE PUMP. MOTOR FOLLOW THE LUBRICATION PROCEDURES LUBRICATION RECOMMENDED BY THE MOTOR MANU- FACTURER. IN MOST CASES IT WILL BE FOUND THAT THE MOTOR BEARINGS ARE CUSTOM GREASED FOR SEVERAL YEARS OPERATION AND REQUIRE LITTLE OR NO ATTENTION. . MECHANICAL THE MECHANICAL SEAL REQUIRES NO SEAL SPECIAL ATTENTION OR ADJUSTMENT. HOWEVER, DO NOT RUN THE PUMP DRY AS THE SEAL MUST HAVE A FILM OF LIQUID BETWEEN THE SEAL FACES FOR PROPER OPERATION. ROTATION WITH THE PUMP FULLY PRIMED, ENERGISE THE MOTOR BRIEFLY AND CHECK THAT THE ROTATION CORRESPONDS WITH THE DIRECTION ARROW ON THE PUMP. TO REVERSE THE ROTATION ON A THREE PHASE MOTOR, INTERCHANGE TWO OF THE LEADS. SYSTEM CLEANLINESS: Before starting the pump, the system must be thoroughly cleaned, flushed and drained and then replenished with clean liquid. Welding slag and other foreign materials - "Stop Leak'' and cleaning compounds - exces- sive or improper water treatment - are all detrimental to the pump internals. Proper operation cannot be guaranteed if any of these conditions are allowed to exist. STARTING AND STOPPING: The pump must be fully primed on start-up. Fill the pump casing with water, remove the air release plug in the top of the volute and rotate the shaft by hand to remove any air trapped in the impeller. Start the pump with the discharge gate valve closed, then open gradually after the motor is up to speed. To stop the pump, close the discharge valve and trip the motor starter. FORM NO. 6219 ARMSTRONG PUMPS INC. North Tonawanda, N.Y., 14120 ST Manys Dob PA ry ARMSTRONG CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS FILE NO: 5040.66 DATE: Jan. 31,1968 INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Rare SERIES 4030 sBase mountTeD PumP Mat Ve \ PRODUCTS 7 101 Volute 102 Impeller 103 Volute gasket 104 Volute capscrew 117 Impeller capscrew 118 Impeller washer 201 Coverplate 202 Coverplate capscrew 313 Bearing cover gasket (Outboard) 314 Bearing cover capscrew (Inboard) 315 Bearing cover capscrew (Outboard) 316 Snap ring (Inside) 317 Snap ring (Outside) 319 Constant level oiler 321 Oil seal (Inboard) 322 Oil seal (Outboard) 208 Mechanical Seal Assembly 337 Vent 209 Seat insert 338 Shaft 210 Seat insert gasket 339 Shaft sleeve 301 Bearing frame 340 Impeller key 302 Ball bearing (Inboard) 303 Ball bearing (Outboard) 310 Bearing cover (Inboard) 311 Bearing cover (Outboard) 312 Bearing cover gasket (Inboard) 341 Coupler key 342 Water slinger 601 Bearing frame support 602 Support retaining pin 604 Support levelling screw CAUTION Particular care must be taken to check the following before pump is started up:- 1. Is the pump primed? 5. Pipework properly supported? 2. Alignment OK? 6. Voltage supply OK? 3, Rotation OK? 7. Overload protection OK? 4. Lubrication OK? 8. Is the system clean? Armstrong Warranty does not cover any damage to the equipment resulting from failure to observe the above precautions. GENERAL: Armstrong Centrifugal Pumps, properly installed and given reasonable care and maintenance. will perform satisfactorily for a long period of time. These instructions describe the procedures which should be followed to ensure trouble-free operation. LOCATION LOCATE THE PUMP WHERE IT IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE FOR INSPECTION AND SERVICING, AND PROVIDE ADEQUATE HEADROOM FOR HOIST FACILITIES IN THE CASE OF LARGER PUMPS. MOTOR-DRIVEN UNITS SHOULD NOT BE LOCATED IN DAMP ATMOSPHERES UNLESS THIS CONDITION HAS BEEN PRO- VIDED FOR IN THE MOTOR ENCLOSURE. FICIENTLY SUBSTANTIAL TO AB- FOUNDATION SORB ANY VIBRATION AND TO FORM A PERMANENT RIGID SUPPORT FOR THE BASEPLATE. THIS IS ESSENTIAL IN MAINTAINING THE ALIGNMENT OF A DIRECT-CONNECTED UNIT, A GOOD CONCRETE FOUNDATION SHOULD WEIGH TWO-AND-ONE-HALF TIMES THE SHIPPING WEIGHT OF THE PUMP, IN BUILD- ING THE FOUNDATION, MAKE AMPLE ALLOWANCE FOR GROUTING, FOUNDATION BOLTS OF THE PROPER SIZE SHOULD BE AR- RANGED AS SHOWN, WITH A PIPE SLEEVE EMBEDDED IN THE CON- CRETE TO PERMIT ADJUSTMENT OF THE BOLTS AFTER THE CON- CRETE HAS BEEN POURED, USE SLEEVES WITH A DIAMETER TWO- AND-ONE-HALF TIMES THE DIA- METER OF THE BOLTS, THE FOUNDATION SHOULD BE SUF- Litha in Canada LEVELLING WHEN THE UNIT HAS BEEN PLACED ON ITS FOUNDATION, SLACKEN OFF THE COUPLING SET SCREWS AND SLIDE BACK THE COUPLING HALVES SO THAT THE PUMP AND MOTOR SHAFTS ARE FREE TO ROTATE INDEPENDENTLY. RE-TIGHTEN THE SET SCREWS IN THIS POSITION. DO NOT RE-CONNECT THE COUPLING UNTIL AFTER THE UNIT HAS BEEN PIPED UP, FINALLY ALIGNED AND CHECKED FOR CORRECT DIREC- TION OF ROTATION. INSERT METAL WEDGES APPROXIMATELY 1” THICK ON EITHER SIDE OF THE FOUN- DATION BOLTS UNDER THE BASE- PLATE AS SHOWN. ADJUST WEDGES UNTIL THE SHAFTS OF THE PUMP AND MOTOR ARE LEVEL. ON FLANGED PUMPS, CHECK SUCTION AND DISCHARGE FLAN- GES FOR VERTICAL OR HORI- ZONTAL POSITION, USING A LEVEL, AND CORRECT AS NECES- SARY BY ADJUSTING THE WEDGES. WHEN THE BASEPLATE IS COMPLETELY LEVEL, THE FOUN- DATION BOLTS SHOULD BE TIGHTENED EVENLY AND FIRMLY. DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN BOLTS AT THIS STAGE. Form No. 6216 GVA GATIAUON THE POMP-UNIT’ TS ACCURATELY ALIGNED IN OUR FACTORY PRIOR TO ALIGNMENT BEING SHIPPED EVER, ALL BASEPLATES ARE FLEXIBLE TO, SOME E} T AND UST. NOT BE RELIED UPON TO MAINTAIN FACTORY, ALIGNMENT): RE-ALIGNMENT IS NECESSARY ‘AS FOLLOWS ¢ 1. AFTER THE UNIT HAS BEEN.‘SET LEV ON (DTS |FOUNDATION, “AFTER ‘THE GROUT HAS ‘SET ‘AND THE FOUNDATION BOLTS HAVE. ‘BEEN TIGHTENED. \ » APTER THE PIPES. HAVE BEEN CONNECTED: ACCURATE; ALIGNMENT | IS “ABSOLUTELY) ESSENTIAL: PROPER: MECHANICAL) OPERATION FOF THE EQUIPMENT. CANNOT \ BE GUARANTEED, UNLESS ) THE: F ACTORYSALIGNMENT. IS\RE>\ PRODUCED IN THE FIELD, } COUPLING ALIGNMENT ¢ CK THE ALIGNMENT -BY PLAC- G A |STRAIGHT-EDGE ACROSS, "THE: COUPLING RIMS AT-THE TOP, wer BODTOM AND’ BOTH-SIDES, GARE * »MUST BE TAKEN TO HAVE THE © SBRAIGHT EDGE PARALLEL TO THE AXIS OF THE PUMP AND MOTOR SHAFT. ALIGNMENT IS OBTAINED: WHEN THE STRAIGHT EDGE RESTS EVENLY ON BOTH RIMS IN-ALL POUR, PO- SITIONS. ADJUST AS NECESSARY BY PLACING SHIMS UNDER THE MOTOR FEET. GROUTING ING THE ALIGNMENT, FILL THE BASE- PLATE COMPLETELY WITH GROUT, AL- LOWING IT TO FLOW AROUND THE WEDGES UNDER THE BASEPLATE. DEN BEFORE FINAL TIGHTENING OF. THE, FOUNDATION BOLTS. PIPING SHOULD BE INDEPENDENTLY SUPPORTED NEAR; THE, PUMP; SO; THAT “NO SITRAEN, \ES: IMPOSED ON THE PUMP WHEN THE PIPES ARE CONNECTED. ALL CONNECTING PIPEWORK SHOULD BE ACCURATELY LOCATED..-, DO. NOT. ATTEMPT, TO.FORCE THE;.SUCTION AND DISCHARGE PIPES INTO POSITION, SUCTION PIPING AFTER LEVELLING. THE. UNIT AND. CHECK - BOTH THE SUCTION AND DISCHARGE PIPES USE“SHORT “DIRECT SUCTION” PIPING“ ONE OR~ TWO TIMES” LARGER THAN THE PUMP SUCTION NOZZLE. ARRANGE PIPING TO ELIMINATE) POTENTIAL AIR \POCKETS AND USE. AN ECCENTRIC, REDUCER TO;CONNECT TO; THE SUCTION NOZ+ ZLE. \A STRAINER THREE. OR, FOUR) TIMES THE AREA OF THE SUCTION PIPE; WILL PREVENT. FOREIGN MS TERRA ENTERING THE PUMP. in A DISCHARGE PIPING A CHECK VALVEVAND’ GATE: VALVE ‘SHOULD! BE INSTALLED IN THE DISCHARGE LINE. IF AN INCREASER IS USED ON THE DISCHARGE SIDE TO INCREASE THE SIZE OF THE SYSTEM CLEANLINESS; “INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRU ALLOW 48 HOURS FOR’ THE GROUT. TO HAR- °° Before starting the pump, A DISCHARGE PIPE ALS hte PLACED BETWEEN ‘THE CHECK VALVE AND THE PUMP. FINAL WHEN THE PIPING HAS BEEN CON- . NECTED, CHECK THE ALIGNMENT ALIGNMENT: AND) MAKE CORRECTIONS IF NECES- ‘ SARY. ENERGISE THE MOTOR! (WITH COUPLING HALVES DISCONNECTED) AND CHECK THAT THE) ROTATION CORRESPONDS )WITH) THE DIRECTION ARROW”ON THE PUMP. TO REVERSE, THE, RO? TATION ON A THREE-~PHASE MOTOR, INTERCHANGE, TWO LEADS. / ' { WHEN ROTATION AND ALIGNMENT ARE CORRECT, »RE;CONNECT ie THE COUPLING WITH, BOTH HALVES BUTTING., AGAINST) THE y RUBBER INSERT TIGHTEN THE COUPLING, SET SCREWS, : P 1 ro } PUMP THE PUMP BEARINGS, ARE) |LUBRE- CATED IN OUR, FACTORY, BEFORE LUBRICATION | THE UNIT IS, SHIPPED AND THE 1 OIL SHOULD BE CAREFULLY CHECKED \ PRIOR TO START-UP. MAKE SURE (THE OIL-LEVEL IS APPROXIMATELY HALF WAY UP THE TRANSPARENT GUP ON. THE CONSTANT LEVEL OILER. WHEN \THE “UNIT ISIN OPERATION, THE OIL SHOULD BE CHANGED EVERY SIX MONTHS. DRAIN THE OLD OIL FROM THE HOUSING AND, THOROUGHLY FLUSH WITH KEROSENE. TIP\THE OIL CUP AND FILL THE HOUSING WITH FRESH OIL THROUGH THE VENT IN THE BEARING COVER UNTIL TFHE—OLL-—SHOWS--IN-THE LEG OF THE CONSTANT LEVEL OILER. FILL THE TRANSPARENT OIL CUP TO THE HALF - WAY MARK AND RETURN THE CUP TO ITS NORMAL POSITION. LUBRICATEs WITH\A NON-DETERGENT -OLL -HAVING (A) VES@ COSITY. EQUAL TO A NO, 10 MOTOR OIL. * WHEN THE PUMP. 1S. PROVIDED WITH GREASE-LUBRICATED BEARINGS, USE THE BEST GRADE ANTI-FRICTION BEARING GREASE. BEARINGS- SHOULD BE- NOT MORE THAN TWO-THIRDS FULL - DO NOT OVER“GREASE. MOTOR: LUBRICATION. CEDURES. REGOMMENDED..BY .THE MOTOR MANUFACTURER. IN MOST CASES IT WILL BE FOUND THAT ewww HE_.MOTOR.. BEARINGS. ARE. CUSTOM-_. ““GREASED FOR SEVERAL YEARS’ LITTLE OR NO ATTENTION, OPERATION AND REQUIRE MECHANICAL THE, MECHANICAL, SEAL REQUIRES NO SPECLAL°ATTENTION) OR ADJUST ~ SEAL MENT,| HOWEVER; DO; NOT RUN THE PUMP DRY AS THE SEAL MUST HAVE Ay FILM) OF) LIQUID) /BETWEEN, fee SEAL FACES, FOR, PROPER OPERATION. } the isystem musit ‘be thoroughly ISTALL ETIONs | “SERIES 4 4030 BASE MOUNTED P FOLLOW, THE) LUBRICATION. PRO-.: and rotate the shaft by«hand)\to remove) any air trapped) in the impedler.:Start\ Proper operation cannot be guaranteed if any of these conditions are, allowed. cleaned, flushed dnd,drained-and then replenished with clean liquid. Welding slag and other foreign materials - “Stop Leak” and cleaning compounds - exces- sive or improper water treatment”-°are al] detrimental, to the pump, internals. to exist. PRM PRODUCTS The pump must be fully primed on start-up, Fill they . ofthe volute STARTING AND STOPPING: pump, casing with water,,remove,the air release plug in the top the pump withthe discharge gate valve’ closed, then open dpadudll!ly after the motor is up to speed. To stop the pump, close the discharge ,valve and. trip the motor starter. | ARMSTRONG PUMPS INC., RTH TONAWANDA, 14120 Preise oot SLGMES Ee a eee ep a1 - —— ar PLATES MUST BE ARRANGED ‘ ALTERNATELY LEFT AND RIGHT. | FOR CONVENIENCE ON THIS DRAWING, WHERE BLOCKS OF RAND LAA PLATES OCCUR, THE eo TOTAL NUMBER OF EACH IS GIVEN. | : ie f 1@ eiyeou LK @ 4:1? Oewect Out © iBo* i He Og PASSES : oe 198°. aLycol -| (OF SS | ee : IN GLYCOL. - | OF SO ELEVATION.OF PLATE ARRANGEMENT 1. ALL PLATES VIEWED FROM GASKET SIDE. 2; END PLATES DENOTED BY LETTER’ K”PRECEDING SYMBOL. 3.68 THIS MODEL HEAT EXCHANGER IS DESIGNED’ To OPERATE WITH METAL TO METAL CONTACT BETWEEN PLATE SURFACES. ALL SUPPORT IS FROM PLATE CROSS OVER POINTS AND NOT 42a] PLATE SYMBOLS oot “] FROM GASKET SEAL. THEREFORE THIS MACHINE — | eee (727) MUST ALWAYS BE TIGHTENED TO A DEAD HARD CONDITION BEFORE OPERATION. THE PLATAGE DIM. SHOWN IS NOMINAL ONLY, DUE TO PLATE MFG. TOLERANCES PLATAGE CAN VARY +0,005“[o. 3] PER PLADE. 4. INSTALL PLATES, ALTERNATING LEFT AND RIGHT, 5. @ DENOTES SUPPORT DISC FITTED TO BN GRRE 1 Ft SIDE OF PLATE. a 6. THIS MODEL HEAT EXCHANGER 15 TIGHTENED USING WRENCH ON HEX NUTS AT THE HEAD END ONLY. 4 7 ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. DIMENSIONS IN BRACKETS [ J _ - are IN MILLIMETERS. 8 CUSTOMER'S PIPING TO FOLLOWE OR CONNECTOR GRID NOZZLES MUST ALLOW FOR FREE MOVEMENT — WHEN UNIT IS OPENED FOR _ SERVICE AND PROVIDE FOR VARIATION OF THE TIGHTENED - PLATAGE DIM.@ OF + te PER a 100 PLATES, a 59- LAA Ba. t-bOm/se. ae LAA /Se I1%e" [40] DIA. Liebe HoLes FOLLOWER — KAY Vy AK HZ, AX, ye TI-1173 TIGHTENING INSTRUCTIONS APV SERIES R51, R55, R56, R86, R145, R405 and JUNIOR, SR 15, SR95 & SR 35. PARAFLOW PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER Proper tightening of the tie bars, which compress the plate pack within the Paraflow frame is essential to satisfactory unit operation and maximum gasket life. Close adherence to the following instructions will avoid processing problems. 1. Each plate is stamped with an identification number (top center.) Carefully check to make certain the actual plate sequence matches the plate arrangement drawing. 2. Grease tie bar threads. On the R55, grease the long twin screws. 3. Using the wrench supplied, tighten the R55 twin screws as tightly as ONE MAN can get them. 4. Insert tie bars. Have ONE MAN use the wrench supplied to tighten the tie bars in rotation as Closely as possible to the nominal dimensions on the plate arrangement drawing. Note that dimensions can vary + for each 100 plates. 5. Always tighten units square and plumb. Plate dimensions measured at aan four corners of the heat exchanger frame should be equal, + 1/8". 6. Never tighten or loosen a plate pack which contains liquid under pressure. 7. Before operating the R55, back off twin screws. 8. Complete final piping to the follower only after the tightening process has been finished. Since gaskets for the above series Paraflow are of the "0" ring type, there is no danger of over tightening. APV EQUIPMENT, IN2. 395 FILLMORE AVENUE TONAWANDA, NEW YORK 14150 (716) 692-3000 TXT T KS XN S KHL R1-472 INSTRUCTIONS FOR REGASKETING APV PARAFLOW PLATES (GRS, Paracril & Paratherm Gasket Materials) While APV plate gaskets can easily be replaced in the field, it is most important that the regasketing procedure be followed step by step as outlined. To remove worn gaskets: 1) To break the thermoplastic bond between the gasket and plate, use a painter’s torch at approximately 450°F to heat the back of the gasket area around a port. As the adhesive softens, pull the gasket from the groove with pliers. Continue this process until the entire gasket has been removed. 2) Any remaining traces of old adhesive, grease or dirt should be removed from the gasket grooves. Use a solvent such as Toulene. Do not use abrasives to clean the grooves. To attach new gaskets: 1) The bonding side of replacement gaskets is subjected to a special process at the factory which breaks the surface with a multitude of fine cracks. These cracks absorb and retain a factory applied coating of a thermoplastic bonding agent and improve the strength of the bond. 2) Apply a thin even film of 3M formula EC-1099 cement to the gasket groove. Spread and allow to dry until tacky. Press the gasket firmly into place with the bonding side against the groove cement. 3) After all plates have been regasketed and placed in the heat exchanger frame, tighten the plate pack only just enough to prevent leakage. 4) Attach a low pressure (less than 15 psig) desuperheated steam line to the inlet ports and slowly raise the temperature of the plate pack to 212°F or 100°C. Maintain temperature for at least three hours. New cement in gasket grooves will act as a solvent on pre-applied gasket adhesive, and continuous curing will result in a tight bond. 5) If steam is unavailable, 212°F (100°C) water from a hot water set may be used to heat the plate pack. Hold curing temperature of 200—205°F for a minimum of three hours. Heat treatment is absolutely necessary to achieve a good adhesive bond. 6) Allow the heat exchanger to cool naturally to room temperature before opening. 7) Refer to tightening instructions and tighten the plate pack accordingly. OVER KE) UNTO, HK THE PROPER CARE OF APV PARAFLOW PLATE STAINLESS STEEL SURFACES HEAT EXCHANGERS NO. 1172 Stainless steel is an excellent material for the processing of most food products since it is readily cleaned, sanitized and has good resistance to natural acids. The metal, however, may be subject to attack if it is not properly cared for when used to handle potentially corrosive liquids. The life of Paraflow stainless steel surfaces, therefore, is very much dependent upon the product being processed, the duty performed, and the care given to the metal. Since every operation is different, there can be no broad guarantee against corrosion of the heat exchanger surfaces. To provide maximum protection for the stainless steel surfaces of your plate heat exchanger, we recommend that you contact a reputable manufacturer of chemical and cleaning sanitizing products who maintains a customer advisory service. Once they know the details of your operation, they should be able to recommend cleaning and sanitizing procedures. In general, we would caution against the following potential sources of attack on stainless steel surfaces: 1. Food products such as vinegar, ketchup, table sauces, and starch paste with vinegar have high acid properties. These materials should be thoroughly cleaned from all stainless steel surfaces as soon as daily operations are completed. 2. Since chlorine can attack stainless steel, it should not be used on Paraflow stainless steel surfaces. 3. When cleaning with alkali compounds such as caustic soda, carbonate of soda, sodium phosphate or sodium metasilicate, directions should be followed carefully. Concentrations should not exceed 3% by weight, and temperatures should not exceed 150°F. 4. Water scale may be removed by carefully using dilute nitric acid under 1% or phosphoric under 5% at temperatures no higher than 140°F. These solutions must be free from salt and must be thoroughly flushed from all stainless steel surfaces immediately after use with 1/4% caustic and plain water flush. 5. Hydrochloric or sulphuric acid should never be used. APV EQUIPMENT, INC. 395 FILLMORE AVENUE TONAWANDA, NEW YORK 14150 (716) 692-3000 TI-1173 TIGHTENING INSTRUCTIONS APV SERIES R51, R55, R56, R86, R145, R4O5 and JUNIOR, SR 15, SR95 & SR 35. PARAFLOW PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER Proper tightening of the tie bars, which compress the plate pack within the Paraflow frame is essential to satisfactory unit operation and maximum gasket life. Close adherence to the following instructions will avoid processing problems. aus Each plate is stamped with an identification number (top center.) Carefully check to make certain the actual plate sequence matches the plate arrangement drawing. Grease tie bar threads. On the R55, grease the long twin screws. Using the wrench supplied, tighten the R55 twin screws as tightly as ONE MAN can get them. Insert tie bars. Have ONE MAN use the wrench supplied to tighten the tie bars in rotation as Closely as possible to the nominal dimensions on the plate arrangement drawing. Note that dimensions can vary + for each 100 plates. Always tighten units square and plumb. Plate dimensions measured at aan four corners of the heat exchanger frame should be equal, tao Never tighten or loosen a plate pack which contains liquid under pressure, Before operating the R55, back off twin screws. Complete final piping to the follower only after the tightening process has been finished. Since gaskets for the above series Paraflow are of the "O" ring type, there is no danger of over tightening. APV EQUIPMENT, IN->. 395 FILLMORE AVENUE TONAWANDA, NEW YORK 14150 (716) 692-3000 mrv ey wU Hx-\ No. 1080-304 THE PROPER CARE OF T-304 STAINLESS STEEL SURFACES OF APV PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER PLATES T-304 stainless steel is an excellent material for the processing of most food products since it is readily cleaned, sanitized and has good resistance to natural acids. The metal, however, may be subject to attack if it is not properly cared for when used to handle potentially corrosive liquids. The life of Paraflow stainless steel surfaces, there- fore, is very much dependent upon the product being processed, the duty performed, and the care given to the metal. Since every operation is different, there can be no broad guarantee against corrosion of the heat exchanger surface. To provide maximum protection for the stainless steel surfaces of your plate heat exchanger, we recommend that you contact a reputable manufacturer of chemical and cleaning sanitizing products who maintains a customer advisory service. Once they know the details of your operation, they should be able to recommend cleaning and sanitizing procedures. In general, we would caution against the following potential sources of attack on T-304 stainless steel surfaces: 1. Food products, such as vinegar, ketchup, table sauces, starch paste with vinegar and liquids containing salt, brine and liquids with high acid properties should not be processed in contact with T-304 stainless steel. 2. Water containing in excess of 50 ppm chloride ions. 3. Since chlorine can attack stainless steel, it should not be used on Paraflow stainless steel surfaces, 4. Sodium Hypochlorite. Precautions must be taken to minimize the possibility of corroding 304 stainless steel. The maximum concentration of available chloride should be less than 100 ppm at maximum 80°F. Wherever possible, maximum contact time should not exceed 15 minutes, and solutions must immediately be thoroughly rinsed after each use. 5. When cleaning with alkali compounds, such as caustic soda, carbonate of soda, sodium phosphate or sodium metasilicate, directions should be followed carefully. Concentrations should not exceed 3% by weight, and temperatures should not exceed 150°F, Further, many caustic cleaning compounds also contain chlorine and their use, particularly in heated solutions, should be with extreme caution. 6. Water scale may be removed by carefully using dilute nitric acid under 1%, or phosphoric acid under 5% at temperatures no higher than 140°F. These solutions must be free from salt, and must be thoroughly flushed from all stainless steel surfaces imm ediately after use with 1/4% caustic and a plain water flush. 7. Hydrochloric, Muriatic, Sulphuric Acid or Sulfamic Acid must never be used. Publication No, Z-UNIY Publication No. 2-UH19 PARAFLOW TYPE R86, SERIES 2 USER HANDBOOK Y + SUSSEX WLEY TELEX THE A.P.V. COMPANY LIM Telephone CRAWLEY 27777 : Te NOTE TO READERS AMENDMENTS 1. Any modifications to this publication will be dealt with by Amendment List (A.L.) action. Incorporation of an A.L. will be recorded on this Amendment Record Sheet in the Table below. 2. Indication of A.L. action having been effected is shown by a vertical line in the binding margin against text, illustrations, etc. which have been amended, together with the relevant A.L. No. shown at the foot of the page. The vertical lines and the No. reference remain unchanged in subsequent printings of the manual until a further revision is made on that page. AMENDMENT RECORD SHEET Incorporation of an amendment in this publication is to be recorded by signing in the appropriate column and inserting the date of making the amendment. Amended by Amended by Initial issue May 1981 Alteration to page 7 incorporated March 1982 A028D/02/22 2 CONTENTS @ ql INTRODUCTION and HEALTH & SAFETY AT WORK eee ees eee 5 LEADING PARTICULARS coe ABr eee aia rs! eee 7 SECTION 1 - DESCRIPTION eee eee eee eee 1l 1. General eee eee eee eee eee ial 2. Frame Construction eke! 8 eee wiete eee Ll 3. Heat Transfer Plates eleie arere eels ose 12 4. Plate Identification ei08 eee siete else 14 SECTION 2 - INSTALLATION eee eee aise eee 21 1. Preliminary Considerations eee siete eee 21 2. General eee eee eee Cite eee 21 3. Frame Erection ... efor! coe woke aera 22 4. Fitting Plates into Frame eee eee eee 22 5. Plate Pack Tightening ... cele eee eee 24 6. Pressure Testing eee eee alee eee 24 7. External Connections eee eee eee coe 26 SECTION 3 - OPERATIONAL NOTES ... eee eee eee 29 1. General cele fe ete sere eee eee 29 @ 2. Safety Precautions slots ale alee eee 29 3. Cleaning the Paraflow ... eee eee eee 29) SECTION 4 - MAINTENANCE eee eee coe eee 31 1. General eee alele 0 see ciel) a1 2. Preventive Maintenance ... aaire aire siers) 31 3. Fault Finding ... alets wee eee efels 85) e@ 4. Excessive Leakage eee eee eee qo 85) 5. Replacement of a Bearing in Follower Roller ... coe 35 6. Suppliers of Recommended Lubricants eee eee 35 SECTION 5 - ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST eee eee eee 37 Paraflow Type R86, Series 2, Frame Assembly oe eee 39 Port Flange Fittings eve eee eee eee 40 Plates and Gaskets eee ee eee isis 41 % A028D/02/22 a ILLUSTRATIONS Fig. Page 1. Principal Frame Dimensions ... eee siele eee 7 2. Typical R86, Series 2 Paraflow eles eee coe 10 3. Flow Plates for R86, Series 2 Paraflow eee eee LS) 4. Plate Reference Chart eee eee eee eee 16 5. R8 Gasket Types stele as} oon elle doo 17 6. Typical Flow Diagram aie) eee eee owe 18 7. Typical Multi-Pass Arrangements eee aisle sisi's 19 8. Frame Erection Procedure ... eee eee eee ZF 9. Assembly of Plates in Frame ... eee coe eee 28 10. Type R86, Series 2 Frame Assembly - Parts List ... eee 38 ASSOCIATED PUBLICATIONS Ref. Regasketing Paraflow Plates - Instruction Manual eee eee 2-IM1 A028D/02/22 4 PARAFLOW TYPE R86, SERIES 2 INTRODUCTION 1. This user handbook deals with the installation, operation and maintenance of the R86, Series 2 Paraflow plate heat exchanger and also includes a general specification, description and illustrated parts list. 2. Other documents which accompany the Paraflow unit and which are to be read in conjunction with this handbook are:- (a) PLATE TYPING PROGRAM (Plate Arrangement Drawing) A computer sheet detailing all items supplied on the unit, contract instructions, precise plate pack arrangement and _ performance parameters applicable to the unit supplied. (b) MACHINE ARRANGEMENT DRAWING A dimensional drawing showing the position and type of external connections supplied on the particular unit and with cross reference to the Plate Typing Program. (c) ASSOCIATED PUBLICATIONS Additional APV Publications, listed in the contents pages, are supplied with this handbook and are referred to in the appropriate sections of the text. HEALTH & SAFETY AT WORK 1. No current Codes of Practice are solely applicable to the operation of plate heat exchangers but, as this unit operates in process streams under pressure and temperature conditions, it is reasonable to apply related conditions of safe installation, operation and maintenance that would arise with pressure vessels. Therefore publications of a relevant nature should be studied carefully. 2. Paraflow limitations are influenced by factors such as the type of frame, tightening gear and heat exchanger plates and gaskets fitted. Exceeding the parameters laid down in the Plate Typing Program may cause leakage and careful consideration should be given to the hazards which may then occur. SPRAY SCREENS are available and, when supplied, must be fitted at all times the Paraflow is in operation. In addition to screens, drainage trays should be considered for Paraflows mounted on open staging in an overhead position. 3. The working pressure for the unit is given in the Plate Typing Program and should not be exceeded. Where the Paraflow is installed in a circuit that has the potential to produce excess pressures, it should be protected by means of relief valves, bursting discs or like devices. HANDBOOK ILLUSTRATIONS In general, illustrations relating to text matter appear at the end of each relevant section of the User Handbook. A028D/02/22 5 FARAPLUNW LifG NOV, JUNIO £ LEADING PARTICULARS A holes topped M20 x 35 mm 728 ——+4 deep, equispaced on 240 mm p.c.d. (FOR ADAPTOR 334 2 holes 32 dia. FLANGES) eee (FOR LIFTING FRAME) —__ 2 holes 40 dio. (FOR LIFTING FOLLOWER) END SUPPORT | 2173 O/ALL 8 holes topped M20 x 25 mm deep, i =e equi-spoced on 240 mm p.c.d. a A? O/ALL S _ (BS4504 - Table 10 or Din 2502 - 10 Bor) 6 HOLES 29 dia Note: Dimensions are in millimetres ‘Biers — am Fig. 1 Principal Frame Dimensions TABLE 1 - DIMENSIONS Dimensions are in millimetres Dimensions Frame C Platage Size A B Max. Min. 1 1596 1536 429 See Plate Typing 2 2196 2136 858 Program for Minimum 3 2796 2736 1267 Platage Dimension 4 3391 3331 1717 for the Machine Note: The Port Flange Fittings provided are suitable for BS4504, Table 10 or DIN 2502, 10 Bar. Special Adaptor Flanges are provided for use with ANSI Bl6.5, Class 150 or BS10, Table E flange connections. See Parts List at the end of this Handbook. A028D/03/23 7 (A-L-1) TABLE 2 - PLATE CAPACITIES Frame Minimum Maximum Size No. of Plates No. of Plates 1 3 105 2 4 210 3 3 310 4 3 420 l. PLATE DATA Heat Transfer Area of Plate: 0.73 m2 7.9 £t2 per plate Plate Size: 1736 x 545 mm 68.75 x 21.5 in Plate Liquid Capacity: 2.84 litres 0.625 Imp. gal. Compressed Platage: Plate Materials: Gasket Materials: 2. MACHINE PRESSURES The maximum operating pressure an Plate Typing Program supplied wit See Plate Typing Program for Nominal and Minimum Platage Dimensions. Available in a wide range of materials; refer to A.P.V. for full range. Available in a wide range of elastomers; see associated publication 2-IMl for full range available. d maximum test pressure are stated on the h the plate heat exchanger. 3. WEIGHTS Frame Size Without Plates With Max. Number of Stainless Steel Plates 1 1740 kg 2300 kg 2 1810 kg 2925 kg 3 1870 kg 3520 kg 4 1940 kg 4175 kg —i +1 Note: The above weights are for assembled frame with plain follower and without port fittin A028D/03/23 gs. PAKAFLOW TYPE R86, SERIES 2 Head Assembly Follower Assembly (Plain) Follower Assembly (Ported) End Support Assembly R8 Plate, Gasketed (average) Stainless Steel (0.6mm) Titanium (0. 6mm) Wt. of Water Capacity per Plate Top Bar Hanging Strip Bottom Bar A028D/03/23 Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Size Size Size Size Size Size Size Size Size Size Size Size FWNr Fwnre FwWnr 777.00 735.00 695.00 55.60 5.32 3.22 2.84 70.00 102.00 133.00 165.00 9.30 13.80 18.40 22.90 47.20 68.70 90.00 111.40 TARAPLU VW LIPO NOU, SLINILS & Fig. 2 Typical R86, Series 2, Paraflow Note: The Paraflow shown is fitted with flange connections for BS 4504, Table 10. 10 % PARAFLOW TYPE R86. SERIES 2 SECTION 1 - DESCRIPTION GENERAL (1) The Paraflow Type R86, Series 2, is a medium-sized plate heat exchanger which can be used for heating, cooling and heat-recovery duties with a wide range of industrial fluids using direct or closed-circuit cooling. It is suitable for medium process flows on single-pass or multi- pass operation. (2) The frame is floor-standing and is available in four different lengths (size 1 to size 4) to accommodate different quantities of heat exchange plates up to a maximum of 420. FRAME CONSTRUCTION (1) The Paraflow frame consists of the following main components manufactured in carbon steel (unless otherwise stated) and, where appropriate, finished in a chemical-resistant paint:- (a) A floor-standing vertical head with four ports and a lifting lug at the top. (b) A floor-standing end support with a lifting lug at the top. (c) A horizontal top bar which connects the head and end support by bolts at each end. The heat transfer plates are suspended from a hanging strip screwed to the underside of the top bar. (d) The bottom bar braces the frame at the bottom where it is screwed to the head and end support at each end. It also acts as a guide for the plates and follower. (e) A follower, free to move along the top bar by a roller and spindle suspension. It can be either unported or ported with the same flange connections as on the head. Its function is to compress the pack of plates towards the head by means of: (f) Eight high-tensile steel tie-bars, threaded 1%in - UN8 which are slotted into the edges of the head and follower. The fixed end of each locates in the head and a H.T.S. hexagonal nut is tightened against an aluminium bronze bearing washer and a locating washer to draw the follower towards the head. The tie- bars are available in four different lengths to suit the different frame sizes. (2) The four ports in the head and in a ported follower are each fitted with either blanks or flanged connections according to the flow diagram arrangement. The periphery of each port is drilled and tapped to suit BS.4504, Table 10 or DIN2502, 10 Bar flanges and is fitted with studs and nuts. A second set of tapped holes around each port will accept adaptor flanges which are bolted hard against the outside face of the head or follower. The adaptor flanges are ASA150 or BS.10, Table E as standard and, as above, are supplied complete with studs and nuts. The port openings are fitted with liners in various materials, fully welded in position, which simulate the raised face condition. Where adaptor flanges are fitted the liners extend right through each port and flange to simulate the raised face flange condition. All liquid connections are 150mm (6in) bore. A028D/04/24 11 3. HEAT TRANSFER PLATES (1) The heat transfer plates used on the R86, Series 2 Paraflow are designated R8 plates and are sub-divided into two main types - R8/52 and R8/00. The heat-transfer surfaces of the plate are pressed into a ribbed pattern of shallow corrugations. The R8/52 plate has its corrugations arranged in a 'W' or double-chevron pattern, with each chevron side at an angle of 52° to the horizontal, while the R8/00 plate has its corrugations arranged horizontally across the plate. Both types of plate are illustrated in Fig. 3. (2) An identical hanging eye is pressed out at each end of the plate which permits assembly into the plate pack either way up providing a left- hand or a right-hand plate, as required. The hanging eye at the top suspends the plate from the hanging strip on the top bar of the Paraflow frame whilst the hanging eye at the bottom locates the plate on the bottom bar. (3) Each plate has four flow-port positions, one at each corner. The ports can be either blanked out (the port is open to allow the fluid to pass through) or unblanked (the port is closed preventing passage of fluid). Any combination of blanked and unblanked ports is possible, as shown in Fig. 4, to suit the flow requirements of the particular process involved. (4) The fluid is contained within the plate area by an elastomer gasket which is cemented into a narrow groove around the periphery on the face of each plate as can be seen in Fig. 3. This enables the plate to seal against the back of the adjacent plate in the pack or, in the case of an end plate, to seal against the face of the follower. (5) The ‘through ports' in the flow plate are completely enclosed by the encircling gasket and adjacent 'bridge' piece to provide a double seal between the through port and the flow port. Between the seals, leakage grooves vent the interspace to atmosphere adjacent to each through port. This is so that, in the rare event of leakage, there is a visual indication and an escape path for the pressurised fluid which prevents intermixing of the process and service fluids. (6) Flow Plate - R8/52 or R8/00 (a) Flow plates represent the bulk of the plates used in the machine for heat exchange between process and service fluids. When assembled in the plate pack the flow plates are arranged in alternate left-hand and right-hand positions so as to provide two independent flow passages (for primary and secondary fluids) through the complete pack as shown in Fig. 6 Typical Flow Diagram. This follows automatically due to the complementary sealing pattern of the gaskets on left-hand as against right-hand plates when they are tightened together. (b) A flow-plate gasket is open across two flow ports, vertically above each other, and closed across the other two ports. Provided both open ports have been blanked out, the fluid passes from the entry port and flows vertically (up or down, as appropriate) across the plate surface to the exit port on the same side of the plate. This is known as vertical flow and permits each plate to be used as either a left-hand or a right-hand plate, according to which way up it is assembled (see Fig. 4, Plate Reference Chart). A028D/04/24 12 % PARAFLOW TYPE R86, SERIES 2 (7) (8) (c) Flow plates are available in either R8/52 or _ R8/00 configurations. R8/52 plates can be positioned next to each other but R8/00 plates can only be positioned alternately between R8/52 plates and must not be placed next to each other. The R8/00 plates are used with the R8/52 plates when performance trimming is required and a mix of from 50% to only one R8/00 plate may be encountered in a plate pack depending on the degree of performance trimming required. End Plate - R8/52 (a) An end plate is assembled in the plate pack, immediately following the last plate in the pack and adjacent to the follower, with the gasket towards the follower. The end-plate gasket has port sections which enclose all four plate ports (as shown in Fig. 5). If the ports are blanked out they serve as ‘through ports" only. (b) Where the follower has open ports the corresponding port areas of the end plate are blanked out; if the follower is plain or has certain ports on the _ follower closed by port blanks, the corresponding port areas on the end plate are unblanked. Fig. 6 shows a multi-pass flow diagram with ported follower fitted with port blanks. End plates are available only in the R8/52 configuration. Multi-Pass Arrangement (a) Where applications require more than one pass of plates in the same Paraflow, a multi-pass arrangement, comprising a specialised set of plates, fitted with support discs to reinforce unblanked ports against fluid pressure, is installed at the point where it is required to alter fluid flow and hence separate one pass from another. (b) A set of reinforced plates is necessary as no single plate can carry all the support discs necessary. Diagram A, in Fig. 7 illustrates this point and shows a possible multi-pass arrangement for stainless-steel flow plates. This is achieved by welding support discs to the unblanked ports of flow plates (also end plates in the case of titanium). An arrangement for titanium plates requires a greater number of support discs than for stainless steel and diagram B, Fig. 7, illustrates this. In each case, the support discs are shown loose, for clarity. A support disc is required between two unblanked ports for stainless-steel plates but with titanium plates, because of the different metallic properties, three discs between four unblanked ports are necessary to give the equivalent strength of stainless steel. In all cases, the support discs are fixed to the backs of the plates (the ungasketed side). (c) Draining and venting between passes is arranged by drilling holes in the unblanked ports (see diagram C, Fig. 7). However, when it is not acceptable for liquid to percolate through the vent/drain holes and be trapped in the interspace behind closed ports, the alternative arrangement shown in diagram D should be used in preference. This is particularly applicable when corrosive fluids are passing through the Paraflow. A028D/04/24 13 4e FLALD LUBNLLPrLUALLUN (1) Left-Hand Plate has the open flow ports on the left-hand side of the e plate, when looking at the gasketed face. The two ports closed by the gasket are on the right-hand side. The plate orientation indicating 'dimples' in each edge of the plate are ABOVE the plate centre, the R8/52 plate having a single 'dimple' and the R8/00 plate having double 'dimples'. (2) Right-Hand Plate has the open flow ports on the right-hand side of the plate, when looking at the gasketed face. The two ports closed by the gasket are on the left-hand side. The plate orientation indicating 'dimples' in each edge of the plate are BELOW the plate centre, the R8/52 plate having a single 'dimple' and the R8/00 plate having double 'dimples'. (3) Plate Orientation 'dimples' provide a ready indication, when looking along the side of an assembled plate pack, as to which are right-hand and left-hand plates by checking that the 'dimples' are below or above the plate centres, respectively. (4) Plate References which are stamped adjacent to the hanging eye at the top of the plate correspond with those shown on Fig. 4, Plate Reference Chart, and also the Plate Typing Program supplied with the machine. Note: If the plate material is 304 stainless steel, this will also be stamped close to’ the hanging eye at the top. Stainless Steel 316S16 plates are not stamped in this manner, in order to differentiate. Material other than Stainless Steel 316S16 will be identified by a code stamped close to the plate hanging eye. Reference to this code will enable APV to determine material, material certificates, year of manufacture, etc. e@ A028D/04/24 14 R8/52 Flow Plate R8/00 Flow Plate Fig. 3 Flow Plates for R86 Series 2 Paraflow 15 er | RAC iil \e 8) A y \O 8 oa oa 0 he es) les) Keo) KLCB a rs Ps yKepe \ktoo Se) os) lox) os) led Right-Hand End Plates eve Ee) ee * These are not used for plates with support discs. Plates represented with gasket uppermost Blanked (Hole) = O Unblanked (No Hole) = @ Note: Because of the dual nature of each plate the number of flow plate variants is double the number of plates actually made. For example, a left-hand flow plate coded 'LAB' becomes a right-hand flow plate coded 'RAC' simply by inverting the plate. Fig. 4 Plate Reference Chart 16 PORT RING PORT RING” R.H. FLOWPLATE GASKET (in 3 pieces) INVERT FOR L.H. FLOWPLATE Fig. 5 PORT RING PORT RING MAIN x SECTION % A x —* MAIN * SECTION * B' : ie PORT PORT RING x RING END PLATE GASKET (in 6 pieces) °K Points where ends of gaskets meet but are not joined R8 Gasket Types 17 8l ONE PASS OF ONE PASS OF END PLATE FLOW PLATES FLOW PLATES PRIMARY OUT LIQUID IN >— r - . X -}——— bp SECONDARY SECONDAR’ LIQUID IN LIQUID OU FOLLOWER HEAD @ CLOSED PORT GASKETS FACE FOLLOWER O OPEN PORT Fig. 6 Typical Flow Diagram (Stainless Steel Plates) QFOLLOWER Diagram A - Stainless Steel SUPPORT DISCS HEAD() AYA RT | ' v | SOF NS) Lac RAA LAA VENT/ORAIN HOLE IN S.S. VENT/DRAIN HOLE IN Ti VENT/ORAIN BUSH IN S.S Diagram C - Diagram D - Drain and Vent - Industrial Drain and Vent - Alternative a Fig. 7 Typical Multi-Pass Arrangements 19 % PARAFLOW TYPE R86, SERIES 2 SECTION 2 - INSTALLATION PRELIMINARY CONSIDERATIONS (1) As previously stated in the 'Safety at Work' notes on_ the Introduction page in this handbook, protective devices must be included in the installation to safeguard the Paraflow from pressures in excess of the maximum working pressure given on the Plate Typing Program. These excess pressures can be caused by a homogeniser, centrifugal pump or any other kind of positive pump; also when mains services provide varying pressures according to the number of take-off points in use. Note that separators have pumping characteristics similar to centrifugal pumps. (2) If a steam main is connected to the Paraflow (for steam-curing after re-gasketing) it must be hard connected to the inlet port with the outlet directed to the floor. For a suitable installation, see publication 2-IM1. (3) When the Paraflow is used to process corrosive or high-temperature fluids, or has a steam main connected to it, the plate pack should be enclosed by spray screens obtainable from The A.P.V. Company Ltd. If spray screens have not been supplied ensure that, when high-temperature services are connected to the heat exchanger for the curing process after re-gasketing, a temporary cover of wet sacking or canvas is placed over the entire plate pack to protect personnel in the event of sudden gasket failure before the adhesive has fully cured. GENERAL (1) Normal practice is for the complete heat exchanger to be despatched with plates assembled in the frame ready for installation. In this case, the Paraflow can be bolted to the site floor and connected up to process and service pipework. (2) Should the heat exchanger be despatched un-assembled, however, and in the absence of APV erection personnel to assemble and connect-up the Paraflow, the following recommended sequence of steps is set out as a guide. (3) Prepare the site and arrange for lifting gear, capable of lifting the individual members involved, to be available (see component weights under LEADING PARTICULARS). Site preparation involves making a suitable level foundation capable of withstanding the full weight of the machine, bearing in mind the maximum liquid content at any time (again, refer to LEADING PARTICULARS). Note: The foundation must be level for the installation as there are no levelling facilities in the base of the frame. Floor loadings can be calculated by the reaction method from the weights and dimensions given in LEADING PARTICULARS, or by reference to The A.P.V. Company Ltd. A028D/05/25 21 Note: bolts of suitable length and diameter into the floor, spaced to suit the 29 mm diameter fixing holes in the feet of the Paraflow (see Fig. 1). Adequate space must be available on either side of the Paraflow to allow access for fitting the heat exchange plates, tightening the plate pack and servicing, etc. This should extend to at least 2.5 metres (8% feet) from the centre line of the heat exchanger frame. Once the foundation is prepared, proceed with frame erection, referring to Fig. 8 for Frame Erection Procedure and to Fig. 10 for component references. FRAME ERECTION (1) Raise and support the head in a vertical position. Secure the feet of the head on to the foundation bolts with appropriate nuts and washers. (2) Attach the bottom bar (11) to the head with bolt (8) and washer (9) and support the bar in the level position by bolstering underneath. (3) Lift the follower by the two 40 mm diameter lifting holes at the top and maintain in a vertical position over the bottom bar, bolstering it up from underneath sufficiently to allow the follower roller (14) to be fitted easily when the top bar is in position. (4) Lift the top bar (4) using slings, and attach it to the head using the two remaining bolts (8) and washers (9). It is then only necessary to support the free end with a sling. (5) Bring up the end support and attach it to the free ends of the top and bottom bars using setscrews (10) and washers (9). Secure the foot of the end support to the foundation bolts with appropriate nuts and washers. Check with a spirit level that the frame is level both laterally and longitudinally, then tighten fully all the fixing screws and bolts. Fit the follower roller components (itemised in Inset 'A', Fig. 10) into position in the yoke of the follower, above the top bar, and secure in position with the two circlips (18). (6) Remove the bolstering from underneath the bottom bar and follower, allowing the follower to hang free, via the follower roller, from the top bar. The Paraflow is now ready to accommodate the platage and tie-bars. FITTING PLATES INTO FRAME (1) Roll the follower right back along the top bar to the end support, then lubricate the two edges (left- and right-hand) of the plate hanging strip with a thin film of graphite grease; this prepares the surfaces for contact with the hanging eye of each plate so that it will slide along easily. (2) Fig. 9 illustrates the recommended method of attaching the plates to the top bar plate hanging strip and fitting them, one by one, into the frame. It is essential that the plates are assembled into the frame in accordance with the plate arrangement drawing (Plate Typing Program) supplied with the Paraflow. Ensure that the gasket surface is clean and undamaged before fitting each plate. A028D/05/25 22 e PARAFLOW TYPE R86, SERIES 2 (3) Study the plate arrangement drawing and, taking each plate in turn attach it to the plate hanging strip as shown in Fig. 9. Hold the plate with the hanging eye cut-out at the top and the blanked-out ports in their correct positions with the plate gasket facing towards the follower. Refer to Fig. 4, Plate Reference Chart, for positions of ports. (4) Angle the plate edgewise from the vertical in the position shown in Fig. 9 (1). Hook the nearest plate hanging eye shoulder over the nearside edge of the plate hanging profile on the top carrying bar. (5) Tilt the lower edge of the plate away from the head or the follower (as appropriate) at an angle sufficient to completely clear the bottom bar and then swing the plate back across the bottom bar, at the same time pushing slightly upwards against the underside of the top bar, Fig. 9, (2) and (3). This enables the hanging eye on the other shoulder to hook on to the opposite side of the top bar. (6) Lower the bottom edge of the plate down towards the head, locating the bottom cut-out in the plate over the bottom bar of the frame, Fig. 9 (4). (7) Allow the plate to hang vertically from the plate hanging profile, Fig. 9 (5) and push the plate towards the head to allow the next plate to be fitted. Check plate against head for squareness and matching of ports. Any plate badly mis-aligned through distortion should be renewed. (8) Take care to arrange the mix of R8/52 and R8/00 plates in the correct sequence and the multi-pass arrangement of plates with support discs in the correct position, where this is applicable. The last plate to be fitted is the end plate. This is an R8/52 plate and has a special gasket enclosing all four port positions. The gasket faces towards the follower. (9) When all plates have been assembled in the frame, run through the pack again to ensure that all plates are in the correct sequence, specified on the plate arrangement drawing, and are facing in the correct direction. The plate orientation 'dimples' in the plate edges indicate which are right-hand and left-hand plates by being below or above the plate centres, respectively. Single 'dimples' indicate an R8/52 plate and double 'dimples' indicate an R8/00 plate. With the pack correctly assembled, the '‘'dimples' should alternate above and below the plate centres, when looking along the side of the pack, to show that two left- hand or two right-hand plates have not been assembled next to each other. (10) With all the plates correctly assembled in the frame, move the follower up to meet the last plate in the pack and compress the plate pack as far as possible by exerting pressure by hand. (11) Remove the plastic protective sleeves (23, Fig. 10) and end caps (24) from the ends of the tie-bars and retain for subsequent re-use. Clean off the protective waterproof grease from the threaded portion of each tie- bar. A028D/05/25 23 NES) settee SSS SaaS QSS7 SS SSS SSS ee SBS nag 6 RR ee of each tie-bar into its location slot in the head. Lubricate the tie-bar washers and nuts (20, 21 and 22) with Rocol A.S.P. and the threads of the tie-bars for as far as the nuts are likely to travel (allowing for compression of plate pack). Screw the tie-bar nuts, with their washers, up to the follower by hand ensuring that the lugs on the tie-bar heads remain located in their slots whilst doing so. (13) Apply the ratchet spanner provided to the tie-bar nuts, lightly tightening each in turn, ensuring that the tie-bar locating lugs draw into their slots in the head, whilst doing so, with the flange faces hard against the head. PLATE PACK TIGHTENING The plate pack should now be tightened in accordance with the following procedure using the ratchet spanner provided or a torque multiplier (powered spanner) obtainable as an accessory. Care should be taken not to tighten beyond the nominal platage dimension (see Plate Typing Program) before checking for leakage. It is essential to ensure that the internal pressure of the plate pack is at atmospheric before tightening commences. (1) Tighten each tie-bar gradually by an equal amount starting with the four centre bars first and then moving outwards to the top and bottom pairs of tie-bars by diagonal opposites, i.e. using a ‘cylinder head' tightening sequence to keep the head and follower parallel. Check by making frequent measurements at the top and bottom of the plate pack. (2) Continue tightening by equal amounts until the nominal platage dimension, given on the Plate Typing Program, is reached. At this stage, the gaskets are all fully compressed, the plates are in firm metal-to- metal contact and the correct flow gaps are achieved. This is essential for maximum heat-transfer efficiency and long life of plates and gaskets. PRESSURE TESTING It is more convenient to pressure test the plate pack using an independent test pressure supply rather than connecting to the main process and service pipelines, particularly where a large installation is involved. It will be necessary to fit special test blanks to the ports filling the plate pack from the bottom ports and venting at the top ports. Unused ports must be blanked off and drain valves fitted at the lowest point of the inlet line. The pressure supply line should incorporate a pressure relief valve, set to the maximum test pressure required, and a pressure gauge. (1) Interconnect and fill both sides of the plate pack using a low pressure supply (not more than 1 bar pressure), Close the top vents and slowly increase the supply pressure, at a rate not greater than 4 bar/min, until the test pressure, stated on the Plate Typing Program, is reached. This should be maintained for a minimum period of 15 minutes while the plate pack is monitored for leakage. A028D/05/25 24 % PARAFLOW TYPE R86, SERIES 2 (2) If this occurs, do not tighten the plate pack further at this stage. Mark the location on the plate pack, reduce the internal pressure slowly to atmospheric and drain both sides of the plate pack. (3) Disconnect any supply line connections from the follower, open the plate pack and remove the plates in the affected area. Examine the plates and gaskets. The most likely trouble is dirt or small extraneous items across the gasket faces. If completely clean, examine the gaskets for non-adhesion to plates in places, for splits or pitting or other damage. Damaged gaskets can be renewed by re-gasketing the existing plates but plates which have been distorted or suffered other damage must be renewed; they are not repairable. After rectifying the trouble and replacing the plates correctly, close the plate pack, re-make the connections to the follower and re-tighten as before. Re-test as specified in 6.(1). (4) If leakage still occurs, further tightening can be undertaken to effect a seal. Tighten the plate pack, as in sub-section 5, by one fifth of the difference between the nominal and minimum platage dimensions stated on the Plate Typing Program. Again re-test. (5) This process can continue, tightening by one fifth increments of the difference between nominal and minimum platage dimensions and testing after each incremental tightening until a seal is obtained. On no account must the plate pack be compressed to below the minimum platage dimension. (6) Should leakage still occur when at minimum platage dimension, do not attempt further tightening. The correct procedure is to mark the area of leakage on the side of the plate pack, open the pack and remove the plates in the affected area. Examine the gaskets and plates. Ensure that no dirt has got on to the gasket faces when the pack was closed and re- tightened in 6.(3). If the gaskets and plates are perfectly clean and free from damage, the only likely cause is reduced thickness gaskets probably due to constant compression in service. Carry out re-gasketing as necessary (see Publication 2-IMl, Regasketing Paraflow Plates). (7) Re-assemble the plate pack and re-tighten as before to the nominal platage dimension. Pressure test again and a seal should be obtained without further tightening. Drain the heat exchanger plate pack and remove the test connections. (8) A good method of providing a ready visual check for future reference is to paint a thick diagonal line on to the plate edges across the complete pack from head to follower. If this is done ON ONE SIDE OF THE MACHINE ONLY, an immediate visual check is provided to indicate any of the following discrepancies :- (a) One or more plates out of sequence. (b) A plate inserted the wrong way round. (c) Replacement plates inserted in the pack and not yet marked. (d) Missing or extra plates. (9) Clean off the Rocol A.S.P. from the tie-bar threads and replace it by Mobiltac 81 waterproof grease. Fit the protective tube and end cap (items 23 and 24, Fig. 10) to the end of each tie-bar. A028D/5/25 25 When the Paraflow is supplied as part of an APV engineered scheme, drawings of the external pipework connections will be available. If it is supplied as an individual unit it should be connected into the user's own installation, bearing in mind the following points: (1) To enable external pipework connections to be made to the follower, pipeline flexibility must be provided. This compensates for thermal expansion and contraction of the plate pack and tie-bars, under operating conditions, particularly in a large frame containing maximum platage. The same pipeline flexibility should be provided in pipeline connections to any connector grids. Adequate support must be provided for pipework to the Paraflow to avoid loading on the heat exchanger ports. (2) If re-gasketing of plates is to be carried out on site, where a steam main is provided for gasket curing it should be installed in accordance with Section 2, 1.(2). A028D/5/25 26 Support HEAD BOTTOM BAR 1 2 Support Support ae TOP BAR FOLLOWER Fit roller assembly FRAME ASSEMBLED END SUPPORT 5 6. za y S Fig. 8 Frame Erection Procedure 27 PUSH UP. _ o TOP BAR @ HEAD FOLLOWER PLATE HANGING STRIP GASKET SIDE OF PLATE TILT = SIDE VIEW KEEP ON oe LOCATE THIS SIDE LOWER AND ALLOW PLATE TO HANG LOCATE OVER 4) BOTTOM BAR 5) Fig. 9 Assembly of Plates in Frame 28 PARAFLOW TYPE R86, SERIES 2 SECTION 3 - OPERATIONAL NOTES 1. GENERAL (1) The procedure for starting up the heat exchanger will depend upon the installation in which it is used, but will be similar for all conditions provided that the process and service liquids are within the duty temperature ranges for which the equipment is designed (see information on Plate Typing Program supplied with the machine). (2) Assuming that the heat exchanger has been correctly installed, that pipelines have been connected and that the installation has been checked and all associated plant components are in a ready-to-use state, it is recommended that the following final checks are made: Plate Pack Visually check for completeness, correct assembly and any signs of leakage. Pipe Connections Check for secureness. (3) Under normal running conditions, the heat exchanger will continue to perform its specified function until such time as the plates need cleaning or require re-gasketing. (4) In some applications, deposit upon the plate surfaces will cause fouling which will be indicated by diminished heat exchanger performance. (5) Re-gasketing will be necessary when the plate gaskets are already at minimum plate pitch and have aged and become worn; indication will be given by leakage. 2. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (1) If the heat exchanger has been supplied with protective screens, these should be fitted at all times while the machine is in use. Tf protective screens have not been supplied ensure that, when high pressure steam is connected to the heat exchanger for curing the adhesive after re- gasketing, temporary screens or other protective devices are provided to protect personnel in the event of sudden gasket failure. (2) The maximum working pressure of the machine and the maximum flow rates must not be exceeded. These details are given on the Plate Typing Program. Ensure that no undue pressure fluctuations occur in primary or secondary fluid lines following start-up. This can occur if the pumps are switched into the system too rapidly or valves are slammed open. All pressure changes in the system should be carried out gradually and never at a rate greater than 4 bar per minute. 3. CLEANING THE PARAFLOW (1) The presence of water hardness salts in the heat exchanger can reduce the overall heat-transfer efficiency of the heat-exchanger plates over a period of time. Mineral scale can be precipitated out during the thermal processes and accumulate on the surfaces of the heat exchanger plates, providing an excellent key for other soil depositions, thus resulting in diminished heat-exchanger performance. A028D/06/226 29 (4) 100 a@ solteneag water supply 15 NUL avallavie, LUE leal~tLausier efficiency may be maintained by periodic circulation through the system of a suitable chemical agent. (3) Unnecessary plate damage can be caused by the incorrect or indiscriminate use of cleaning agents, coolants and waters containing high levels of chloride salts. If in doubt on the suitability of a product for a particular application, advice should be obtained from The A.P.V. Company Limited, or their local appointed agent. A028D/06/26 30 % PARAFLOW TYPE R86, SERIES 2 SECTION 4 - MAINTENANCE GENERAL (1) Maintenance for a Paraflow heat exchanger can be divided into two distinct categories, viz: (a) Preventive maintenance carried out on a routine basis to a planned schedule. (b) Repairs of a specific nature and general overhaul, carried out as a result of failure or impaired performance. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE* (1) The preventive maintenance scheme for this heat exchanger refers to those items which are likely to fail or deteriorate over a period of time when the assembly is used within the limitations of its design rating. (2) Preventive maintenance, involving as it does regular checks of various points on the machine, can help reduce the extent and cost of subsequent shut-downs. Attention should be given to checking for corrosion on the painted steel components, cleaning and repainting where necessary, also to checking tightness of tie-bars and floor-fixing bolts. The threads on the tie-bars should be kept coated with Mobiltac 81 or similar grease at all times. (3) As the heat exchanger may be used on widely differing products, processes and running times, it is not possible to give a specific time scale to the various maintenance operations. They are, however, sub- divided on a relative basis into short, medium and long periods of operation and it will be necessary for the person implementing this scheme to establish a time scale to suit the operating conditions. (4) The ‘spares requirements' shown are based on a 24-hour day duty with continuous running for up to 1 year. (5) Where a number of identical heat exchangers are installed at the same location it will not be necessary to carry complete sets of spares for the total number of heat exchangers. (6) It is important to remember that the majority of the items recommended to be carried as spares are rubber, or synthetic rubber and are prone to deterioration when stored. Care should be taken not to expose rubber components to extremes of temperatures, sun or strong light, outdoor air or atmospheres containing ozone or corrosive gases (e.g. chlorine). *Note Further information and advice on Preventive Maintenance is available from The A.P.V. Company Service Department. A028D/07/27 31 ce PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Description Preventive Maintenance Intervals Between Checks Spares Requirement of Item Short Medium Long For one For two year years Head = Repaint if necessary Repaint all over = 7 Follower = Repaint if necessary Repaint all over = = End Support - 7 Repaint all over - - Top Bar Clean plate hanging = Check tightness of fixing = - strip and lubricate screws attaching the Plate with a thin coat of Hanging Strip and of Top Graphite Grease Bar fixing bolts Bottom Bar = - Check tightness of fixing 7 - bolts Follower Roller - Periodically apply Dismantle, clean-out and - - grease gun to roller repack with 'Mobilux 2' using 'Mobilux 2' or or similar grease. similar grease Tie-Bars Coat all threads with - - - - "Mobiltac 81' grease (or similar) Plate Pack = Check for damaged plate - - - edges or gasket extrusion. (See NOTE (A) (i) and (ii)). Port Rings - Check for collapsed - 1 set 2 sets peaks, splits or | hardening Plates & Gaskets See Notes A and B - - Also, see separate APV Publication, Ref. 2-IMl (Regasketing) ® PARAFLOW TYPE R86, SERIES 2 NOTES (A) Inspection and checking for damaged plates and gasket extrusion should be carried out periodically as follows: (i) Inspect the plate pack for bent or deformed plate edges or damaged hanging eyes. Minor damage may be disregarded, but major damage causing excessive leakage necessitates plate and gasket replacement. (ii) Check for gasket extrusion. If apparent, this is indicative of a damaged plate or failed gasket adhesion, which can be caused when plate dimension is below the permissible minimum or if the machine has been subjected to internal pressures above the specified maximum working pressure. If the plate is undamaged, it should be regasketed. (B) Any scale or deposition on the plates must be removed with an approved cleaning agent, either by total immersion or by application with a bristle- or plastic-type brush. DO NOT use steel wool, wire brushes or abrasives of any kind; severe corrosion will result. Severe corrosion or perforation of the plate surface necessitates the fitment of replacement plates complete with gaskets. PARAFLOW PLATES ARE NOT REPAIRABLE. Note: Advice as to suitable cleaning methods, for various applications, can be obtained from The A.P.V Company Limited. In certain cases, the trade names and suppliers of suitable proprietary cleaning agents can be provided, together with instructions for use. Bie FAULT FINDING CAUTION: Before attempting to open the heat exchanger plate pack, prior to removing the plates, ensure that: (1) The machine has cooled to room temperature (cold water may be circulated to accelerate this process) to avoid weakening gasket adhesion when separating the plates. (2) Supplies of primary and secondary process fluids to the machine are vented and fully drained. Procedure to Open Plate Pack (1) Disconnect and remove pipework connections on the follower. (2) Remove the protective plastic tubes and caps from the ends of the tie-bars. Remove the waterproof grease from the tie-bar threads (from the follower to the ends of the tie-bars) and re-apply Rocol A.S.P. lubricant in its place. (This is because the Mobiltac 81 is for anti-corrosion protection only and does not have the high-pressure lubrication properties required on the screw threads when tightening or slackening off the tie- bars). A028D/09/29 33 each tie-bar nut at the follower end by an equal amount, starting with the four centre bars first and working outwards to the top and bottom pairs of tie-bars by diagonal opposites, keeping the follower as parallel with the head as possible. completely undone. (4) (5) Continue this procedure until all the tie-bars are Lift away each tie-bar assembly, complete, from the frame disengaging the locating lugs from the head whilst doing so. Roll the follower back to the end support and separate the plate pack taking care not to damage the plate edges in any way. (6) The plates may be removed by a reversal of the procedure outlined in SECTION 2 - INSTALLATION, Sub-Section 4. Take care to avoid damage to the plate hanging eyes and ensure that the correct position in the plate pack is noted for every plate removed. FAULT DIAGNOSIS CHART FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY Plate pack leakage a Incorrect plate arrangement Plate pack requires tightening Worn, faulty or distorted gasket(s) Foreign bodies on gasket faces Working pressure exceeded Check plate arrangement Check platage dimension and re-tighten, if necessary. See Section 2.6, also Plate Typing Program. Renew Clean gasket faces Adjust working pressure Leakage at flow ports Faulty joint rings Loose nut(s) Renew Tighten all nuts evenly Fluctuating outlet temperature in primary liquid line Perforated plate(s) allowing intermixing of liquids Variations in secondary liquid throughput Renew plate(s) Stabilise throughput = Low outlet pressure in primary liquid line Internal leakage or intermixing of primary and secondary liquids Scaling or deposition on plates Blockage in plate pack or inlet line Perforated plate surface allowing intermixing of liquids Clean plate surfaces Check and clean as necessary Renew plate(s) L A028D/09/29 34 PARAFLOW TYPE R86, SERIES 2 4. EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE (1) Any leakage from the heat exchanger should be investigated as to the cause; the Paraflow should not leak in service. Excessive leakage should be investigated immediately and rectified as soon as possible, by following the procedures specified: in Section 2.5 and 2.6. REPLACEMENT OF A BEARING IN FOLLOWER ROLLER (Refer to Parts List and Fig. 10). If it is ever necessary to replace a worn or damaged bearing in the follower roller assembly, this is best done when the Paraflow frame is opened for plate inspection and/or cleaning, since the follower must be released from the plate pack, supported vertically and raised to take the weight, approximately 700 kg, off the roller before the roller can be disassembled and the damaged bearing(s) removed. Roller bearing replacement is as follows: (1) Having raised the follower to take its weight off the roller, decide whether one or both of the roller bearings requires attention. If the trouble is due to atmospheric corrosion or dirt causing jamming or sticking, the complete roller assembly should be removed and taken to a work bench, (2) Remove the circlips (20) and extract the roller spindle (15). (3) It will be necessary to improvise a means of extracting the ball- race(s),as no special tools are provided for this purpose. (4) Pack replacement bearings and the roller bore with 'Mobilux 2' or similar grease, then tap the replacement bearings into the bore of the roller. (5) Refit the roller spindle to the follower yoke through the roller then secure the spindle with the circlips, as before. SUPPLIERS OF RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS (1) Rocol A.S.P. Lubricant, supplied by:- Rocol Limited Head Office - Rocol House, Swillington, Leeds LS26 8BS. (2) Mobiltac 81 - waterproof grease Mobilux 2 - grease supplied by:- Mobil Oil Company Limited Head Office - Mobil House, 54, Victoria Street, London, S.W.1. A028D/09/29 35 % PARAFLOW TYPE R86, SERIES 2 Notes: (Gi) (2) A028D/10/30 SECTION 5 ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST The use of Plate Gaskets or other replacement parts from unapproved suppliers can result in costly damage to this plate heat exchanger. Only replacement parts of A.P.V. manufacture or from A.P.V. approved suppliers should be installed in this Paraflow. All dimensions quoted in this Parts List are in millimetres except where otherwise stated. 37 18 aris | - bay 15 ! Inset ‘A im HEAD FOLLOWER HEAD yor 32 33 34 | 37 Follower LDS PN eeesceny TAIT Heels i <7 id « | 25 26 27 - <> 6-D Y il 30 36 Inset 'B’ Inset 'C’ Fig. 10 Type R86, Series 2, Frame Assembly - Parts List 38 % PARAFLOW TYPE R86, SERIES 2 T T Fig. Description No Code No. Item Off = =. Fig.10 PARAFLOW TYPE R86, SERIES 2, FRAME ASSEMBLY 1 = Frame Size 1 - Ported Follower = 248766 Frame Size 1 - Plain Follower - 248767 Frame Size 2 - Ported Follower = 248768 Frame Size 2 - Plain Follower = 248769 Frame Size 3 - Ported Follower - 248770 Frame Size 3 - Plain Follower 7 248771 Frame Size 4 - Ported Follower = 248772 Frame Size 4 - Plain Follower - 248773 1 Head Assembly (welded) 1 231705 2 Nameplate 1 457840 3 Mills Pin, 0.125 in dia. x 0.375 in long 4 437780 4 Top Bar Assembly 1 = Frame Size 1 - 223960 Frame Size 2 - 223961 Frame Size 3 - 223962 Frame Size 4 = 223963 5 Hanging Strip 1 7 Frame Size 1 = 356211 Frame Size 2 a 356212 Frame Size 3 oe 356213 Frame Size 4 7 356214 6 Washer, M12 = 460314 Frame Size 1 8 = Frame Size 2 12 7 Frame Size 3 16 7 Frame Size 4 20 - 7 Screw, Hex. Hd., M12 x 40 long - 460040 Frame Size 1 8 a Frame Size 2 12 7 Frame Size 3 16 = Frame Size 4 20 = 8 Bolt, Hex. Hd., M24-3.0-6G x 100 long, H.T.S. 3 460197 9 Washer, M24 6 460313 10 Set screw, Hex. Hd., M24-3.0-6G x 45 long, H.T.S. 3 460071 ll Bottom Bar 1 - Frame Size 1 = 304063 Frame Size 2 = 304064 Frame Size 3 - 304065 Frame Size 4 = 304066 12 End Support Assembly 1 232567 13 Follower Assembly (Ported) 1 213881 Follower Assembly (Plain) 1 213882 Inset'A' 14 Follower Roller 1 345262 15 Roller Spindle 1 350033 16 Ballrace, 52 mm o.d. x 25 mm i.d. x 15 mm wide 2 401000 17 Roller Spacer 2 347671 |i Circlip, 1 in External 2 405803 a) A028D/11/31 39 Fig. Description No Code No. Item Off Fig.10 19 Tie-Bar Assembly 8 - Size 1 (for Frame Size 1) = 224117 Size 3 (for Frame Size 2) = 224119 Size 5 (for Frame Size 3) 7 224121 Size 7 (for Frame Size 7) = 224123 20 Locating Washer for Tie-Bar 8 354979 21 Bearing Washer for Tie-Bar 8 354984 zz Nut for Tie-Bar, 1% in - 8UN - 2B, H.T.S. 8 419843 23 Tube for Tie-Bar Threads - As 182654 plastic 1.812 in i.d. x 0.625 in wall req'd 24 End Cap for Tie-Bar Plastic Tube - plastic 8 404642 # Ratchet Spanner for 1% in - 8 UN nut, 2% in A/F 1 438917 Accessories # Torque Multiplier Assembly (powered spanner) 1 221244 # Lifting Shackle, 0.875 in size. Large 'D' Shackle 2 435125 1 in dia. screwed pin SWL 3 tons Inset'B'| PORT FLANGE FITTINGS (for Head and Follower) Note: Port Liners and Adaptor Flanges are not loose, removable items. Should leakage occur which cannot be cured by welding in situ, then arrangements must be made with The A.P.V. Company Limited, or their local appointed Agent, for the renewal of these items. In this case, the machine type number and serial number should be quoted and also the Flange Standard for which the port fittings are required. This information is on the Plate Typing Program supplied with the machine. The port fittings which can be supplied for site renewal are listed below and quantities given are for 1 port only. 25 Stud, M20 x 55 long for Flange Standard 8 437643 26 Washer, Plain, M20 BS4504, Table 10 or Din 8 460318 27 Nut, Hex., M20 2502, 10 Bar 8 460206 28 Stud, % in BSW x 2.625 in long for Flange 8 437644 29 Washer, Plain, % in Standard BS10, 8 443522 30 Nut Hex, % in BSW Table E 8 417870 31 Cap Screw, Skt. Hd., M20 x 35 long 4 460618 or 28 Stud, % in UNC x 3 in long for Flange 8 437648 29 Washer, Plain, % in Standard ANSI 8 443522 30 Nut, Hex, % in UNC B16.5 Class 8 419821 31 Cap Screw, Skt. Hd., M20 x 35 longj150 ASA 4 460618 A028D/11/31 40 PARAFLOW TYPE R86, SERIES 2 | Fig. Description No Code No. Item Off Inset 'C' 32 Port Blank for Head a 302734 33 Port Blank for Follower 1 302735 34 Port Blank for Head (for Shaped Support Disc) 1 224215 35 Screw, Csk. Hd., M4 x 10 long 2 434294 36 Shaped Support Disc 1 318530 Inset 'B' Port Ring Joint (for Head) 37 Port Ring - Paracril * 421289 Port Ring - Paratherm * 449178 Port Ring - Paratemp * 449188 PLATES & GASKETS # Flow Plate R8/52 (0.6 mm - 23 swg) Stainless Steel 316 S16 * 335956 Stainless Steel 304 * 338940 Titanium T.I. (S.P.) x 335957 # Flow Plate R8/00 (0.6 mm - 23 swg) Stainless Steel 316 S16 * 335960 Stainless Steel 304 * 338939 Titanium T.I. (S.P.) * 335961 # End Plate R8/52 (0.6 mm - 23 swg) Stainless Steel 316 S16 * 335958 Titanium T.I. (S.P.) * 335959 # Gasket Assembly, Flow Plate (complete)-Paracril * 231051 Gasket, Flow Plate (main section) -Paracril 1 421280 Gasket, Flow Plate (port ring 'A') -Paracril au 421281 Gasket, Flow Plate (port ring 'B') -Paracril 1 421282 # Gasket Assembly, End Plate (complete) -Paracril * 231052 Gasket, End Plate (main section 'A')-Paracril il 421283 Gasket, End Plate (main section 'B')-Paracril iL 421284 Gasket, End Plate (port ring 'A') -Paracril iL 421285 Gasket, End Plate (port ring 'B') -Paracril iL 421286 Gasket, End Plate (port ring 'C') -Paracril 1 421287 Gasket, End Plate (port ring 'D') -Paracril 1 421288 # Gasket Assembly, Flow Plate (complete)-Paratherm * 231064 Gasket, Flow Plate (main section) -Paratherm iL 449169 Gasket, Flow Plate (port ring 'A') -Paratherm 1 449170 Gasket, Flow Plate (port ring 'B') -Paratherm 1 449171 # Gasket Assembly, End Plate (complete) -Paratherm * 231065 Gasket, End Plate (main section 'A')-Paratherm L 449172 Gasket, End Plate (main section 'B')-Paratherm 1 449173 Gasket, End Plate (port ring 'A') -Paratherm il 449174 Gasket, End Plate (port ring 'B') -Paratherm 1 449175 Gasket, End Plate (port ring 'C') -Paratherm i 449176 Gasket, End Plate (port ring 'D') -Paratherm 1 449177 # Gasket Assembly, Flow Plate (complete)-Paratemp * 231066 Gasket, Flow Plate (main section) -Paratemp il 449179 Gasket, Flow Plate (port ring 'A') -Paratemp i 449180 Gasket, Flow Plate (port ring 'B') -Paratemp iL 449181 A028D/11/31 41 Fig. Description No Code No. Item Off # Gasket Assembly, End Plate (complete) -Paratemp * 231067 Gasket, End Plate (main section 'A')-Paratemp py 449182 Gasket, End Plate (main section 'B')-Paratemp 1 449183 Gasket, End Plate (port ring 'A') -Paratemp 1 449184 Gasket, End Plate (port ring 'B') -Paratemp 1 449185 Gasket, End Plate (port ring 'C') -Paratemp 1 449186 Gasket, End Plate (port ring 'D') -Paratemp 1 449187 # R8/52 FLOW PLATE & SUPPORT DISC ASSY. (for Multi-Pass Arrangement ) Stainless Steel 316 S16: LBA/RAC : LBC/RCB : LBB/RCC : LBD/RCD * 249911 LCA/RBA : LCB/RBC : LCC/RBB : LCD/RBD * 249912 LDA/RDA : LDB/RDC : LDC/RDB : LDD/RDD * 249913 Titanium Ti (S.P.): LBA/RCA : LBC/RCB : LBB/RCC : LBD/RCD * 249914 LCA/RBA : LCB/RBC : LCC/RBB : LCD/RBD x 249915 LDA/RDA : LDB/RDC : LDC/RDB : LDD/RDD * 249916 LBB/RCC * 249917 LCC/RBB * 249918 LAC/RAB * 249919 LAB/ RAC x 249920 # R8/00 FLOW PLATE & SUPPORT DISC ASSY. (for Multi-Pass Arrangement) Stainless Steel 316 S16: LBA/RCA : LBC/RCB : LBB/RCC : LBD/RCD * 249935 LCA/RBA : LCB/RBC : LCC/RBB : LCD/RBD * 249936 LDA/RDA : LDB/RDC : LDC/RDB : LDD/RDD * 249937 Titanium Ti (S.P.): LBA/RCA : LBC/RCB : LBB/RCC : LBD/RCD * 249928 LCA/RBA : LCB/RBC : LCC/RBB : LCD/RBD * 249929 LDA/RDA : LDB/RDC : LDC/RDB : LDD/RDD * 249930 LBB/ RCC * 249931 LCC/RBB * 249932 LAC/RAB ® 249933 LAB/RAC x 249934 # R8/52 END PLATE & SUPPORT DISC ASSY. (for Multi-Pass Arrangement) Titanium Ti (S.P.): KLBA/KRCA : KLBC/KRCB : KLBB/KRCC : KLBD/KRCD * 249921 KLCA/KRBA : KLCB/KRBC : KLCC/KRBB : KLCD/KRBD * 249922 KLDA/KRDA : KLDB/KRDC : KLDC/KRDB : KLDD/KRDD * 249923 KLBB/KRCC * 249924 KLCC/KRBB * 249925 KLAC/KRAB * 249926 KLAB/KRAC x 249927 A028D/11/31 42 PARAFLOW TYPE R86, SERIES 2 Fig. Description No Code No. Item off @ Fig.7 Diag. DRAIN or VENT CONNECTION ASSEMBLY (for Stainless D Steel Plate only) 1 Drain or Vent Bush * 311689 2; Nut for Drain Bush * 335759 3 Dowty 'O' Ring, Type 202-644-4470 * 427572 4 Selon Washer, Dowty Series P.D. 2850-1127, Mk.9 * 444162 SD Gasket for Drain Bush x 322580 Le # Not illustrated * No. Off as called for on Plate Arrangement Drawing 3% A028D/11/31 43 SERVICE The A.P.V. Service Department is staffed and equipped to provide advice and assistance at all times. To avoid delays when making enquiries, please quote the Serial Number of your machine/equipment (where applicable) and the Code Number of any part referred to. July 27, 1983 RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS SR_ 35 SERIES 12 \e-2) Aves CUSTOMER The Alaska Power Authority SR35 PARAFLOW W.O.# 15603 & 15604 DRAWING NO, 11817-A & 11818-A PLATES MATERIAL 316 stainless steel 7 RAA/LAA = SR35 Plates with Gasket $ 117.00 ea, t RDD/LDD SR35 Plates with Gasket $ 117.00 ea. I KRDD/KLDD SR35 Plates with Gasket $_120.00 ea. : *RAAO/LAAO SR35 Plates with Gasket g 117.00 ea. *Special plate used only in SR350 or SR35M The DD plates are unblanked and can be drilled 2-15/16" Max. to any desired port arrangement. GASKETS MATERIAL Paracril 10 R/L Flow Plate Gaskets $ 17.00 ea. il KR/KL End Plate Gaskets $ 20.00 ea. a Port Gaskets g 5-00 ea. CEMENT 2 5 Oz. Tubes of EC-1099 Cement g 5-00 ea. 1 Pint Can of EC-1099 Cement S| ea, CEMENT COVERAGE 1 - 5 Oz. Tube 10 Gaskets 1 - 1 Pint Can 30 Gaskets The above prices are FOB our plant, Tonawanda, New York, not including any State or Municipal Sales Taxes, if any exist. SHIPMENT APV EQUIPMENT, INC. HX-3 395 FILLMORE AVENUE TONAWANDA, NEW YORK 14150 Publication No. 2-UH16 BUF bly -2 5 \4 i" ° EQUIPMENT, INC. 395 FILLMORE AVE. TONAWANDA, NY 14150 PARAFLOW - TYPE SR35 USER HANDBOOK APV Equipment, Inc. Paraflow Model SR35 Contents Introduction Frame Construction Plate Information Frame Erection Assembling Plate into Frame Plate Pack Tightening Operational Notes Cleaning the Paraflow Preventive Maintenance Regasketing 2-UH16 Buf Page del iS} 14 7, 18 19 24 2-UH16/12-80 SECTION 1 - DESCRIPTION INTRODUCTION (1) The Paraflow Type SR35 is a medium-sized, plate heat exchanger which can be used for heating, cooling and heat recovery duties with a wide range of industrial liquids using direct or closed-circuit cooling. It is suitable for medium process flows on single-pass or multi-pass operation. (2) The frame is floor-standing and is available in four different lengths (size 1 to size 4) to accommodate different quantities of heat exchange plates up to a maximum of 414. GENERAL (1) The heat exchanger consists of a mild-steel frame enclosing a pack of gasketed metal plates designed to permit the flow of process and service fluids. across the surfaces of alternate plates, with maximum heat transfer. The frame comprises a head, an end support, a top carrying bar and a bottom guide bar, together with a follower which is freely suspended from the top bar via a roller assembly and located over the bottom bar. The heat exchanger plafe pack is arranged vertically between the head and follower. Each plate is suspended at its top end from a plate hanging strip (screwed to the underside of the top carrying bar) and located at its lower end over the bottom bar. Six threaded tie-bars, slotted into the head and follower at either end, are tightened evenly, in succession, to draw the follower towards the head and compress the plate pack to the specified working pitch. At this pitch, there should be no leakage of fluids past the plate gaskets. (2) Plates are classified into two principal types: flow plates and end plates. The bulk of the plates’ used in the Paraflow plate pack are flow plates which are ‘ responsible for effecting the heat exchange between process and service liquids. Heat transfer is effected by pumping the process and service liquids (sometimes referred to as the ‘primary’ and 'secondary' liquids, respectively) through the plate pass of the machine such that the two liquids flow in opposite directions across adjacent plate surfaces and occupy alternate spaces in between the plates. The | closely-spaced plates have troughs or corrugations which produce turbulence’ in the liquids flowing between the plates in thin streams of large area resulting ina rapid transfer of heat. An end plate is used where liquid is not required to traverse the plate surface. In the case of a single-pass machine, the end plate would be placed adjacent to the follower. Each plate (of either type) is provided with an elastomer gasket, fitted to one surface of the plate, in order to ensure leak-free control : between adjacent plates when the frame has been tightened-up. The plates are normally assembled into the frame such that all gaskets face towards the follower. Pe Swe wees The Paraflow frame is of orthodox industrial design consisting of head, follower, end support, top bar and tie-bars. All mild-steel components are finished in a chemicakresistant, light-blue paint as standard or, where variations are required, as stated on Works Order. (1) (2) (3) (4) Head The head is manufactured from mild steel and provided with four ports which are each fitted with either blanks or liquid connections when assembling into a given heat exchanger, according to the flow diagram arrangement. The periphery of each port is drilled and tapped to suit BS.4504, Table 16, or ANSI B16.5 Class 150 flanges, and is fitted with studs and nuts. A second set of tapped holes around each port will accept adaptor flanges which are bolted hard against the outside face of the head. The adaptor flanges are ANSI B16.5 Class 300 and, as above, are supplied complete with studs and nuts. The port openings are fitted with thin gauge liners in various materials, fully welded in position, which simulate the raised face condition. Where adaptor flanges are fitted, the liners extend right through the port and flange = to simulate the raised face flange condition. All liquid connections are 75 mm (3 in) bore. |. . es Oe NE Slots machined into the sides of the head accorfimodate the locating head end of each tie-bar. Follower The follower is also manufactured from mild steel and slotted to accept the threaded end of each tie-bar. At the top of the follower is a yoke area for top-bar clearance. Welded to the sidesof the yoke are two steel plates which pass on either side of the top bar and carry the roller, spindle and two ball- races which suspend the follower. from the top bar and allow the follower to travel from head to end support. The follower is either ported or un-ported. A ported follower has the periphery of each port drilled and tapped in the same manner as the head, to ~ accept the same flange connections,and unused ports can be fitted with blanks in the same way. End Support This is a mild steel structure of channel section with a welded-on foot plate having two holes for floor bolts. Top Bar The top bar is rectangular-section mild steel. The plate hanging strip is manufactured in one piece screwed to the underside of the top bar via a spacer bar. The top bar is bolted horizontally at each end to the head and end support, respectively. (2) 08-ZL/9LHN-Z | 2-UH16/12-80 (5) 6) (7) Bottom Bar Manufactured in mild steel, the bottom bar is round in section and bolted at each end to the head and end support, respectively. The function of the bottom bar is to locate each plate ina vertical position prior to plate pack tightening. Tie-Bars The tie-bars are 14 in (38 mm) in diameter and made of high-tensile steel. Each tie-bar is threaded for its full length and has a circular stainless-steel nut with location lug screwed on and fixed in position with anaerobic Fig. 3. Typical SR3 Flow Plates adhesive at the head end. A special mild-steel washer is fitted at the follower end of each tie-bar and backed up by a 14 in x 8UN mild-steel nut screwed on to the thread. The tie-bars are available in four different lengths to suit the different plate capacities of the frame assemblies. Lifting Brackets These are manufactured from mild steel and are bolted to the head and end support by means of the top bar fixing bolts. They enable the assembled frame to be lifted, from each end, by means of lifting shackles. (3) Note: ® e (NO (OQ) ry ry | fs ica ce bd bd bo ee bd bea uce ico LDA 108 1oc 100 Left-Hand Flow Plates oe eo ee SC oC re CA en) Id C e e e love e“ RCC ROC RAD RBD RCO RDD KLAA) KLAB) KLAC : ) KLDA! c 3 & 3} § 3 3 SZ S) S} J J @ j K Kay Right-Hond Flow Plotes les) = ) Ki) 23. W KRBA KRCA IK RBC eaccl| |ikroc] |ikrao Right-Hand End Plotes k¥B0 IKROD Ks} & Plates represented with gasket uppermost. Blanked (Hole) = O Unblanked (No Hole) = @ Because of the dual nature of each plate the number of flow plate variants is double the number of plates actually made. For example, - a left-hand flow plate coded 'LAB' becomes a right-hand flow plate coded 'RAC' simply by inverting the plate. All end plates are formed simply by fitting end plate gaskets to unblanked flow plates. Fig. 4 Plate Reference Chart (4) 08-Z1/9LHN-Z 2-UH16/12-80 HEAT TRANSFER PLATES (1) The heat transfer plates used on the SR35 Paraflow are produced in two standard materials, Stainless Steel 316516 and Titanium Ti (S.P.), but other - materials are available to special order. They are designated SR3 plates and are sub-divided into two main types - SR3/50 and SR3/00. The heat-transfer surfaces of the plate are pressed into a ribbed pattern of shallow corrugations. The SR3/50 plate has its corrugations arranged ina chevron pattern, with each chevron side at an angle of 50° to the horizontal, while the SR3/00 plate has its corrugations arranged horizontally across the plate. Both types of plate are illustrated in Fig. 3. (2) The plates are produced as either right-hand or left-hand types and are arranged alternately in the plate pack. An identical hanging eye is pressed out at each end of the plate which permits assembly into the plate pack either way up providing a left-hand or a right-hand plate, as required. The hanging eye at the top suspends the plate from the hanging strip on the top bar of the Pgraflow frame .- whilst the hanging eye at the bottom locates the plate on the bottom bar. , (3) Each plate has four flow-port positions, one at each corner. The ports can be either blanked out (the port is open to allow the liquid to pass through) or unblanked (the port is closed preventing passage of liquid). Any combination of blanked and unblanked ports is possible, as shown in Fig. 4, to suit the flow requirements of the particular process involved. (4) The liquid is contained within the plate area by an elastomer gasket which is cemented into a narrow groove around the periphery on the face of each plate as can be seen in Fig. 3. This enables the plate to seal against the back of the adjacent plate in the pack or, in the case of an end plate, to seal against the face of the follower. . ane (5) The 'through ports' in the flow plate are completely enclosed by the gasket groove and there are leakage grooves, which vent the interspace between the seals to atmosphere adjacent to each through port. This is so that, in the rare event of leakage, there is a visual indication and an escape path for the pressurised fluid _ which prevents intermixing of the process and service liquids. (6) Flow Plate (a) Flow plates represent the bulk of the plates used in the machine for heat exchange between process and service liquids. When assembled in the plate pack the flow plates are arranged in alternate left-hand and right-hand positions so as to provide two independent flow passages (for primary and secondary liquids) through the complete pack as shown in Fig. 5, Typical Flow Diagram. This follows automatically due to the complementary sealing pattern of the gaskets on left-hand as against right-hand plates when they are tightened together. (b) A flow plate gasket is open across two flow ports, vertically above each other, and closed across the other two ports. Provided both open ports (5) ONE PASS OF END PLATE FLOW PLATES PRIMARY LIQUID P= SECONDARY LIQUID IN (9) @ CLOSED PORT O OPEN PORT Fig. 5 08-Z1/91HA-Z Typical Flow Diagram ONE PASS OF FLOW PLATES GASKETS FACE FOLLOWER PRIMARY LIQUID IN — SECONDARY LIQUID OUT 2-UH16/12-80 (7) (1) (2) (3) have been blanked out, the liquid passes from the entry port and flows vertically (up or down, as appropriate) across the plate surface to the exit port on the same side of the plate. This is known as vertical flow and permits each plate ~ to be used as either a left-hand or a right-hand plate, according to which way up it is assembled (see Fig. 4). (c) Flow Plates are available in either SR3/50 or SR3/00 configurations. SR3/50 plates can be positioned next to each other but SR3/00 plates can only be positioned alternately between SR3/50 plates and must not be placed next to each other. The SR3/00 plates are used with the SR3/50 plates when performance trimming is required and a mix of from 50% to only one SR3/00 plate may be encountered ina plate pack depending on the degree of performance trimming required. End Plate (a) An end plate is assembled in the plate pack, immediately following the last flow plate in the pack and adjacent to the follower, with the gasket _towards the-follower. The.end-plate gasket has port sections-which enclose all four plate ports. If the ports are blanked out, they serve as 'through ports’ only. An end plate is formed by fitting a special gasket to a flow plate. (b) Where the follower has open ports the corresponding port areas of the end plate are blanked out; where the ports on the follower are closed by port blanks, the corresponding port areas on the end plate are unblanked. PLATE IDENTIFICATION Left-Hand Plate has the open flow ports on the left-hand side of the plate when looking at the gasketed face. The two ports closed by the gasket are on the ~ right-hand side. The plate orientation indicating 'dimples' in each edge of the plate are ABOVE the plate centre. ’ Right-Hand Plate has the open flow ports on the right-hand side of the plate. when looking at the gasketed face. The two ports closed by the gasket are on the left-hand side. The plate orientation indicating ‘dimples' in each edge of the plate are BELOW the plate centre. Plate Orientation ‘dimples’ provide a ready indication, when looking along the side of an assembled plate pack, as to which are. left-hand and right-hand plates by checking that the 'dimples' are above or below the plate centres, respectively. Plate orientation 'dimples' also indicate from the side of an assembled pack:- SR3/50 Plate - single ‘dimples’ in each edge SR3/00 Plate - double ‘dimples’ in each edge (7) (4) (5) Plate Thickness Identification The thickness of the plate material can be ascertained by small identification a ule a ce ic . . ‘dimples' (& in dia x % in raised) in the extreme edge of the plate adjacent to a flow port. Material: 0.6mm - 0.024 in thick has one dimple 0.7mm - 0.028 in thick has two dimples, one above the other. Gasket Material Identification The gaskets are colour coded in the leakage groove area corresponding to the material from which the gasket is manufactured. Material: SBR Colour: Red Paracril Yellow Paratemp Blue & White ‘ese ! . : Die 7 a (8) 08-Z1/9 LHN-Z 2-UH16/12-80 SECTION Symes» - INSTALLATION (9) Support BOTTOM BAR a& Support FOLLOWER 3 4 Fit roller assembly FRAME ASSEMBLED | END SUPPORT Ff 5 6. Fig. 6 Frame Erection Procedure (10) 08-Z1/9LHN-Z 2-UH16/12-80 SECTION 2 - INSTALLATION GENERAL (1) It is fairly common nowadays for the complete machine to be despatched with _ plates assembled in the frame, in which case all that remains is for the Paraflow to be grouted to the site floor and connected up to process and service pipework. (2) Should the machine be despatched un-assembled, however, and in the absence of APV erection personnel to assemble and connect-up the heat exchanger, the following recommended sequence of steps is set out as a guide. (3) Prepare the site and arrange for lifting gear, capable of lifting the individual members involved, to be available, (see component weights under LEADING PARTICULARS). Site preparation involves making a suitable level foundation capable of withstanding the full weight of the machine, bearing in mind the maximum liquid content at any time, (again, refer to LEADING PARTICULARS). ; Note: The machine foundation must be absolutely level for the installation as there are no levelling facilities in the machine base. : as seusVA (4) If the Paraflow is to operate on a concrete floor, grout foundation bolts (Fig. 6 - 7) of suitable length and diameter into the floor, spaced to suit the 29 mm diameter fixing holes in the feet of the Paraflow (see Fig. 1). Adequate space must be available on either side of the Paraflow to allow access for ratchet spanner swing during tightening of the plate pack. This should extend to at least 125 cm (49 in) from the centre line of the machine. Once the foundation is prepared, proceed with frame erection, referring to Fig. 6 for Frame Erection Procedure and to Fig. 8 for component references. a FRAME ERECTION (1) Raise and support the head ina vertical position. Secure the feet of the head on to the foundation bolts with appropriate nuts and washers. (2) Attach the bottom bar (14) to the head with bolt (12) and washer (11) and support the bar in the level position by bolstering underneath.‘ (3) Place and maintain the follower in a vertical position over the bottom bar, bolstering it up from underneath sufficiently to allow the follower roller (17) to be fitted easily when the top bar is in position. (4) | Attach the top bar (5) to the head using remaining bolts (12) and washers (11) with the free end supported by a sling. (5) Bring up the end support and attach it to the free ends of the top and bottom bars using setscrews (13) and washers (11). Secure the foot of the end support to the foundation bolts with appropriate nuts and washers. Fit the follower roller components (itemised in detail 'A', Fig. 8) into position in the yoke of the follower, above the top bar, and secure in position with the two’ sel f-lock rings (20). (11) PUSH UP PLATE HANGING STRIP BOTTOM BAR >) ‘a KEEP ON PUSHING UP @ LOCATE OVER BOTTOM BAR Fre - GASKET SIDE OF PLATE TILT SIDE VIEW LOCATE THIS — : SIDE wy LOWER AND ALLOW PLATE TO HANG 08-Z1/9LHN-z Fig. 7 Method of Fitting SR3 Plates into Frame (12) 2-UH16/12-80 (6) Remove the bolstering from underneath the bottom bar and follower, allowing the follower to hang free, via the follower roller, from the top bar. The Paraflow is now ready to accommodate the platage and tie-bars. FITTING PLATES INTO FRAME , (1) Roll the follower right back along the top bar to the end support, then lubricate the two edges (left- and right-hand) of the plate hanging strip with a thin film of graphite grease; this prepares the surfaces for contact with the hanging eye of each plate so that it will slide along easily. (2) Fig. 7 illustrates the recommended method of attaching the plates to the top bar plate hanging strip and fitting them, one by one, into the frame. It is essential that the plates are assembled into the frame in accordance with the plate arrange- ment drawing (Plate Typing Program) supplied with the Paraflow. (3) | Study the plate arrangement drawing and, taking each plate in turn, attach. it- to the plate hanging strip as shown in Fig. 7. Hold the plate with the hanging eye cut-out at the top and the blanked-out ports in their correct positions with the plate gasket facing towards the follower. Refer to Fig. 4, Plate Reference Chart, for positions of ports. : (4) Angle the plate edgewise from the vertical in the position shown in Fig. 7 (1). Hook the nearest plate hanging eye shoulder over the nearside edge of the plate hanging profile on the top carrying bar. (5) ‘Tilt the lower edge of the plate away from the head or the follower (as appropriate) at an angle sufficient to completely clear the bottom bar and then swing the plate back across the bottom bar, at the same time pushing slightly upwards against the underside of the top bar, Fig. (2) and (3). This enables the hanging eye on the other shoulder to hook onto the opposite side of the top bar. (6) Lower the bottom edge of the plate down towards the head, locating the bottom cut-out in the plate over the bottom bar of the frame, Fig. 7 (4). (7) Allow the plate to hang vertically from the plate hanging profile, Fig. 7 (5) and push the plate towards the head to allow the next plate to be fitted. Check plate against head for squareness and matching of ports. Any plate badly mis- aligned through distortion should be renewed. (8) When assembling the plates in the pack, take care to arrange the mix of SR3/50 and SR3/00 plates in the correct sequence. The last plate to be fitted in the pack is an end plate. This has a special gasket enclosing all four port positions. The gasket faces towards the follower. (9) Whenall the plates have been assembled in the frame, again run through the pack to ensure that all plates are in the correct sequence, specified on the plate arrangement drawing, and are facing in the correct direction. The plate orientation 'dimples' in the plate edges indicate which are left-hand and right-hand (13) plates by being above or below the plate centres, respectively. With the pack correctly assembled, the 'dimples' should alternate above and below the plate centres, when looking along the side of the pack, to show that two R.H. or two L.H. plates have not been assembled next to each other. Also, two plates with double ‘dimples’ (SR3/00 plates) should not be next to each other. (10) Push all the plates together against the head and then push the follower up to the plate pack compressing the plate pack as far as possible by exerting pressure by hand. (11) Remove the protective plastic tubes (24, Fig. 8) and end caps (25) from the ends of the tie-bars and retain for subsequent re-use. Clean off the protective waterproof grease from the threaded portion of each tie-bar. ; (12) Assemble tie-bars (21) to the machine, locating the lug on the head of each tie-bar into its location slot in the head. Lubricate the tie-bar washers and nuts (22 and 23) with Rocol A.S.P. and the threads of the tie-bars for as far as the nuts are likely to travel (allowing for compression of plate pack). Screw the tie-bar nuts, with their washers, up to the follower by hand ensuring that the lugs on the tie-bar -- - heads remain located in their slots whilst doing so. (13) Apply the ratchet spanner provided. to the. tie-bar nuts, tightening each in turn, ensuring that the tie-bar locating lugs draw into their slots in the head, whilst doing so, with the flange faces hard against the head. PLATE PACK TIGHTENING The plate pack should now be tightened to the nominal compressed plate pitch (see 4.(5) using the ratchet spanner Code No. 438918 or a torque multiplier assembly (powered spanner) obtainable as an accessory, Code No. 439775. Note: To facilitate hand tightening by one man, an extension tube may be fitted to the ratchet spanner; if desired,’ but care should be taken not to tighten beyond the nominal compressed plate pitch initially before checking for leakage. The internal pressure must be at atmospheric condition when tightening the plate pack. Refer to Publication No. 2-1IM3 for full step-by-step tightening procedure (particularly when using a torque multiplier). (1) Using the ratchet spanner, or the powered spanner, tighten each tie-bar by an equal amount on each side starting with the two centre bars first and then moving outwards to the top and bottom pairs of tie-bars by diagonal opposites, i.e. usinga ‘cylinder head' tightening sequence to keep the head and follower parallel. Check by making frequent measurements at the top and bottom of the plate pack. (2) Continue tightening by equal amounts until the nominal compressed plate pitch is reached (see 4.(5) ). At this stage, the platage dimension should be as stated on the Plate Typing Program. Under these conditions, the gaskets are all fully compressed, the plates are in firm metal-to-metal contact and the correct flow gaps are achieved. This is essential for maximum heat- transfer efficiency and long life of plates and gaskets. (4) 08-Z1/9LHA-Z 2-UH16/12-80 Note: (3) The machine should now be tested at the normal operating pressure (see Rate Typing Program) for leakage. Slowly increase the pressure at a rate not greater than 60 Ibf/in2 per minute until the normal operating pressure is reached. This should be maintained for a minimum period of 15 minutes while the plate pack is monitored for leakage. (4) If leakage occurs, reduce the internal pressure slowly to atmospheric. Do not tighten the plate pack further but mark the area of leakage on the side of the plate pack and drain the machine. Open the plate pack and remove the plates in. the affected area. Examine the plates and gaskets. The most likely trouble is dirt or small extraneous items across the gasket faces. If completely clean, examine the gaskets for non-adhesion to plates in places, for splits or pitting or other damage. Damaged gaskets can be renewed by re-gasketing the existing plates but plates which have been distorted or suffered other damage must be renewed, they are not repairable. After rectifying the trouble and replacing the plates correctly, close the:plate pack and re-tighten as before. Check for leakage again as specified in 4.(3). (5) If leakage still occurs, further tightening can be undertaken to effect a leakproof seal. Tighten the plate pack, as before, by one fifth of the difference between nominal and minimum compressed plate pitches (see below). Again monitor for plate pack leakage as in 4.(3). The nominal compressed plate pitch is:- 4.27 mm (0.168 in) - 0.6mm (23 swg) plate 4.34 mm (0.171 in) - 0.7 mm (22 swg) plate The minimum plate pitch below which the plates must not be compressed is:- 4.14 mm (0.163 in) - 0.6 mm (23 swg) plate 4.22 mm (0.166 in) - 0.7mm (22 swg) plate Plate pitch (the linear distance between the corresponding edges of adjacent plates) is determined by dividing the linear distance between the inside faces of the head and follower (platage dimension) by the total number of plates in the pack. Subtract the thickness of any connector grids from the platage dimension when calculating the plate pitch. (6) Should further leakage occur, continue tightening by one fifth increments of the difference between nominal and minimum compressed plate pitches and leak- testing until a leakproof seal is obtained. Onno account must the plate pack be compressed to below the minimum plate pitch. (7) Should leakage still occur when at minimum compressed plate pitch, do not attempt further tightening. The correct procedure is to mark the area of leakage on the side of the plate pack, open the pack and remove the plates in the affected area. Examine the gaskets and plates. Ensure that no dirt has got on to the gasket faces when the pack was closed and re-tightened in 4.(4). If the gaskets and plates are perfectly clean and free from damage, the only likely cause is reduced thickness gaskets probably due to constant compression in service. Carry out re-gasketing as necessary (see Section 4 - Maintenance (Re-gasketing). : (18) (8) Re-assemble the plate pack and re-tighten as before in stages, pressure-testing at each stage until no further leakage occurs. Once the plate pack has been correctly assembled and tightened to leakproof conditions, a good method of providing a ready visual check for future reference is to paint a thick diagonal line on to the plate edges across the complete pack from head to follower. If this is done ON ONE SIDE OF THE MACHINE ONLY, an immediate visual check is provided to indicate any of | the following discrepancies:- (a) One or more plates out of sequence. (b)- A plate inserted the wrong way round. (c) Replacement plates inserted in the pack and not yet marked. (d) Missing or extra plates. EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS The Paraflow should now be ready for connection of external pipework, whether it has been received fully assembled or has just been assembled in accordance with the foregoing instructions. If ihis is part of an APY engineered scheme, drawings of the external pipework connections will be available. If it is supplied as an individual unit it should be connected into the user's own installation, bearing in mind the following points. (1) A suitable pressure relief valve should be fitted in any inlet pipeline to the machine where there is any risk that the pressure could rise above the maximum ‘ working pressure of the machine. The relief valve should be bench set at a pressure not greater than the maximum working pressure of the machine (see Plate Typing Program). (2) To enable external pipework connections to be made to the follower, pipeline flexibility must be provided. This compensates for thermal expansion and contraction of the plate pack and tie-bars, under operating conditions, particularly in a large frame containing maximum platage. Adequate support must be provided for pipework to the Paraflow to avoid undue loading on the heat exchanger ports. (3) If the heat exchanger has been supplied with a protective screen this must be in position at all times whilst the machine is in use. TRIAL RUN/TEST FOR LEAKAGE (1) When the heat exchanger has been assembled, the liquid connections made secure and the plate pack correctly assembled and tightened to working dimensions, the complete machine should be tested generally for correct operation and non-leakage prior to being put on-stream. (2) Such a test is, in any case, carried out at The A.P.V. Company's works prior to despatch of each Paraflow. A repetition of this test upon commissioning, therefore, will serve as a check that the machine has been correctly assembled and installed. (3) During testing, the pressures in the primary and secondary fluid lines must be increased or decreased gradually, and never at a rate greater than 60 Ibf/in® per minute. Rapid changes of pressure must be avoided. Pressure pulsation can cause damage. (16) 08-Z1/91HN-z 2-UH16/12-80 SECTION 3 - OPERATIONAL NOTES GENERAL (1) | The procedure for starting up the heat exchanger will depend upon the installation in which it is used, but will be similar for all conditions provided that the process and service liquids are within the duty temperature ranges for which the equipment is designed (see information on plate arrangement drawing supplied with the machine). E (2) Assuming that the heat exchanger has been correctly installed, that pipelines have been connected and that the installation has been checked and all associated plant components are in a ready-to-use state, it is recommended that the following final checks are made: Frame Ensure that it is level (checked with spirit : level) and all locking devices are secure. Plate Pack Visually check for completeness, correct a assembly and any signs of leakage... Pipe Connections Check for secureness. (3) | Under normal running conditions, the heat exchanger will continue to perform its specified function until such time as the plates need cleaning or require re-gasketing. (4) In some applications, deposit upon the plate surfaces will depend upon — filtration services incorporated in the system, before the inlet to the Paraflow, and fouling will be indicated by diminished heat exchanger performance. (5) Re-gasketing will be necessary when the plate gaskets are already at minimum plate pitch and have aged and become worn; indication will be given by leakage. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (1) If the heat exchanger has been supplied with protective screens, these should be fitted at all times while the machine is in use. If protective screens have not been supplied ensure that, when high pressure steam or other potentially hazardous services are connected to the heat exchanger, a temporary cover of wet sacking or canvas is placed over the entire plate pack to protect personnel in the event of sudden gasket failure. (2) The maximum working pressure of the machine and the maximum flow rates must not be exceeded. These details are given on the plate arrangement drawing. Ensure that no undue pressure fluctuations occur in primary or secondary fluid lines following start-up. This can occur if the pumps are switched into the system too rapidly or valves are slammed open. All pressure changes in the system should be carried out gradually. Pressure pulsation can cause plate damage. (17) CLEANING THE PARAFLOW (1) The Paraflow should normally be cleaned at the end of each process run taking care to ensure that all solids are flushed from the plant. (2) Where a brine section is incorporated in the machine, discharge all brine from the machine and flush out brine side of the section by means of cold water ‘admitted at a bottom entry port. The brine must never be allowed to remain in contact with the plates when the machine is idle or when hot detergent or hot water is being circulated through the product side of the plates. (3) The following associated publications should be studied, with particular regard to correct, as against incorrect, cleaning methods and the special care of Paraflows employing brine. Title Ref.No. Do's and Don'ts -(APV Paraflows) : 2-1L2 The Care of Cooling Sections Employing Brine 2-W5 (4) The presence of water hardness salts in the heat exchanger can reduce the overall heat-transfer efficiency of the heat-exchanger plates over a period of time. Mineral scale can be precipitated out during the thermal processes and accumulate on the surfaces of the heat exchanger plates, providing an excellent key for other soil depositions, thus resulting in diminished heat-exchanger performance. (5) If a softened water supply is not available, the heat-transfer efficiency may be maintained by periodic circulation through the system of a suitable chemical agent. One approach isto useA.P.V. Parachem No. 2 as a recommended concentrate additive for use with Parachem No. 1 in hard-water conditions, i.e.- above 150 ppm calcium carbonate content. Alternatively, A.P.V. Parachem No. 3 may be employed as an acidic descalant. (6) If in doubt on the usage and suitability of any cleansing agent, the matter should be referred to The A.P.V. Company Limited. : (7) The Type SR35 Paraflow is for industrial applications and, in such a role, it will be required to operate for long periods in between strip-down examination and cleaning. Plate cleaning is more properly dealt with under the Maintenance Schedule. (18) 08-2 1/91HN-Z 2-UH16/12-80 SECTION 4 - MAINTENANCE GENERAL (1) Maintenance for a Paraflow heat exchanger can be divided into two distinct categories, viz: (a) Preventive maintenance carried out ona routine basis to a planned schedule. (b) Repairs of a specific nature and general overhaul, carried out as a result of failure or impaired performance. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (1) The preventive maintenance scheme for this heat exchanger refers to those items which are likely to fail or deteriorate over a period of time when the assembly is used within the limitations of its design rating. (2) Preventive maintenance, involving astit does regular checks of various points on the machine, can help to reduce the extent and cost of subsequent shut- downs. Attention should be given to checking for corrosion on the painted steel components, cleaning and repainting where necessary, also to checking tightness of tie-bars and floor-fixing bolts. The threads on the tie-bars should be — coated with Mobiltac 81 or similar grease at all times. * (3) As the heat exchanger may be used on widely differing products, processes and running times, it is not possible to give a specific time scale to the various ~ maintenance operations. They are, however, sub-divided ona relative basis into short, medium and long periods of operation and it will be necessary for the person implementing this scheme to establish a time scale to suit the operating conditions. (4) The 'spares requirements’ shown are based on an average duty and an average 8-hour daily run. (5) Where a number of identical heat exchangers are installed at the same location it will not be necessary to carry complete sets of spares for the total number of heat exchangers. (6) It is important to remember that the majority of the items recommended to be carried as spares are rubber, or synthetic rubber and are prone to deterioration when stored. Care should be taken not to expose rubber components to extremes of temperatures, sun or strong light, outdoor air or atmospheres containing ozone or corrosive gases (e.g. chlorine). * Note: Further information and advice on Preventive Maintenance is available from The A.P.V. Company Service Department. (19) (O02) Description of Item Head PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Preventive Maintenance Intervals Between Checks Spares Requirement Medium Repaint if necessary Long Repaint all over + r For one | For two year | years Follower Repaint if necessary Repaint all over End Support Repaint all over Top Bar Clean plate hanging strip and lubricate with a thin coat of Graphite Grease Check tightness of fixing screws attaching the Plate Hanging Strip and of Top Bar fixing bolts. Bottom Bar Check tightness of fixing bolts. ( Follower Roller Periodically apply grease gun to roller using 'Mobilux 2' or similar grease « Dismantle, clean-out and repack with "Mobilux 2' or similar grease. Coat all threads with ‘Mobiltac 81' grease (or similar) Port Rings Check for collapsed peaks, splits or hardening Plates & Gaskets 08-Z1/9tHN-z See Notes A and B Also, see separate APV Publication, Ref. 2-IMI] (Regasketing) 2-UH16/12-80 NOTES (A) Inspection and checking for damaged plates and gasket extrusion should be carried out periodically as follows: (i) Inspect the plate pack for bent or deformed plate edges or damaged hanging : eyes. Minor damage may be disregarded, but major damage causing excessive leakage necessitates plate and gasket replacement. (ii) Check for gasket extrusion. If apparent, this is indicative of a damaged . plate or failed gasket adhesion, which can be caused when plate dimension is below the permissible minimum or if the machine has been subjected to internal pressures above the specified maximum working pressure. If the plate is undamaged, it should be regasketed. (B) Any scale or deposition on the plates must be removed with an approved cleaning agent, either by total immersion or by application with a bristle- or plastic-type brush. DO NOT use steel wool, wire brushes or abrasives of any kind; severe corrosion will result. Severe corrosion or perforation of the plate surface nécessitates the fitment of replacement plates complete with gaskets. PARAFLOW PLATES ARE NOT REPAIRABLE. Note: Advice as to suitable cleaning methods, for various applications, can be obtained from The A.P.V. Company Limited. In certain cases, the trade names and suppliers of suitable proprietary cleaning agents can be provided, together with instructions for use. oe FAULT FINDING ' CAUTION: Before attempting to open the heat exchanger plate pack, prior to removing the plates, ensure that the supplies of primary and secondary process liquids to the machine are vented and fully drained. Procedure to Open Plate Pack (1) Disconnect and remove pipework connections on the follower. (2) Remove the protective plastic tubes and caps from the ends of the tie-bars. Remove the waterproof grease from the tie-bar threads (from the follower to the ends of the tie-bars) and re-apply Rocol A.S.P. lubricant in its place. (This is because the Mobiltac 81 is for anti-corrosion protection only and does not have the high-pressure lubrication properties required on the screw threads when tightening or slackening off the tie-bars). (3) | Using the ratchet spanner provided, or the powered spanner, slacken each tie-bar nut at the follower end by an equal amount, starting with the centre pair first and working outwards to the top and bottom pairs of tie-bars by diagonal opposites, so as to keep the follower as parallel with the head as possible. Continue this procedure until all the tie-bars are completely undone. (21) (4) Lift away each tie-bar assembly, complete, from the frame disengaging the locating lugs from the head whilst doing so. (5) Roll the follower back to the end support and separate the plate pack taking care not to damage the plate edges in any way. (6) The plates may be removed by a reversal of the procedure outlined in SECTION 2 - INSTALLATION, Sub-Section 3. Take great care to avoid damage to the plate hanging eyes and ensure that the correct position in the plate pack is noted for every plate removed. u (22) 08-Z1/9 LHN-Z 2-UH16/12-80 FAULT FAULT DIAGNOSIS CHART POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY Plate pack leakage , Incorrect plate arrangement Plate pack requires tightening Worn, faulty or distorted gasket(s) Foreign bodies on gasket faces Working pressure exceeded Check plate arrangement Check platage dimension and re-tighten, if necessary | See Section 2.4, also Plate Arrangement Drawing. Renew Clean gasket faces Adjust working pressure Leakage at flow ports Faulty joint rings Loose nut(s) Renew Tighten all nuts evenly Fluctuating outlet temperature in primary liquid line Perforated plate(s) allowing intermixing of liquids Variations in secondary liquid throughput Renew plate(s) Stabilise throughput | ‘Low outlet pressure in primary liquid line Scaling or deposition on plates Blockage in plate pack or inlet line Clean plate surfaces Check and clean as necessary Internal leakage or intermixing of primary and secondary liquids Perforated plate surface allowing intermixing of liquids 4. EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE Renew plote (s) (1) Any leakage from the heat exchanger should be investigated as to the cause; the Paraflow should not leak in service. Excessive leakage should be investigated immediately and rectified as soon as possible. (2) When leakage is considered to be not due to any external cause, e.g. shock loading due to slamming of pneumatic valves in system, etc., check tightness of plate pack and carry out any further tightening considered necessary until the conditions specified in Section 2.4 (5) are attained. C23.) (3) Should leakage still occur, open the plate pack as specified in Section 4.3 and examine the gaskets in the area of the leakage for:- any of which will (b) split in gasket necessitate re-gasketing (a) non-adhesion of gasket to plate (c) deformed gasket (d) dirt or foreign bodies across gasket faces:- clean faces of affected : gaskets (4) If the gaskets appear to be satisfactory, check the surface of the plates in- the suspect area for:- (a) local corrosion, or (b) plate surface perforations. Either of the above conditions will require the fitment of replacement plate(s) complete with gasket(s). RE-GASKETING For full details on plate re-gasketing procedure refer to APV Publication 2- IMI, Re-gasketing Paraflow Plates. In brief, the process of re-gasketing covers three stages, viz: Application of adhesive (1) Removal of the old gasket } Preparation of plate and new gasket Fitting the new gasket (2) Fitting a new gasket (3) Curing the adhesive Testing Gasket Adhesion (1) After curing the gasket(s) as detailed in Associated Publication No. 2-IMI, allow the machine to cool to room temperature. Cold water may be circulated through the machine to achieve this condition. (2) When the machine is at room temperature check that the internal pressure of the Paraflow is at atmospheric and proceed to tighten the plate pack as specified in Section 2.4 of this publication. 08-z1/9\HN-z (3) After tightening the plate pack, proceed with pressure testing as specified in Section 2.6 of this publication. (24) WEY July 27, 1983 RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS SERIES CUSTOMER The Alaska Power Authority SR15 PARAFLOW WORK ORDER# _15605 DRAWING 118]9-A LATES PRICE MATERIAL 316 stainless steel 3 RAA/LAA Plates, Gasketed $ 68.00 ea 1 RDD/LDD Plates, Gasketed $ 68.00 ea 1 KRDD/KLDD Plates, Gasketed $ 89.00 ea The DD plates are unblanked and can be drilled 1-3/8" diameter to any desired port arrangement. GASKETS MATERIAL Paracril PRICE 3 R/L Flow Plate Gaskets $ 15.00 ea 1 KR/KL End Plate Gaskets Si 36.00 ea 2 Port Gaskets $ 3.00 ea CEMENT PRICE 1 5 oz. tubes of EC-1099 Cement $ 5.00 ea 1 pint cans of EC-1099 cement $ ea GASKET COVERAGE 5 oz. tube - 50 gaskets 1 pint can - 150 gaskets The above prices are FOB our plant, Buffalo, New York not including any State or Municipal Sales Taxes, if any exist. SHIPMENT: FROM STOCK APV EQUIPMENT, INC. 395 FILLMORE AVE. als TONAWANDA, NEW YORK 14150 Publication No. APY EQUIPMENT, INC. 395 FILLMORE AVE. TONAWANDA, NY 14150 PARAFLOW - TYPE SRL5 USER HANDBOOK 2-UH11 RUF “ APV EQUIPMENT, INC. PARAFLOW TYPE SR15 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION FRAME CONSTRUCTION GENERAL INFORMATION FOR THE HEAT EXCHANGER PLATES PLATE IDENTIFICATION FRAME ERECTION INSTALLATION OF HEAT EXCHANGER TIGHTENING THE PLATES OPERATIONAL NOTES MAINTENANCE INSPECTION AND CHECKING FOR DAMAGED PLATES OR GASKETS REGASKETING PLATES 2-UH11 Buf PAGE 10 10 13 18 20 22 24 THE A.P.V. COMPANY LIMITED 2-UH11 PARAFLOWS TYPES SR10, SR11, SR15 & SR16 INTRODUCTION 1. This user handbook deals with the installation, operation and maintenance of the SRl Series of Paraflow plate heat exchangers and also includes a general specification, description and illustrated parts list. 2. Other documents which accompany the Paraflow unit and which are to be read in conjunction with this handbook are: (a) PLATE TYPING PROGRAM (Plate Arrangement Drawing) A computer sheet detailing all items supplied with the unit, the contract instructions, precise plate pack arrangement and performance parameters applicable to the unit supplied. (b) MACHINE ARRANGEMENT DRAWING A dimensional drawing showing the position and type of external connections supplied on the particular unit and with cross reference to the Plate Typing Program. (c) ASSOCIATED PUBLICATIONS Bs j Additional APV Publications, listed in the contents pages, are supplied with this handbook and are referred to in the appropriate sections of the text. HEALTH & SAFETY AT WORK 1. No current Codes of Practice are solely applicable to the operation of plate heat exchangers but, as this unit operates in process streams under pressure and temperature conditions, it is reasonable to apply related conditions of safe -installation, operation and maintenance that would arise - with pressure vessels. Therefore publications of a relevant nature should be studied carefully. 2. Paraflow limitations are influenced by factors such as the type of frame, tightening gear and heat exchanger plates and gaskets fitted. Exceeding the parameters laid down in the Plate Typing Program may cause leakage and careful consideration should be given ~-to the hazards which may then occur. SPRAY SCREENS are available and, when supplied, must be fitted at all times the Paraflow is in operation. _In addition to screens, drainage trays should be ~ considered for Paraflows mounted on open staging in an overhead position. 3, --The-working pressure for the unit is given in the Plate Typing Program and should not be exceeded. Where the Paraflow is installed in a circuit that has the potential to produce excess pressures, it should be protected by means of relief valves, bursting discs or like devices. HANDBOOK ILLUSTRATIONS In general, illustrations relating to text matter appear at the end of each relevant section of the User Handbook. (1) GENERAL (1) The heat transfer surfaces of the SRl Series of Paraflows are made up of a seriate pack of chevron-trough plates sandwiched vertically between two frame members (head and follower). The plates are held in position by threaded tie-bars which apply pressure to compress the plate pack between the head and follower. Elastomeric gaskets are fitted near the edges of the plates to ensure that no leakage of the process fluid occurs under normal working pressures and also to determine the path of the process fluids through the unit. (2) Heat transfer is effected by pumping the process fluid and the service fluid (sometimes referred to as the ‘primary' and ‘secondary’ fluids, respectively) through the plate pass of the machine such that the two (fluids flow in opposite directions across adjacent plate surfaces and occupy alternate spaces in between the plates. The closely-spaced plates have corrugations which produce turbulence in the liquids flowing between the plates in thin streams of large area resulting in a rapid transfer of heat. FRAME CONSTRUCTION The Paraflow frames consist of head, follower, end support, top and bottom bars, tie-bars, mounting brackets and port connections. All carbon steel components are zinc-sprayed and finished in a chemical-resistant light- blue paint. (1) Head This is manufactured from carbon steel in flat plate construction “with four port connections and holes for four tie-bars. Any unused port connections are filled with port blanks. Holes are also provided for a screwed-on foot for the free-standing models or for a screwed-on bracket for the wall-mounting models. fan THE APV (2) @) (4) (5) (6) (7) COMPANY LIMITED 2-UH11 Follower This is also of carbon-steel, flat-plate construction and can be supplied either with or without four port connections. Any unused connections in a ported follower are closed with port blanks. The follower is fitted with a nylon bush to slide on the top bar and a cut-out at the bottom locates over the bottom bar. It is drilled with four port holes for the tie-bars. End Support This is only used on the free-standing models SR1O and SR15. It is manufactured from carbon steel and drilled with two holes for screw connections to the end of the top and bottom bars. Top and Bottom Bars These are manufactured from stainless-steel square bar and supplied in three lengths to suit 50, 100 or 150 plate capacity frame sizes. The bottom bar is assembled with its sides square with the machine sides and the top bar with its sides at 45° to the machine sides. A carbon-steel lifting eye is screwed at each end of the top bar, to the head and end support, by means of the top bar fixing nut and bolt. r Tie-Bars and Nuts The tie-bars are 1 inch (25mm) in diameter with a captive nut at the head end secured with anaerobic adhesive. The hygienic machines are fitted with stainless-steel tie-bars and phosphor-bronze free-running nuts, while industrial machines have high-tensile steel tie-bars with carbon steel, free nuts. All have carbon-steel, plated washers. Mounting Brackets A carbon-steel angle bracket (foot) is screwed to the bottom of the head on the free-standing models only. A carbon-steel mounting bracket can be supplied as an accessory for securing to the head on wall-mounting versions only. Port Connections Port connections on hygienic machines are 15 inch RJT or ISS fittings in stainless steel welded on to 1% inch liquid bushes in the head and follower. On industrial machines, port connections are 15 inch (38mm) nominal bore terminating in 14 inch BSP parallel male threads or plain stub ends for welded connections. Two lengths of BSP connections are available, short and long, to enable adjacent flanged fittings on the head to be staggered as the port centres dimension is insufficient to allow-side-by-side flanges. On the follower, all connections must be directly fitted with 90° bends in order to carry the flanges clear of the tie-bars and the top- and bottom-bars. The plain stub-end connections, which are in one length only, are suitable for welding to nominal bore tubing BS3600 and 1S0:DIS1127, 40mm size x 1.6mm thick or ASA.B36.19, 1% inch size x 0.065 inch thick (Schedule 5S). (3) THE APV COMPANY LIMITED 2-UH11 Port ring joints are fitted on liquid bushes in the head only. All liquid bushes are available in 316S16 Stainless Steel, while Titanium Ti(S.P.) or equivalent liquid bushes are available for industrial machines only. The liquid bushes are retained in the frame by use of an anaerobic adhesive when assembling to the head or follower. HEAT TRANSFER PLATES (1) The heat transfer plates used in SR19, SR11, SR15 & SR16 Paraflows are designated SRl plates. The plates are of a chevron-trough form as can be seen in Fig. 3. An identical hanging eye is pressed out at each end of the plate which permits assembly into the plate pack either way up. The hanging eye at the top suspends the plate from the top of the Paraflow frame whilst the hanging eye at the bottom locates the plate on the bottom bar. (2) Each plate has four flow-port positions, one at each corner. The ports can be either blanked out (the port is open to allow the liquid to pass through) as in Fig. 3(a), or unblanked (the port is closed preventing passage of liquid) as in Fig. 3(b). Any combination of blanked and unblanked ports is possible, as shown in Fig. 4, to suit the flow requirements of the particular process involved. (3) The liquid is contained within the plate area by an elastomeric gasket which is cemented into a narrow groove around the periphery on the face of each plate, as shown in Fig. 6. This enables the plate to seal against the back of the adjacent plate in the pack or, in the case of an end plate, to seal against the face of the follower. (4) The 'through ports' in the flow plate are completely enclosed by the gasket groove and there are leakage grooves (Fig. 6) which vent the interspace between the seals to atmosphere, adjacent to each through port. This is so that, in the rare event of leakage, there is a visual indication and an escape path for the pressurised fluid which prevents intermixing of the process and service liquids. (5) Flow Plate (a) Flow plates represent the bulk of the plates used in the machine for heat exchange between process and service liquids. When assembled in the plate pack the flow plates are arranged in alternate left-hand and right-hand positions so as to provide two independent flow passages (for primary and secondary liquids) through the complete pack as shown in Fig. 5, Typical Flow Diagram. This follows automatically due to the complementary sealing pattern of the gaskets on left-hand as against right-hand plates when they are tightened together. (b) A flow-plate gasket is open across two flow ports, vertically above each other, and closed across the other two ports. Provided both open ports have been blanked out, the liquid passes from the entry port and flows vertically (up or down, as appropriate) across the plate surface to the exit port on the same side of the plate. This is known as vertical flow and permits each plate to be used as either a left-hand or a right-hand plate, according to which way up it is assembled (see Fig. 4). (4) THE APV COMPANY LIMITED 2-UH11 (6) (1) (2) (3) (4) End Plate (a) An end plate is assembled in the plate pack, immediately following the last flow plate in the pack and adjacent to the follower, with the gasket towards the follower. The end-plate gasket has port sections which enclose all four plate ports (as shown in Fig. 3(b). If the ports are blanked out, they serve as ‘through ports' only. (b) If the follower is ported, the corresponding port areas of the end plate are blanked; if the follower is plain, all end-plate ports are unblanked. Fig. 5 shows a single-pass machine with plain follower. PLATE IDENTIFICATION Left-Hand Plate has the open flow ports on the left-hand side of the plate when looking at the gasketed face. The two ports closed by the gasket are on the right-hand side. The plate orientation indicating ‘dimples' in each edge of the plate are BELOW the plate centre. Right-Hand Plate has the open flow ports on the right-hand side of the plate when looking at the gasketed face. The two ports closed by the gasket are on the left-hand side. The plate orientation indicating 'dimples' in each edge of the plate are ABOVE the plate centre. Plate Orientation ‘dimples' provide a ready indication, when looking along the side of an assembled plate pack, as to which are right-hand and left-hand plates by checking that the 'dimples' are above or below the plate centres, respectively. Plate References which are stamped adjacent to the hanging eye at the top of the plate correspond with those shown on Fig. 4, Plate Reference Chart, and also the Plate Arrangement Drawing supplied with the machine. Note: Plates manufactured from a material other than 316S16 stainless steel have an identification code stamped or engraved in the hanging eye area. Reference to this code will enable APV to determine material, material certificates, year of manufacture, etc. C5)) 2-UH11 \ ont 5 : \ (ts a, ee \ ct } filly fp + Ng ¢ | : ( (b) End Plate (a) Flow Plate Fig. 3 Paraflow Plates Type SR1 é x © (6) tat i ee te Ri - PLATES MUST BE ARRANGED ALTERNATELY LEFT AND RIGHT. FOR CONVENIENCE ON THIS DRAWING, WHERE BLOCKS OF R AND LAA PLATES OCCUR, THE TOTAL NUMBER OF EACH IS GIVEN. @® SLAW Cd) BLANKIE HEA Co @atycou. corr @i7s? JI@6@ GYco. in @ ies? - oF’ @- PASSE | ISO? GLYCOL - 2@OFIC | loeS° GNYCoL-2OFiIOo ELEVATION OF PLATE ARRANGEMENT ‘ “eo NOTES: LIQUID RATE : oo) SERRE 77 cow : DB K” TENS ~ > . a y 3.@ THIS MODEL HEAT EXCHANGER IS DESIGNED TO OPERATE WITH METAL TO METAL CONTACT = “es Rae ae BETWEEN PLATE SURFACES, ALL SUPPORT 1S ae DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES : FROM PLATE CROSS OVER POINTS AND NOT Lae FRAME FOUNDATION€ | 1, FROM GASKET SEAL. THEREFORE THIS MACHINE UES. - BOLT ne LOCATIONS: t /4” [6] ’ MUST ALWAYS BE TIGHTENED TO A DEAD HARD ay NOZZLE CENTERLINE CONDITION BEFORE OPERATION. THE PLATAGE oy : ; + Vg @ hate ticag SO ease een eee dn OS cae SPACE OUMENSIONS fa" [3] DIM. SHOWN IS NOMINAL ONLY. DUE TO PLATE [279] 11 MFG. TOLERANCES PLATAGE CAN VARY +0.005” PER PLATE. : sees 4. INSTALL PLATES ALTERNATING LEFT-AND RIGHT. Q (4) 1 ¥e" [29] - cs 5. THIS MODEL HEAT EXCHANGER IS TIGHTENED roo LAA /S0 ure USING WRENCH ON HEX NUTS AT THE FOLLOWER 1-LSBS/so “aed ae? + BND CONLY. be Lec Sq. oe ® 6. CUSTOMER'S PIPING TD FOLLOWER OR CONNECTOR SL APA ce GRID NOZZLES MUST ALLOW FOR FREE MOVEMENT WHEN UNIT IS OPENED FOR SERVICE AND PROVIDE FOR VARIATION OF THE TIGHTENED a el ee =a PLATAGE DIM.@ OF “8,” PER 100 PLATES. =— a : ae TE Pt 7, ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. DIMENSIONS =— IN BRACKETS ARE 7 3 : ; eam! ! on R C4 ee FRAME SIZE: FI] ee ie SSS TIE BAR MAT'L.: CS. poe og: es | MAX. OPERATING PRESSURE}IO@ PSL} = gg) = | @ PLATACE:ceY@™ INCHES tee MODEL SRSSMT 4" aot VOL. OF PRODUCT:I3.@ GaLs, | HEAT EXCHANGER aa lt WT.OF MACHINE DRY:12053 LBS. ne = — ee 7 oe "y WT.OF MACHINE FLOODED:1S3155 LBS. — sae Pick lh fay y EQUIPMENT, INC. y : D Oh € 395 FILLMORE AVE. 1 at [179] S : : TONAWANDA, NY Met < : : . ts “ c ‘ : + f [ 2th A. - Oe es ee ae ot ee & B te ¥ ty, ie _|2 Ap c Z v8 ! ie <= A |"e6,.-7 TLE BLOCK CommLEtec | Ye SG eed SEM Pags O58, = ke Dae Rae Be iat aS ca eT Sod SRL SSA tthe ay ee aa a a a er ore ore eae (Ee ————————————— ee PLATES MUST BE ARRANGED ALTERNATELY LEFT AND RIGHT. FOR CONVENIENCE ON THIS : _, DRAWING, WHERE BLOCKS OF + R AND LAA PLATES OCCUR, THE TOTAL NUMBER OF EACH IS GIVEN. SlhLYCOL. iKt oe 190° @! GlyYcoL. out (2 es O- < ec Ao® PASS oe 2 190° CLN/COL. - e or Bas. 2 Do. Pea Ios Glycol - fog OF 3a ELEVATION OF PLATE ARRANGEMENT IC 1. ALL PLATES VIEWED FROM GASKET SIDE. 2. END PLATES DENOTED BY LETTER K” PRECEDING SYMBOL . % 3.@ THIS MODEL HEAT EXCHANGER 1S DESIGNED TO OPERATE WITH METAL TO METAL CONTACT ae BETWEEN PLATE SURFACES, ALL SUPPORT IS - DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES co eee: FROM PLATE CROSS OVER POINTS AND NOT. > FRAME FOUNDATION ¢ FROM GASKET SEAL. THEREFORE THIS MACHINE ~ a es BOLT HOLE LOCATIONS: + /4 te] Pre: - MUST ALWAYS BE TIGHTENED TO A DEAD HARD NOZZLE CENTERLINE |), : CONDITION BEFORE OPERATION, THE PLATAGE i 4 FACE Laila tind. DIM. SHOWN 1S NOMINAL ONLY. DUE TO PLATE MFG, TOLERANCES PLATAGE CAN VARY +0 008” PER PLATE. “4. INSTALL PLATES ALTERNATING LEFT AND RIGHT. 5. THIS MODEL HEAT EXCHANGER 1S TIGHTENED. ee USING WRENCH ON HEX NUTS AT THe FOLLOWER 7 END ONLY. ea a Zo - eee 48- RAA/SO | 1- RAB/SO DIA. LIFT. | . Be = 24H’ ® seman 6. CUSTOMER'S PIPING TO FOLLOWER OR CONNECTOR : see de is - RAC/SO PLATAGE GRID NOZZLES MUST ALLOW FOR FREE MOVEMENT oe eS BeAs So WHEN UNIT IS OPENED FOR SERVICE AND == Reg a (3S PROVIDE FOR VARIATION OF THE TIGHTENED PLATAGE DIM.@® or + 4” PER 100 PLATES. rs. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. DIMENSIONS. IN BRACKETS { J] ARE INMDOR TM TER 0502060 METER ware FRAME SIZE: (rE BARR MATL: cs. _|MAX. OPERATING PRESSURE: IOOPSI. . @® PLATAGE: 24 PfeIncHES | VOL. OF PRODUCT:ebée.7 GALS. Wt OF MACHINE. DRY: wee te EQUIPMENT, INC.” «395 FILLMORE AVE. ca. NY 1 50. iy AaeSnSInInI SRI TURIEEN ee _adhes ane Sasi sat ELAR eee FUE REE Note: KROO ‘eo Unblanked (No Hole) = @ Right-Hond End Plates Plates represented with gasket uppermost. - -Blanked (Hole) = O Because of the dual nature of each plate the number of flow plate variants is double the number of plates actually made. For exor a left-hand flow plate coded 'LAB' becomes a right-hand flow plate coded 'RAC' simply by inverting the plate. All end - are formed simply by fitting end plate gaskets to unblank« plates. -~ Rafavanre Chart = 2-UHLL si ass dhipeaaaiesieasaaenear eae aemeame tana eniannaeetne aicamemmn se nenemeeetommmttee imate al San an PLATES MUST BE ARRANGED ALTERNATELY LEFT AND RIGHT. FOR CONVENIENCE ON THIS DRAWING, WHERE BLOCKS OF R AND LAA PLATES OCCUR, THE TOTAL NUMBER OF EACH IS GIVEN. BLAKIK © @ BLAKIK Le) — OBLANK FIDL LOWERS ee : | “HEADS GLYCOL inl @ 190°@ @aiNecot owt @i75°? i . J | <1 @ GLYCOL In; @ ies? Se " : . % ea sue : : FASSES : oe “e I9FO°aGNYcow-2@oresS "yy ISS°oLy/ColL-2@ores GLYcoL CUT @ 185° @—4 ELEVATION OF PLATE ARRANGEMENT Ol [© > NOTES: pe a 1. ALL PLATES VIEWED FROM GASKET SIDE. 2. ND PLATES DENOTED BY LETTER K’PRECEDING ~ RCB RDB SYMBOL. Sell! S 3. Q@THIS MODEL HEAT EXCHANGER IS DESIGNED TO OPERATE WITH METAL TO METAL CONTACT. PLATE SYMBOLS DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCE ey BETWEEN PLATE SURFACES. ALL SUPPORT IS FRAME FOUNDATION AND BOLT HOLE LOCATIONS: + 4’ [6] FROM AW oven oats AMO NOT NOSE E MBuremnte GA cee ee eS FROM GASK EAL. THEREFORE THIS MACHINE oh Nak Dim: NOZZLE CENTER LINE AND FACE DIMENSIONS: + 76° [3] 7 MUST ALWAYS BE TIGHTENED TOA DEAD HARD CONDITION BEFORE OPERATION. THE PLATAGE : ey PER PLATE. — 4. INSTALL PLATES, ALTERNATING LEFT AND RIGHT HAND. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. DIMENSIONS IN BRACKETS [ ] ARE IN MILLIMETERS. 6. GUSTOMER'S PIPING TO FOLLOWER OR GONNECTOR GRID NOZZLES MUST ALLOW FOR FREE MOVEMENT WHEN UNIT IS OPENED FOR SERVICE AND PROVIDE FOR VARIATION OF THE TIGHTENED PLATAGE DIM. @® oF tm" PER 100 PLATES. FRAME SIZE: BS “Ti ERE NERO Sees Pe ot ta MAX. OPERATING PRESSUREHIOOPSI.| =—_ pa are ® PLATAGE:1c4 AcINCHES ie M ee SRIS VOL.OF PRODUCE G.o Gals. | HEAT EXCHANGER WT.OF MACHINE ORY *chaeo tes. fo 4 Lo ee WT-OF MACHINE FLOODED:e4~7ep LBS} Se mea, 245 ATINGS: Ie" @odss.1=— | 8 WO Teco = ST.MARYS Hx-4 oe ee (7 COMPANY INC. | _ THE ALASKA Sf4\o TONAWANDA INDUSTRIAL PARK ices ton ais ALTHOFRR! TY/ : ce fONAwanDa mY weisa | Sy ARK, C ai nee : FF OSBtS/30) _ . : DMACALUSC W.o. Sos og A oe ae . A Paes Se ere pS Bn Sett END PLATE (UNBLANKED) FLOW PLATES FOLLOWER Fig. 5 Typical Flow Diagram - single-pass duties (8) 2-UH11 SERVICE OUT HEAD PRODUCT OUT > —-—< SERVICE IN with plain follower 2-uill THE APV COMPANY LIMITED 2-UH11 SECTION 2 - INSTALLATION GENERAL (1) As previously stated in the 'Health and Safety at Work' notes on the Introduction page in this handbook, protective devices must be included in the installation to safeguard the Paraflow from pressures in excess of the maximum working pressure given on the Plate Typing Program. These excess pressures can be caused by a homogeniser, centrifugal pump or any kind of positive pump; also when mains services provide varying pressures according to the number of take-off points in use. Note that centrifugal separators have pumping characteristics similar to centrifugal pumps. (2) The Paraflow {3 normally despatched as a fully assembled unit with the heat exchanger plates already assembled in the frame. In this case, all that remains is for the Paraflow to be fixed in the site position and connected up to process and service pipework. (3) When lifting the assembled Paraflow, hook the lifting gear through the two lifting eyes at the top of the machine, bearing in mind that Type SR10 and SR15, Frame size 3 with maximum platage, weigh 187 kg (412 1b). (4) If heat exchange plates are supplied separately from the assembled frame, they should be fitted in accordance with the instructions under headings 4 or 5 of this Section (Fitting Plates into Frame). These can also be used when the plates have been removed.from the frame for servicing purposes, such as re-gasketing. (5) When preparing the site for installation, ensure that there is adequate space on each side of the machine to allow easy access to the plates for fitting and removal and also to allow room for the swing of the ratchet spanner when tightening or slackening tie-bar nuts. (6) A suitable mounting bracket is required for the wall-mounting models Types SR1l and SR16 in order to give sufficient clearance for pipework connections. The A.P.V. Co. Ltd. can supply a bracket Code No. 312213. FRAME ERECTION - TYPES SR1O & SRI15 (1) If the Paraflow frame is not already assembled, the top bar must be fitted with its upper faces at 45° to the horizontal and the bottom bar with its sides square to the machine sides (see photographic illustration, Fig. 1). The assembly of the frame is quite straightforward by referring to the pictorial illustration, Fig. 8. (2) Mark out the position of the heat exchanger on the base where it is to stand. This should be of sufficient strength to carry the weight of the machine, when filled with process liquid, which can be of the order of 225 kg (500 1b) with maximum platage. (3) “The Paraflow can be fixed to the floor, if concrete, by two foundation bolts grouted into the concrete to coincide with the fixing holes in the Foot for Head Plate, or by Rawlbolts and Shields to secure the Foot to the floor. If on a metal framework, it can be bolted through the Foot to the framework. (10) THE APV COMPANY LIMITED 2-UH11 3. FRAME ERECTION - TYPES SR11 & SR16 (1) Mark the position of the heat exchanger on the vertical fixing surface and secure the mounting bracket to the vertical surface using suitable bolts. (2) If the Paraflow frame is not already assembled it can be built up on to the mounting bracket in the following manner. (3) Locate the four tie-bars (6, Fig. 8) through the Head Plate (1). Attach the Head Plate to the mounting bracket using 14mm bolts and nuts. Assemble the Top Bar and Bottom Bar (2) to the Head Plate and secure in position with washers (4) and nuts (3) after fitting the Lifting Eye (5) into position on the top bar (outside the head plate). (4) At this stage of ereccion, fit the heat exchange plates to the frame (see instructions 5 (4) to 5 (6)) after pushing the tie-bars back as far as they will go. (5) With an assembled heat exchanger, sling the Paraflow by means of the lifting eyes and raise it to the level of the mounting bracket. Secure the Paraflow to the mounting bracket by means of four 12mm bolts and nuts. Check that the machine is level by using a spirit level across the head plate and follower. i . FITTING PLATES INTO FRAME - TYPES SR10 & SRI15 (1) Remove the four tie-bar assemblies from the frame. Ensure that the follower is right back to the end of its travel. Lightly smear the top and bottom bars of the frame assembly with a thin film of Rocol White Lubricant Paste (for Type SR10) or graphite grease (for Type SR15). (2) Study the plate arrangement drawing (Plate Typing Program) supplied with the machine and fit the plates in accordance with the designated sequence, referring to Fig. 4, Plate Reference Chart for their orientation. Adopt the following method referring to Fig. 7 for guidance. (3) Hold the plate with the hanging eye cut-out at the top and the blanked out ports in their correct positions with the plate gasket facing towards the follower. Refer to plate arrangement drawing for position of ports. (4) Angle the plate edgewise from the vertical in the position shown in Fig. 7 (1). Hook the nearest plate hanging eye shoulder over the nearside edge of the plate hanging profile on the top carrying bar. (5) Tilt the lower edge of the plate away from the head at an angle sufficient to completely clear the bottom bar and then swing the plate back across the bottom bar, at the same time pushing slightly upwards against the underside of the top bar, Fig. 7 (2) and (3). This enables the hanging eye on the other shoulder to hook on to the opposite side of the top bar. (6) Lower the bottom edge of the plate down towards the head, locating the bottom cut-out in the plate over the bottom bar of the frame, Fig. 7 (4). Cla) THE APV COMPANY LIMITED 2-UH11 (7) Allow the plate to hang vertically from the plate hanging profile, Fig. 7 (5) and push the plate towards the head to allow the next plate to be fitted. Check plate against head for squareness and matching of ports. Any plate badly misaligned through distortion should be renewed. (8) The last plate to be fitted is the End Plate, illustrated in Fig. 3(b). This has a special gasket enclosing all four port positions. The gasket faces towards the follower. (9) When all plates have been assembled in the frame, run through the pack again to ensure that all plates are in the correct sequence and are facing towards the correct direction, as specified on the plate arrangement drawing. The plate orientation 'dimples' in the plate edges indicate which are right-hand and left-hand plates by being above or below the plate centres, respectively. With the pack correcdély assembled the ‘dimples’ should alternate above and below the plate centres, when looking along the side of the pack, to show that two R.H. or two L.H. plates have not been assembled next to each other. (10) With the plates correctly assembled in the frame, push the follower hard against the plates so that they are sandwiched tightly against the head. Replace the four tie-bars, fitting them through the head and then the follower. On Paraflow Type SR10, smear Rocol White Lubricant Paste on the threads of the tie-bars and also on the mating flanges of the tie-bar nuts and washers. On Paraflow Type SR15, use Mobiltac 81 waterproof grease for this purpose. FITTING PLATES INTO FRAME - TYPES SR1l & SR16_ (See Fig. 8) (1) Where only half, or less of the maximum number of plates is being used in the plate pack, proceed as follows: Remove the nuts (7) and washers (8) at the follower end of the four tie- bars (6) and slide them back through the head (1) as far as they will go. Ensure that the follower (9) is right back to the end of its travel and lightly smear the top and bottom bars (2) of the frame assembly with a thin film of Rocol White Lubricant Paste (for Type SR10) or graphite grease (for Type SRL15). (2) Proceed after this in accordance with instructions 4 (2) to 4 (9). With the plates correctly assembled in the frame, push the follower hard against the plates so that they are sandwiched tightly against the head. Return the four tie-bars to their original position, sliding them through the head and follower. Smear Mobiltac 81 waterproof grease on the threads of the tie-bars and also on the mating faces of the tie-bar nuts and washers. (3) Where more than half the maximum number of plates is being used it is not possible to load them all into the frame by the above method, therefore proceed as follows. Remove the nuts (7), washers (8), screws (16), washers (17) and lifting eye (5) and withdraw the follower (9) setting it on one side. In the interests of safety, this should be done by two men. Push the four tie-bars (6) back as far as they will go. (4) Study the plate arrangement drawing (Plate Typing Program) supplied with the machine and fit the plates in accordance with the designated sequence, referring to Fig- 4, Plate Reference Chart, for their orientation. (12) THE APV COMPANY LIMITED 2-UHL1 (5) Slide each plate on to the frame with the hanging eye engaged around the top bar and the bottom cut-out located over the bottom bar. Push the plate towards the head, taking care not to buckle the plate, to allow the next plate to be fitted. (6) The last plate to be fitted is the End Plate, illustrated in Fig. 3(b). This has a special gasket enclosing all four port positions. The gasket faces towards the follower. (7) When all plates have been assembled in the frame, run through the pack again to ensure that all plates are in the correct sequence and are facing towards the correct direction, as specified on the plate arrangement drawing. The plate orientation 'dimples' in the plate edges indicate which are right-hand and left-hand plates by being above or below the plate centres, respectively. With the pack correctly assembled, the ‘dimples' should alternate above and below the plate centres, when looking along the side of the pack, to show that two R-H. or two L.H. plates have not been assembled next to each other. (8) With the plates correctly assembled in the frame, lift the follower back into position on the top bar (2) with the cut-out at the bottom located over the bottom bar. Push the follower hard against the plates so that they are sandwiched tightly against the head. Replace the lifting eye (5), washers (17) and screws (16) and tighten into position. ‘Return the four tie-bars to their original positions. On Paraflow Type SR11l, smear Rocol White Lubricant Paste on the threads of the: tie-bars and also on the mating flanges of the tie-bar nuts and washers. On Paraflow Type SR16, use Mobiltac 81 waterproof grease for this purpose. PLATE PACK TIGHTENING (1) Fit the tie-bar nuts and washers and run them up to the follower by hand. The internal pressure of the plate pack must be at atmospheric before tightening commences. Using the ratchet spanner provided, tighten each nut by an equal amount on alternate sides so as to keep the follower as parallel to the head as_ possible. Check by making frequent measurements at the top and bottom of the plate pack. (2) Continue tightening by equal amounts until the nominal platage dimension, given on the Plate Typing Program, is reached. At this stage, the gaskets are all fully compressed, the plates are in firm metal-to- metal contact and the correct flow gaps are achieved. This is essential for maximum heat-transfer efficiency and long life of plates and gaskets. PRESSURE TESTING It is often more convenient to pressure test the plate pack using an independent test pressure supply rather than connecting to the main process and service pipelines. It will be necessary to fit special test blanks to the ports filling the plate pack from the bottom ports and venting at the top ports. Unused ports must be blanked off and drain valves fitted at the lowest point of the inlet line. The pressure supply line should incorporate a pressure relief valve, set to the maximum test pressure required, and a pressure gauge. (13) THE APV COMPANY LIMITED 2-UH11 (1) Interconnect and fill both sides of the plate pack using a low pressure supply (not more than 1 bar pressure). Close the top vents and slowly increase the supply pressure, at a rate of change not greater than 4 bar/min, until the test pressure, stated on the Plate Typing Program, is reached. This should be maintained for a minimum period of 15 minutes while the plate pack is monitored for leakage. (2) If leakage occurs, do not tighten the plate pack further at this stage. Mark the location on the plate pack, reduce the internal pressure slowly to atmospheric and drain both sides of the plate pack. (3) Disconnect any supply line connections from the follower, open the plate pack and remove the plates in the affected area. Examine the plates and gaskets. The most likely trouble is dirt or small unwanted particles across the gasket faces. If completely clean, examine the gaskets for non-adhesion to plates in places, for splits or pitting or other damage. Damaged gaskets can be renewed by re-gasketing the existing plates but plates which have been distorted or suffered other damage must be renewed; they are not repairable. After rectifying the trouble and replacing the plates correctly, close the plate pack, re-make the connections to the follower and re-tighten as before. Re-test as specified in 7.(1). (4) If the problem still occurs, further tightening can be undertaken to effect a leakproof seal. Tighten the plate pack, as in sub-section 6, by one fifth of the difference between the nominal and minimum platage dimensions stated on the Plate Typing Program. Again check for plate pack leakage as in 7.(1). i (5) Should further leakage occur, continue tightening by one fifth increments of the difference between nominal and minimum platage dimensions and pressure-testing after each incremental tightening until a seal is obtained. On no account must the plate pack be compressed to below the minimum platage dimension. (6) Should leakage still occur when at minimum platage dimension, do not attempt further tightening. The correct procedure is to mark the location on the side of the plate pack, open the pack and remove the plates in the affected area. Examine the gaskets and plates. Ensure that no dirt has got on to the gasket faces when the pack was closed and re-tightened in 6 (3). If the gaskets and plates are perfectly clean and free from damage, the only likely cause is reduced thickness gaskets probably due to constant compression in service. Carry out re-gasketing as necessary (see Section 4 - Maintenance (Regasketing)). (7) Re-assemble the plate pack and re-tighten as before to the nominal platage dimension. Again, carry out pressure testing and a seal should be obtained without further tightening. When leakproof conditions have been obtained, drain the heat exchanger plate pack and remove the test connections. (8) Once the plate pack has been correctly assembled and tightened, a good method of providing a ready visual check for future reference is to paint a thick diagonal line on to the plate edges across the complete plate pack from head to follower. If this is done on one side of the machine only, an immediate visual check is provided to indicate any of the following discrepancies: (14) THE APV COMPANY LIMITED 2-UH11 (a) One or more plates out of sequence. (b) A plate inserted the wrong way round or upside down. (c) Replacement plates inserted in the pack and not yet marked. (d) Missing or extra plates. (9) On Paraflows Types SR15 & SR16. check that the tie-bars are still coated with Mobiltac 81 grease and make up any deficiency if necessary. Fit the polythene sleeve (18) and the polythene cap (19) to the end of each tie-bar. On Paraflows Types SR1O & SRI11, this procedure is unnecessary, as the tie-bars are stainless steel and the Rocol White Lubricant Paste can either be left on, or cleaned off, as desired. EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS The Paraflow should now be ready for connection of external pipework, whether it has been received fully assembled or has just been assembled in accordance with the foregoing instructions. If it is part of an APV engineered scheme, drawings of the external pipework connections will be available. If it is supplied as an individual unit it should be connected into the user's own installation bearing in mind the following points. (1) A suitable pressure relief valve should be fitted in any inlet pipeline to the machine where there is any risk that the pressure could rise above the maximum working pressure of the_machine. The relief valve should be bench set at a pressure not greater than the maximum working pressure of the machine (see Plate Typing Program). (2) To enable external pipework connections to be made to the follower, pipeline flexibility must be provided. This compensates for thermal expansion and contraction of the plate pack and frame, under operating conditions, particularly in a large frame containing maximum platage. (3) All connections to the follower must be directly fitted with 90° bends in order to clear the tie-bars and the top and bottom bars. On the Types SR11 and SR16 Paraflows, 90° bends are also required on the head- plate connections in order to clear the wall or other vertical surface on which the Paraflow has been mounted. (4) All pipework loads must be supported remote from the frame. (5) If the heat exchanger has been supplied with a spray deflector screen this must be in position at all times whilst the machine is in use. CTS) 2-UH11 - Fr HOOK IN AND _ PUSH UP 4 HEAD FOLLOWER GASKET SIDE Ga IF Oye — OF PLATE 7 TOP BAR BOTTOM BAR PUSHING UP ~ Ci tN wor KEEP ON <> SEAR INET ne 2 Peas! SWING ACROSS 3 hiv! fe, i he LOWER AND ALLOW PLATE TO HANG 4 33 ne =3 Wehht So is ib Ste sda Lak =< - 3 LOCATE OVER SD z 4 BOTTOM BAR 5 E4 4 od CN ; _ Fig. 7 Fitting Plates into Frame (16) THE APV COMPANY LIMITED 2-UH11 SECTION 3 - OPERATIONAL NOTES 4 1. GENERAL (1) The procedure for starting up the heat exchanger will depend upon the installation in which it is used, but will be similar for all conditions provided that the process and service liquids are within the duty temperature ranges for which the equipment is designed (see information on Plate Typing Program supplied with the machine). dee! wo aie 2 hed da (2) Assuming that the heat exchanger has been correctly installed, that pipelines have been connected and that the installation has been checked and all associated plant components are in a ready-to-use state, it is ae ad 4 & recommended that the following final checks are made: ; a Plate Pack Visually check for completeness, 3 correct assembly and any signs of : a leakage. ‘ é 3 ¥ Pipe Connections Check for secureness. os (3) Under normal running conditions, the heat exchanger will continue to perform its specified function until such time as the plates need cleaning or require re-gasketing. (4) In some applications, deposits may form upon the plate surfaces and this fouling will be indicated by diminished heat exchanger performance. (5) Re-gasketing will be necessary when the plate gaskets have aged and become worn; indication will be given by leakage. i j 4 4 / 2 2. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (1) If the heat exchanger has been supplied with spray deflector screens, these should be fitted at all times while the machine is in use. If protective screens have not been supplied ensure that, when high pressure steam is connected to the heat exchanger for curing the adhesive after re- gasketing, temporary screens or other protective devices are provided to protect personnel in the event of sudden gasket failure. (2) The maximum working pressure of the machine and the maximun flow rates must not be exceeded. ~These details are given on the Plate Typing Program. Ensure that no undue pressure fluctuations occur in primary or secondary fluid lines following start-up. This can occur if pumps are switched into the system too rapidly or valves are slammed over. All pressure changes in the system should be carried out gradually and never at a rate of change greater than 4 bar per minute. Piet AS Rei cs Rh MR Tid (3) Protective devices should be included in the installation to safeguard the Paraflow from fortuitous excess pressures. pis RS (18 ) by ibe. FERRIS fas ito AGRA Rak BA &: THE APV COMPANY LIMITED 2-UH11 CLEANING THE PARAFLOW (1) Unnecessary plate damage can be caused by the incorrect or indiscriminate use of cleaning agents, coolants and waters containing high levels of chloride salts. If in doubt on the suitability of a product for a particular application, advice should be obtained from The A.P.V. Company Limited, or their local appointed agent. (2) The presence of water hardness salts in the heat exchanger can reduce the overall heat-transfer efficiency of the heat exchanger plates over a period of time. Mineral scale can be precipitated out during the thermal processes and accumulate on the surfaces of the heat exchanger plates, providing an excellent key for other sotl depositions, thus resulting in diminished heat exchanger performance. (3) If a softened water supply is not available, the heat-transfer efficiency may be maintained by periodic circulation through the system of a suitable chemical agent. (4) Types SR10 and SR11 only (i) On hygienic duties, the Paraflow should normally be cleaned at the end of each process run taking care to.ensure that all solids are flushed from the plants Sterilising can be carried out immediately after cleaning or prior to the next process run. Hypochlorite sterilising agents should not be left in the machine, due to the risk of corrosion of stainless steel plates. : (ii) The use of steam for sterilisation is not recommended for routine process runs as there are certain disadvantages and possible dangers associated with this method. Various publications are available from The A.P.V. Company Limited dealing with the Cleaning and Sterilising of Paraflows according to the type of duties for which they are used. (5) Types SR15 and SR16 only (i) On industrial duties, the Paraflow will normally be required to operate for long periods in between strip-down examination and cleaning. Plate cleaning is more properly dealt with under the Maintenance Schedule. (19) rabid eed tS cu Seach es a iis cata tetas cat seeds, Beh dane Mbit a Oe THE APV COMPANY LIMITED 2-UH11 SECTION 4 - MAINTENANCE GENERAL (1) Maintenance for a Paraflow heat exchanger can be divided into two distinct categories, viz: (a) Preventive maintenance carried out on a routine basis to a planned schedule. (b) Repairs of a specific nature and general overhaul, carried out as a result of failure or impaired performance. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE* & (1) The preventive maintenance scheme for this heat exchanger refers to those items which are likely to fail or deteriorate over a period of time when the assembly is used within the limitations of its design rating. (2) Preventive maintenance, involving as it does regular checks of various points on the machine, can help reduce the extent and cost of subsequent shut-downs. Attention should be given to checking for corrosion on the painted steel components, cleaning and repainting where necessary, also to checking tightness of tie-bars and floor-or wall-fixing bolts. On Types SR15 and SR16 Paraflows the threads on the tie-bars should be kept coated with Mobiltac 81 or similar grease at all times. (3) As the heat exchanger may be used on widely differing products, processes and running times, it is not possible to give a specific time scale to the various maintenance operations. They are, however, sub- divided on a relative basis into short, medium and long periods of operation and it will be necessary for the person implementing this scheme to establish a time scale to suit the operating conditions. (4) The ‘spares requirements'-shown are based on an average -duty and an average 8-hour daily run for hygienic applications and a 24-hour day duty with continuous running for up to 1 year for industrial applications. (5) Where a number of identical heat exchangers are installed at the same location it will not be necessary to carry complete sets of spares for the total number of heat exchangers. (6) It is important to remember that the items recommended to be carried as spares are rubber, or synthetic rubber and are prone to deterioration when stored. Care should be taken not to expose. rubber components to extremes of temperatures, sun or strong light, outdoor air. or_atmospheres containing ozone or corrosive gases (e.g. chlorine). ~ = ~2. *Note Further information and advice on Preventive Maintenance is available from The A.P.V. Company Service Department. (20) WPS Dae URS Tee 1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE OO eRe OS ne On Se SCHEDULE Preventive Maintenance Intervals Between Checks Spares Requirement Description | For one For two of Item Short Medium Long year | years | Head = Touch up paintwork if Repaint all over = necessary i Follower - Touch up paintwork if Repaint all over - = necessary + End Support - Touch up paintwork if Repaint all over - = (W.F.) necessary Top Bar and Clean thoroughly and Check tightness of fixing = = Bottom Bar re-lubricate as in y nuts Section 2.4.(1) or Section 2.5.(1) | Pipe Union - Check tightness of pipe - - = Fittings union fittings on head d foll r | and followe I Tie-Bars Coat all threads with - Examine condition of - as Mobiltac 81 grease, tie-bar nuts and washers on industrial machines and renew, if necessary only Port Rings - Check for collapsed - 2 sets 4 sets peaks, splits or (SR10/11) | (SR10/11) hardening 1 set 2 sets (SR15/16) | (SR15/16) | ne + Plates & See Notes A and B in this Section Gaskets Also refer to Instruction Manue' 2-IMl (Re-gasketing) = = Spray Deflector Always ensure that these are fitted and properly attached = = Screens (W.F.) when heat exchanger is operating | (W.F. = Where fitted) 283/9:29 : 3 © a *a°d°’V FHL G3LINI1 ANVdKOO TIHN-Z : THE APV COMPANY LIMITED 2-UH11 NOTES (A) Inspection and checking for damaged plates and gasket extrusion should be carried out periodically as follows: (i) Inspect the plate pack for bent or deformed plate edges or damaged hanging eyes. Minor damage may be disregarded, but major damage i causing excessive leakage necessitates plate and gasket replacement. | (ii) Check for gasket extrusion. If apparent, this is indicative of a | damaged plate or failed gasket adhesion, which can be caused when ‘ plate dimension is below the permissible minimum or if the machine | has been subjected to internal pressures above the specified maximum i working pressure. If the plate is undamaged, it should be i regasketed. ’ (B) Any scale or deposition on the plates must be removed with an approved cleaning agent, either by total immersion or by application with a bristle- or plastic-type brush. DO NOT use steel wool, wire brushes or abrasives of any kind; severe corrosion will result. Severe corrosion or perforation of the plate surface necessitates the fitment of replacement plates complete with gaskets. PARAFLOW PLATES ARE NOT REPAIRABLE. Note: Advice as to suitable cleaning methods, for various applications, can be obtained from The A.P.V. Company Limited. In certain cases, the trade names and suppliers of suitable proprietary cleaning agents can be provided, together with instructions for use. 3. FAULT FINDING CAUTION: Before attempting to open the heat exchanger plate pack, prior to removing the plates, ensure that the supplies of primary and secondary process liquids to the machine are vented and.fully drained. npn incite se a A ALS Ab La ead baad teas Procedure to Open Plate Pack (1) Disconnect and remove pipework connections on the follower. (2) Remove the protective plastic tubes and caps from the ends of the tie-bars on industrial machines and check that there is sufficient Mobiltac 81 grease on the threads. On hygienic machines, re-apply or replenish the Rocol White Lubricant Paste on the tie-bar threads, if necessary. pe hee Bs: (3) Using the ratchet spanner provided, slacken each tie-bar nut at the follower end by an equal amount so as to keep the follower as parallel to the head as possible. Continue to slacken off the nuts oF with the spanner until they can be run down the tie-bars by hand. MERA NES oes J (22) Plate pack leakage Incorrect plate arrangement Plate pack requires tightening Worn, faulty or distorted gasket(s) Foreign’ bodies on gasket faces Working pressure exceeded Check plate arrangement Check platage dimension and re-tighten, if necessary. See Section 2.6, also Plate Typing Program. Renew Clean gasket faces Adjust working pressure Leakage at flow ports Fluctuating outlet temperature in primary liquid line Faulty joint rings Loose nut(s) Perforated plate(s) allowing intermixing of liquids Variations in secondary liquid throughput Renew Tighten all nuts evenly ! - Renew plate(s) Stabilise throughput Low output pressure in primary liquid line Scaling or deposition on plates Blockage in plate pack or inlet line Clean plate surfaces Check and clean as necessary Internal leakage or intermixing of primary and secondary liquids Perforated plate surface allowing intermixing of liquids. Worn gaskets with blocked leakage grooves Renew plate(s) Unblock leakage grooves or renew worn gaskets (23) THE APV COMPANY LIMITED 2-UHL1L (4) The plates may be removed from the frame by a reversal of the GC procedure outlined in the relevant part of Section 2 relating to "Fitting Plates into Frame'. If necessary, the plates may be separated using a flat blade, care being necessary so as not to damage the plates. The plates should be removed one at a time and not in a bundle otherwise damage may result. Take care to keep the plates in their correct order as they are removed from the machine. FAULT DIAGNOSIS CHART - FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY THE a 4. | 4 4 i @ 4 3 4 “a A 3 Sia I ae 3 3 a APV COMPANY LIMITED 2-UH11 EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE (1) Any leakage from the heat exchanger should be investigated as to the cause; the Paraflow should not leak in service. Excessive leakage should be investigated immediately and rectified as soon as possible. (2) When leakage is considered to be not due to any external cause, e.g. shock loading due to slamming of pneumatic valves in system, etc., check tightness of plate pack and carry out any further tightening considered necessary. (3) After opening the plate pack, examine the gaskets in the area of the leakage for:- (a) mnon-adhesion of gasket to plate: (b) split in gasket: (c) deformed gasket: any of which will necessitate re-gasketing. (d) dirt or foreign bodies across gasket faces: clean faces of affected gaskets. =? (4) If the gaskets appear to be satisfactory, plates in the suspect area for:- check the surface of the (a) (b) local corrosion, or plate surface perforations. Either of the above conditions will require the fitment of replacement plate(s) complete with gasket(s). RE-GASKETING For full details on plate re-gasketing procedure refer to APV™Pubri€at ion 2-IM1, Re-gasketing Paraflow Plates. Sins EMTS © After re-gasketing and re-assembling the Paraflow plates the cement on the re-gasketed plates must be cured whilst in the plate pack. Refer to Publication 2-IMl. With the machine at room temperature and the internal pressure at atmospheric, tighten the plate pack as specified in Section 2.6 of this publication. After tightening the plate pack, proceed with pressure testing as specified in Section 2.7 of this publication. (24) BBLS ate eis to ce A ake at eee cats 0 She Latch dimebiaden tes» deal EWR ey Haase. bod @ is THE APV COMPANY LIMITED 2-UH11 4. 5. EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE (1) Any leakage from the heat exchanger should be investigated as to the cause; the Paraflow should not leak in service. Excessive leakage should be investigated immediately and rectified as soon as possible. (2) When leakage is considered to be not due to any external cause, e.g. shock loading due to slamming of pneumatic valves in system, etc., check tightness of plate pack and carry out any further tightening considered necessary. (3) After opening the plate pack, examine the gaskets in the area of the leakage for:- a (a) non-adhesion of gasket to plate: 0 (b) split in gasket: (c) deformed gasket: any of which will necessitate re-gasketing. (d) dirt or foreign bodies across gasket faces: clean faces of affected gaskets. _ (4) If the gaskets appear to be satisfactory, check atue surface of the plates in the suspect area for:- (a) local corrosion, or (b) plate surface perforations. Either of the above conditions will require the fitment of replacement plate(s) complete with gasket(s). RE-GASKETING For full details on plate re-gasketing procedure refer to APV Publication 2-IM1, Re-gasketing Paraflow Plates. After re-gasketing and re-assembling the Paraflow plates the cement on the re-gasketed plates must be cured whilst in the plate pack. Refer to Publication 2-IMl. With the machine at room temperature and the internal pressure at atmospheric, tighten the plate pack as specified in Section 2.6 of this publication. After tightening the plate pack, proceed with pressure testing as specified in Section 2.7 of this publication. (24) OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR WASTE HEAT RECOVERY ST MARY F83-416 GENERAL INFORMATION ARCHITECT: Polar Consultant Alaska, Inc. 2735 E. Tudor Road Suite 210 Anchorage, Alaska 99507 (907) 561-1933 ENGINEER: Polar Consultant Alaska, Inc. 2735 E. Tudor Road Suite 201 Anchorage, Alaska 99507 (907) 561-1933 GENERAL CONTRACTOR: J.B. Mechanical P.O. Box 2549 Kirkland, Washington 98033 (206) 822-5548 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR; J.B. Mechanical P.O. Box 2549 Kirkland, Washington 98033 (206) 822-5548 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS_ Energy Management Systems 1011 Aurora Drive Fairbanks, Alaska 99701 (907) 456-8000 Curtis Deltrol Federal Honeywell Honeywell Lectric Lite Robertshaw Robertshaw Robertshaw Robertshaw Robertshaw Robertshaw United Electric TABLE OF CONTENTS Waste Heat Recovery St. Mary CUS 8 20108-82 300GC 1044884 T678A1080 Model LL800 CXT-8603 DWT-8204 FMS-500 AZM-8401 T316 T317 100-52 V6800 J21K Base Relay Siren Fitting Remote Bulb Controller Astro Flash Integral Controller Detector Fire Alarm Control Panel Actuator Motor Temp Controller Temp Controller Well ’ Valve Differential Pressure Switch CUS8 & CUS11 3. and 11-Pin Unitized @.ivee Socket Assemblies FICATIONS AL GR. rating: 10 amps, 300 volts. track: TR2 48" length holds up to 30 CUS8 sockets and 21 CUS11 sockets maximum. terminals: 6-32 screws with captivated traveling nut. wire: up to 12 AWG wire. sockets: CUS8 8-pin receptacle for 2PDT octal relay or timer; CUS11 11-pin receptacle for 3PDT octal relay or timer. nO Be temas wc nee . Se Babee — 2 s oH zy PAS op . ovens wei] CUS12 & CUS16 a@ 8 and 11-Pin Unitized Square-Base Relay-Type Socket Assemblies SPECIFICATIONS 15 amps, 250 volts. (CSA rated 15 amps, 125 volts) TR3 5 48” length holds up to 28 CUS12 or CUS16 sockets. unalx No. 6-32 screws with captivated traveling nut. wire: to No. 14 AWG. sockets: CUS12—11-pin receptacle for 3PDT square base barrier-type plug-in relays. CUS16—8-pin receptacle for 2PDT square-base, barrier-type plug-in relays. e s- RS2,RS4&RS6 . wG 10, 16, and 22-Pin Square-Base “= Miniature Relay-Type Socket Assemblies SPECIFICATIONS rating: 5S amps, 125 volts. (UL rated 3 amps, 125 volts) track: TR1 48” length holds up to 24 RS2 sockets, 21 RS4 sockets and 16 RS6 sockets. - : t inals: No. 2-56 screws with clamp—1/4” C to C spacing. tf : a peered F oe to No. 16 AWG. # 1, (2A . 2 =< RS2—10 pin receptacle to accept miniature 2PDT 5 : | “i = relays with latching coils. af / z A IIS AS sai RS4—16 pin receptacle to accept miniature 4PDT _. au jt vous _! “ = ae relays with latching coils. om = pate wena RS6—22-pin receptacle to accept miniature 6PDT eee “— — te) celavs with latching coils. 2 t #=2-1/16 w =1-1/4 BZ BUZZER —— + oH F7/8 pa ~w Contacts Coil {3 @ j 1 Rating fT input Resistance | Nominal List , Stock No. Series Arrang. 2 Continuous or intermittent duty buzzer which buzzes when coll is energized. Operated on | (Amps) Voltages (Ohms) Power Price 50/60 cycle AC voltage. Mounting: No. 6-32 tapped core. Recognized under the Compo- zone Bz 12Vvac 32 3.0VA nents Program of Underwriters Laboratories, 2000082 62 24VAC 132 3.0VA Inc. (File No. £37066). CSA listed (File No. 20000-83 8z 120VAC 2,250 3.0VA 20690). —* 100U/101U SERIES = i= 7 L Contacts Coil =| ee : r <a ‘ Rating Input Resistance | Nominal List | Stock No: Series | ieteoa (Amps) Voltages (Ohms) Power Price =} f 20062-84 101U SPOT 10A | 120VAC 2,250 2.0VA 2006384 100U DPOT 5A 120VAC 1,B00 2.2VA 2006482 101U OPOT 10A 24VAC 74 22VA 2006484 101U OPOT 10A 120VAC 1,800 22VA 20066-82 101U 3POT 10A 24VAC 74 2.2VA 20066-84 101U 3PDT 10A 120VAC 1800 22VA Small general purpose relay. Continuous duty 2006881 101U. SPDT 10A 12V0C 120 1.2W operation. Mounting: No. 6-32 stud and locat- 20068-84 101U SPOT 10A 110V0C 10,000 1.2W ing tab. Recognized under the Components Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 12V) : (File No. £37066). CSA listed (File No. 20690). pee Otay peor 104 A2v 08 4a nN 20070-84 101U DPOT 10A 110V0C 10,000 12W 105 SERIES T Contacts Coil | L =1-3/8 Tai = F ; aa . Rating Input Resistance | Nominal List . = 2 a mlockiNG: pores airens: (Amps) Voltages (Ohms) Power Price |. 2010682 105 SPDT 10A 24VAC 82 2.0VA WwW @ 2010684 105 SPOT 10A 120VAC 2,250 2.0VA 2010784 105 OPOT 5A 120VAC 1,800 22VA General purpose plug-in relay for continuous 2010881 105 DPOT 10A 12VAC 19 2.0VA Cy Opn en Foe cea Ue eiere 20108-82 105 ODPDT | 10A 24VAC 74 2.0VA NE eee 2010884 105 OPOT | 10A 120VAC 1,800 2.0VA Laboratories, inc. (File No. ose a 2010885 105 DPOT 10A 240VAC 6800 20VA 93) | @\ | Oy.’ 2011082 105 3POT 10A 24VAC 74 2.2VA O29 | | $33 } 2011084 105 3POT 104A 120VAC 1,800 2.2VA cS oe | “eS if } 2011085 105 3PDT 10A 240VAC 6 800 2.2VA (eee eee sroT oror wor 2011480 105 DPOT 104 6v0C 30 12W 20114381 105 OPOT 10A 12VDC 120 V2W BASE DIAGRAMS FOR 105 SERIES 2011482 105 DPDT 104 24V0C 472 120 yaa 2011483 105 DPDT | 10A 48V0C 1,800 1.2W ee" 2011484 105 OPOT 10A 110VDC 10,000 1.2W " 2011681 105 3POT 10A 12VDC 120 1.2W Le 2011682 105 3POT 10A 24VDC 472 V.2W | B-3 HOLD DOWN SPRING S/N 2017100 — $0.26 Net Any Oty. *NOTE: Add $ .40 to list for 105G Neoprene Gasket Version. Reales 105A SERIES # L =1-3/8 ; | ha, iets (w/Indicator Lamp) ee Contacts Coil : Rating Input Resistance | Nominal List A G soe ee Serves Arena: (Amps) Voltages {Ohms) Power Price TT 2011781 105A DPOT 10A 12VAC 19 22VA 2011782 105A OPOoT 104A 24VAC 74 22VA emails porparal giogin eeisy. whhisiteme\ con’ 20117-84 105A OPOT | 10A 120VAC 1,800 22VA it; ‘ voll See eee etic wecaontioal: onoeraineccons 2011884 | 105A | 3poT | 10A 120VAC 1800 | 22VA applied to coll, Recognized under the com- ponents Programm of Underwriters Laborator- ies, Inc. (File No. E37066). ALL DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL. Prices Subject to Change Without Notice. er owen CAN at 4 in i Py q ue LU QUN VAR UP URE Cont \ Soni? ater Vv o “ed Description and Application of Selecione Signaling Devices we 300 Series Basic Sound Unit The SelecTone 300 series are 172 basic units which may be used individually or as a signal system. They are particulariy useful in situations which require a 25 Of distinctive tone as in required to distinguish need for a different ton2 with another, thereby cre requirement. Typical! applications ar General Alarm, Evacue chemical processing incus:r high noise level or where a difierent sound is 21 n2arby signals. When conditions change or the is, the tone module can be immediately replaced na an entirely different signal to meet the new sncy werning, Fire alarm, Stari and Dismissal, Alerm and Faging backup alarms for Others are process control in vehicies, and where penetrating signals are necessary for warning or instruction. Model 300GC This model is for use on 24 volt AC/DC, 120 and 240 voit AC. li hasa built-in volume contro! ~. rermits use in areas where the 272 noise does not require the fuli sur Ostout. It is also capable of handling voice when operated with S30VSC SelecTone Commend d=s- 5: Model 300 12, 36, 48, 75, 125 ant control feature is no Model 320. The 75, 12 Model 300X Has UL approval for use in Class 1, Groups C and D gas atmospheres and Class I, Groups E, F, and G dust atmospheres Model 300XB Has UL approval for use in Cus \, Group B atmospheres containing hydrogen or gases or vapors of e€quivaient hazard such as manu fectured gas. Also, Clezs 1, Groups C and D gas atmospheres. Due to tts construction, this model can not be used with SelecTone Commend. Both models have an internal a3.n contro! and are for use on 24 volt AC/DC and 120 volt AC only. Bféeximum output tor tiodals 390X end 339XB is 104 d3 Model EM3 Extension Module V.nere the need is for a multiple signa!- ling device, this addition provid2s you vith the capability of up to 3 tones ov sznals from the same unit. This means that you czn monitor 3 different funz- tions with 1 signaling device at the seme time, such as steam pressure, water level, and oil pressure. Each 3 must be used with a SelecTon2 c Tne Extension Module may also be tured in conjunction with a SelecTone Command (described on the nexi peq2) to provide a combination of both local and remotely controlled sig- nals. This has application for in-plant warning or paging, and where there is a requirement for plant evacuation capa- bility for Civil Defense, fire, bomb or tornado aleri. REMOTE BULB, TEM- PERATURE COMPEN- SATED THERMOSTATS REGULATE TEMPERA- TURE OF AIR OR LIQUIDS IN DUCTS, PIPES, TANKS, AND BOILERS. For applications requiring accurate temperature con- trol of air or liquids where controller must be placed outside the sensing area. Typical uses include control of dampers and valves in heating, cooling, and heating-cooling systems. Maximum Ambient Operating Temperature: 125 F [52 C]. Fast response models available for use in return air duct operate approximately 4 times faster than standard models. Bulb Size: 1/2 x 4-3/16 in. [12.7 x 106.4 mm] for stand- ard models, 1/2 x 3-9/16 in. [12.7 x 90.5 mm] available for 55 to 175 F [13 to 79 C] models. Approximate Dimensions: 5-5/8 in. [142.9 mm] high, 2 in. (50.8 mm] wide, 2-5/8 in: [66.7 mm] deep. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; CSA certified—T675A, T678A. Standard ELECTRICAL RATINGS: T675A adjustable differential models and T678A— T675A,B; T678A CONTROLLERS 720V AC 240V AC Full Load 80 5.1 Locked Rotor | _480 30.6 T675A nonadjustable differential models—125 VA at 120/208/240V ac. T675B—125 VA at 240V ac pilot duty. T678A—Maximum Connected Load: 2000 VA. REPLACEMENT PART: 131524A Capillary Holder, for mounting a fast-response sensing element in an air duct. TRADELINE 190 ACCESSORIES: 107324A Capillary Holder for mounting a sensing bulb in an air duct; 8-3/8 inches [212.7 mm] long. 311266D Duct Bulb Holder. Immersion Well Assembly. To protect sensing bulb from mechanical or chemical damage when mounting in @ boiler or storage tank; copper; 4-3/4 inch [120.7 mm] insertion length; includes 112721 Tube Clip for clamping capillary tube to immersion well. 112622AA, 1/2-14 NPT external threads on spud. 112630AA, 3/4-14 NPT external threads on spud. Capillary Compression Fitting. To provide seal-off when mounting sensing bulb directly in a boiler or storage tank; brass; 5/8 inch [15.9 mm] thread length. 104484A, 1/2-14 NPT external threads on spud. 104484B, 3/4-14 NPT external threads on spud. 105900 T-strap for clamping sensing bulb to a pipe or similar mount. 7640HY Bag Assembly with standoff bracket for mount- ing the controller to an insulated duct. Q615A Weatherproof Enclosure. 801534 Calibration Wrench. continued next pege remote bulb controllers 16754,8; T678A continued TRADELINE mode's. ORDER CAPILLARY NUMBER CONTROL RANGE LENGTH AND SWITCHING MATERIAL T675A1045 20 ft [6.1 m] st. steel Spdt switch breaks R-B and makes R-W at set point on a temperature rise. T675A1102 127 | 20 ft (6.1 m] copper T675A1128 |160 to 260| 71 to 127{ 20 ft (6.1 m] st. steel T675A1136 Oto 100|-18 to + 38| 20 ft (6.1m). 1 fixed 0.6 fixed T675A1425 5510 175| 1310 79] 20 ft [6.1 m] copper 3.6 to 12 adj.| 2.0 to 6.7 adj. T675A1441 §5to175| 13to 79] 20 ft [6.1 m] st. steel T675A1458 55to175| 1310 79) 5Sft{t1.5m) copper 1 fixed 0.6 fixed 1675A15083 Oto 100/-18to+ 38] 5ft[1.5m] copper 1.7 to 5.6 adj. —I675A15162 -18 to + 38! 5 ft [1.5 m} copper 0.6 fixed T675A1524 13:0 79] 20 ft [6.1 m] copper 1675A15322 | 160 to 260} 7ito 127] 5ft (1.5m) copper 1.7 to 5.6 adj. Spst switch breaks at Set point on a temper- ature fall. 2 spdt switches oper- ating in sequence. Right switch breaks R-B and makes R-W at set point on a tempera ture rise, left switch breaks R-B and makes R-W if ternperature continues to rise through interstage differential. 7675415403 | 55to175| 13to0 79| 5S ft [1.5m] copper 93 | 3.6 to 12 adj.|_ 2.0 to 6.7 adj. T675A1 0 to 100} -18 to + 38| 20 fr [6.1 m] copper 52] 3to 10 adi. | 1.7 to 5.6 adj. 1675A1706> Oto 100} -18 to + 38! 5ft[1.5m] copper T675A17220 | 55to175| 13to 79) Sft{[1.5m] copper 93 | 3.6 to 12 adj.| 2.0 to 6.7 adi. T675A17710 | 55t0175| 13to 79] 5ft[1.5 m] copper 1675810029 - 1to + 10] 10 ft [3.0 m) copper Manual reset9 T678A1015 Oto 100} -18 to + 38} 20 ft [6.1 m] copper Each switch fixed at 3 F T678A1080 |160to 260] 71 to 127] 5Sft[1.5m] copper [1.7 C]. Adj. diff. between switches 3 to 10 F [1.7 to | 5.6 C). T678A1361 5510175] 13:0 79| 20 ft (6.1m) copper | 200 | 93] Each switch fixed at 3.6 F {2C]. Adj. diff. between switches 3 to 10 F [1.7 to 5.6 Cl T678A 14372 Oto 100} -18 to + 38} 5ft[1.5m) copper | 125] 52 Each switch fixed at 3 F (1.7 C]. Adj. diff. between switches 3 to 10 F [1.7 to 5.6 Cl T678A14458 | 5510175) 13to 79} 5ft[1.5m] copper | 200} 93] Each switch fixed at 3.6 F [2 C]. Adj. diff. between switches 3.6 to 12 F [2 to | 6.7¢} T678A14780 Oto 100] -18 to + 38) Sft [1.5m] copper | 125] 52] Each switch fixed at 3 F {1.7 C] Adj. diff. between switches 3 to 10 F [1.7 to 4 5.6C). T678A14940| 5510175} 13to 79) Sft {iS m] copper | 200] 93] Each switch fixed at 3.6 F T678A1627¢ Oto 100] -18 t0 + 38] 10 ft (3.0m) copper [125] 52] (2C). Adj. diff. between switches 3.6 to 12 F (2 to @ includes 107324A Bulb Holder. Fast response element. Includes 131524A Bulb Holder. Dual scale, showing Fahrenheit and Celsius sat point. 6.7}. dFactory-set and locked at 37 F (3 C]. Maximum ambient temperature 100 F (33 C]. Switch may be manually reset at 10 F {5.6 C] above set point. 12 ft [3.7 m) averaging element. f At element. Temperature should rise 10 F [5.6 C} above set point before resetting. TRADELINE 191 &) ast{ro flash, modei-r800 Astro Flash Mode! LL800 is a high intensity strobe light which pro- duces over 1% million candle power. It is four times brighter than most rotating beacons, yet requires only one-fourth the current — less than 242 amps at 12 volts. The low current drain conserves bat- teries and fuel since they can be used without running the engine. Astro-Flash used on a standard 12 volt system, will operate for 15 hours or longer with the engine off. Astro-Flash is engineered for long, maintenance free life, with no moving parts to wear out or freeze-up in sub-zero weather. Unique design allows units to run cool at all times. All units have a heavy-duty, spun aluminum case and come equip- ped with a patented, universal mounting plate for easy installation. Dome lens is an optically designed, high impact, plastic material. Lens retainer ring and screws are polished stainless steel. Astro-Flash units are also available with double-flash capability, 60 double flashes per minute. Ask for Model LL800-DF. LL800 is unexcelled for use on: *UTILITY SERVICE *AMBULANCES *GROUND SUPPORT VEHICLES *FIRE FIGHTING VEHICLES * WRECKERS EQUIPMENT *INDUSTRIAL eMAINTENANCE *SCHOOL BUSES EQUIPMENT THE COMPLETE HIGH INTENSITY TRUCKS *CONSTRUCTION *TOWER STROBE WARNING LIGHT *POLICE VEHICLES EQUIPMENT BUILDINGS, ETC. C t laste : vol 0 nde eee cs Ice: "42 voltdight- ee Geet ingen Ozinga Sesaed ore With 2eyOlt. 3B. volt: $8 ; Fel tevolteating ee anges One way tlode ta pie 28g if i itera qiighté é 50) pesanstalla ighewo (ae Z Ci Cui gitage r Pei ge eee hese Se rai Be agi) a; rae <a. Ei, OPERATING | pelslice aD see tetleen te yer See oa reise Oh rae peed POLLO SLOCELECLCULSICETELCELOELLES GUARANTEE Lectric Lites Company guarantees the flasher circuit for a period of one year from date of invoice. The guarantee is against defective parts and workmanship. This guarantee is void if the unit is abused or improperly instalied. Applies to Astro Flash and Nova Flash. BLOC TULLE GE GGT EOL ES PUG OP IOVG IVE Ol & 1 FOR FAST DELIVERY CALL 617/332-7961 INSTALLATION SHEET ® INTEGRAL TEMPERATURE CLIMATRONIC CONTROLLERS TYPE CXT CONTROLLERS CONTROLS COMPANY Seeee INSTALLATION—DIMENSIONS . Face-Mounted LED's indicate when controller is driving Fuse Cover Mounting Screw actuator-motor. Backplate Controller 4 = Conwolled-variable above setpoint. ¥v = Controlled-variable below setpoint. 1. Mounting location should be reasonably clean, dry and afford adequate access. 2. Remove the protective cover by turning slotted fasteners Y% turn. 3. Loosen Controller mounting screw and unplug Con- troller from the Backplate. 4. Mount Backplate to wall or Ring Panel. 5. Connect wires to appropriate terminals. 6. Plug Controller into Backplate, tighten mounting screw and replace protective Cover. im 103 mm (4%) 150mm (53) a T 96 mm(3i) /~— | a v | | | | 3 fixing holes 6mm(z)dia 4-22mm ( t)dia conduit entries CONTROLLERS CAN BE MOUNTED DIRECTLY ON TYPE ‘‘A’’ ACTUATOR-MOTORS USING KIT #B862-8204 ROBERTSHAW CONTROLS COMPANY «CONTROL SYSTEMS DIVISION 2 sir 3ic, eine wc CSD FORM NS-B-208 (iss. 11-77) “S$” TERMINAL ON SPRING RETURN CONTROL ACTUATORS ONLY. DETECTOR 120V 60H Temperature detectors for use with integral controllers are non-polarized; therefore, detector terminals are not marked. Factory-installed test link. Factory-installed links are provided between terminals 13 & 14 (setup) and terminals 17 & 18 (setback). To obtain system setup and/or setback, replace the appropriate link(s) with carbon resistors with a value of 10 ohms for each degree of setup or setback required. These resistors will normally be bypassed by a time clock or similar contact to restore normal operation. Obtain resistors locally. A factory-installed link is provided between terminals 15 & 16 and should remain in the circuit. A factory- installed 1690 ohm resistor is located between terminals 15 & 17. When more than one detector is wired to terminals 14 & 15 (averaging), this resistor must be replaced as follows: for two detectors, replace with an 845 ohm resistor (B833-8501). For three detectors, replace with a 562 ohm resistor (B833-8502). For four detec- tors, replace with a 422 ohm resistor (B833-8503). To obtain remote set point capability, remove the factory jumper installed between terminals 19 & 20 and in- stall the appropriate remote setting potentiometer between terminals 18 & 19. The factory-installed jumper between terminals 4 & 5 can be removed to provide override of the actuator motor. See applications manual for specific application. Wiring of controller to actuator-motor varies with system configuration and application. See applications manual for additional information. Continuous 24 Vac power is required on the “S” terminal on all spring-return motors for normal operation. With 24 Vac removed, the motor will spring-return to its normal position. For conductor length and installation requirements, refer to the applicable detector and actuator-motor in- stallation sheets. 1. Remove the controller from the backplate and check wiring with applicable shop drawings to insure that wiring is correct and all necessary links and resistors are in place. 2. Turn on the system and check that the correct voltage is being supplied to the controller. 3. | Check between low-voltage terminals and ground to insure that no voltage is present. 4. Check for opens or shorts between low-voltage terminals. Resistance between detector terminals should be between 1600 and 1800 ohms. 5. Replace controller on backplate. 6. Set integral action adjustment to position 1 and the set point adjustment to maximum. Observe motors for proper rotation and sequencing. Move set point adjustment to minimum setting and again observe motors for proper rotation and sequencing. 7. Readjust set point to correspond with applicable shop drawings. Adjust integral action to provide fastest control ac- tion consistent with stable control. If control action is too slow, i.e., sluggish, move integral action toward position 1. If control action is too fast, i.e., it hunts, move toward position 10. MAINTENANCE ; For optimum performance and maximum efficiency, a periodic tuning of the system and control components is recommended. For assistance contact your local Robertshaw office or write to National Service Manager at the ad- dress shown below. ROBERTSHAW CONTROLS COMPANY * CONTROL SYSTEMS DIVISION .°s ey." ) BOX 27606 ¢ RICHMOND VIRGINIA 25261 J 2 INSTALLATION CONTROLS COMPANY °*..,..°"° SHEET TEMPERATURE (WATER) CLIMATRONIG WEATHER SENSORS DETECTORS ; INSTALLATION-—DIMENSIONS DWT: DETECTOR, WATER TEMPERATURE = fee tay nee aS ~ (1-5/8") | Ss x TT | é 4" MPT “eye *DWT-8202:5" (12.7 \ 3.3/8" 7cm) \ . . ¢ ) 4" MPT *DWT-8204:5" (12.7-m) WELL RETAINING SCREW *DWT-8304 :8" (20.32cm) Cover *DWT-8305:8" (20.32cm) ~— 1/2"-14 FPT Screws Ywy"-14 FPT ro Mounting strap details 63mm(24") —(1-5/8"), ~ = oo themal © \ } : e | ducto} —_ )\ it . 85mm | — { —_ i | a Uae 2004" pipe | 2 | | 4 Cover fixing screws aig \ 1\\i _ | Ss a / Keep insulation clear of detector —azg / u | | (3-3/8) "14 FPT \ "14 FPT 5mm(3/16") Ye" 14 FPT —~ \y"-14 FPT ~ ROBERTSHAW CONTROLS COMPANY * CONTROL SYSTEMS DIVISION +’ccs Seo: «icwono, vaca 226 WIRING—CALIBRATION Climatronic DWT and DWS Temperature Detectors may be used with any of the following controllers: CXT-SERIES CXC-SERIES COC-8704 Climatronic DOT, Detectors may be used with any of the following controllers: CXC-SERIES COC-8704 Since these Temperature Detectors utilize non-polarized Thermistors, there is no need to match polarity when connecting wires to the two terminals in the Detector. CONTROLLER CONTROLLING DETECTOR CONTROLLER DETECTOR COMPENSATING DETECTOR OWS doT When connecting Climatronic Detectors to their respective controllers, the chart below must be used to not exceed the maxi- mum allowable conductor lengths. Detectors, DWT,.DWS, Maximum Length per Maximum Length per DOT, Conductor Without Conductor in Conduit, or Using Wire Size Conduit or Shielding Twisted Wire 3” (76.2mm) from 22 AWG $00’ (91.44m) A.C. 900’ (274.32m) The function of averaging two or more separate Detectors is not available when using the DW Series or DO Series of Detectors. In general, Climatronic Detectors require no calibration. If the wiring limitations are observed, correct readings will be trans- mitted to the conrroller. ROBERTSHAW CONTROLS COMPANY » CONTROL SYSTEMS DIVISION 3°2°235%525 2R2wowo, vicina 23s CSD FORM 052-NS-B-402/1 (Rev. 3-77) ALL RIGHTS TO REVISE DESCRIBED DESIGN ARE RESERVED VATA SHEET MODEL FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANELS EMS 500 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The FMS 500 is a modular, solid-state control panel offering complete flexibility in input/output programming. The basic CAB-1 panel consists of a cabinet with a master board, door, and lock. The master board provides five plug- in positions for interchangeable modules, terminals for internal and external wiring, and a circuit-breaker-protected low-voltage supply powered by 120-volt ac. This basic pack- age is required for any control panel application, with » appropriate function modules, standby batteries, and an © auxiliary power supply added as needed. ‘ In addition to suitable input and output modules, most sys- tems require the LCM local common control module, which provides these functions: Audible alarm and trouble indication Clear switch Silence switch Green pilot light Red common alarm light Yellow common trouble light Three input modules and two output modules provide a wide choice of functions, which are selected by logic jump- UNDERWRITERS’ LABORATORIES ers connected to the internal programming terminals. LISTED SPECIFICATIONS MODEL NUMBERS: AVAILABLE DEVICE POWER: CAB-1 basic panel: 24V CAB-1 3asic local control panel. de © 150 ma. PS-1 aux. supply: 24V de © 4 amperes. LCM Local common control module. (2) BATT-1 standby batteries provide 24V de @ 15 4ZM 4-zone input, 2-control-function output mod- amp-hr. ule, for Class B supervision. CONTACT RATINGS: Kelay-output modules: 115V ac @ 2ZR 2-zone supervised output module. 3 amperes, 4ZR 4-zone output module. APPROVALS: Underwriters’ Laboratories Listed. PS.1 acliaetaeraneid DIMENSIONS: CAB-I: 12/2" (31.8 cm) wide, 1872” (47.0 BATT-1 Standby battery (two required). em) high, 542” (14.0 em) deep. OPERATING POWER REQUIREMENTS: CAB-1 basic ORDERING INFORMATION: Specify Model Numbers and panel: 120V ac @ 0.1 ampete (normal condition). PS-1 quantities of components required. auxiliary supply: 120V ac @ 4 amperes. STANDBY POWER REQUIREMENT: 24-hour standby: ORDER FROM: 24V de @ 1.5 amp/hr. Local Office of CONTROL SYSTEMS DIVISION ROBERTSHAW CONTROLS COMPANY or office noted below. ROBERTSHAW CONTROLS COMPANY: CONTROL SYSTEMS DIVISION 23832535 28¥feona viscina 2326 FUNCTION MODULES FIGURE 1 ety Let nvr OR d 4ZM 2Z2R 4ZR LCM The several function modules are pictured above. Note that. for local control panel operation, the LCM module must be used in the far right plug-in position. Other function modules may be plugged into the remaining positions in any order and appro- priately interconnected at the logic terminals (see Installation Sheet NS-F-500). The 4ZM module provides logic control outputs (logic “sinks”) for associated 2ZR or 4ZR output modules, and has built-in alarm and trouble visual indicators for each of its four input zones, which have Class B supervision. These logic outputs also may be used to control external annunciators or relays. The 2ZR is a two-zone supervised-output relay module with alarm output and trouble indicators. It is activated by logic con- trol inputs from associated 2ZM or 4ZM input modules. Each output relay may be activated by either of the two inputs. The 4ZR is a four-zone, non-supervised output module. it provides four separate NO dry contacts which are closed upon energization of an input. Each output relay has two inputs, either of which can control it. WIRING CABINET FUNCTION MODULE POSITIONS LCM MODULE POSITION INTERNAL PROGRAMMING TERMINALS FIELD DEVICE. TERMINALS POWER BATTERY & COMMON TERMINALS POWER TRANSFORMER PS-1 AUX. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER BATT-1 (2) STANDBY FIGURE 2 BATTERIES See Figure 2, which illustrates locations of internal programming terminals, field device terminals, and power, battery, and common connection terminals. The 4ZM station modules are used to control the 2ZR or 4ZR output i modules, which in turn control external signaling devices. Virtually any combination of outputs can be programmed to occur in the event of an alarm condition through appropriate jumpers installed in the field on the internal programming terminals (refer to the FMS 500 Applications Manual for details of interconnection). Standby batteries and auxiliary power supply mount within the cabinet, as indicated in Figure 2. ROBERTSHAW CONTROLS COMPANY » CONTROL SYSTEMS DIVISION #°0°sss sso: °R\2twowo, vincini 2261 CSN Farm AR9-NG-F-RAN/1 (Rew 4.77) . . . Pecee MODEL FMS 500 CONTROL PANEL INSTALLATION SHEET MODULE POS. 1 TBI (2900) »@| P1 P2 P3 Ra MODULE POS. 2 TBS (2239) 2 Q | P1 P2 P3 P4 P TBS TB7 TB2 MODULE POS. 3 TB9 1 P2 P3 PA TB10 MODULE POS.4 TB13 0 @ O P1 P2 P3 Pa TB14 TB11 TB15 2200 TB12 TB16 2000 GND 24 VDC 1.0 AMP MAX +24v0c] BATTERY che 115 VAC @ 60 Hz N 5.0 AMPS MAX 4 PRIMARY POWER — ee SIGNAL SIGNAL INITIATING INDICATING CIRCUIT CIRCUIT TYPICAL TYPICAL ™~—————$ SEE CHART BELOW FMS-500 TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS —— MODULE TYPE —— (> MODULE POSITION ——-—— | — ——_—————, 1 1 ‘pos1 | pos2 | pos3 | pos4 42M | 2zR 4zR 2ZMR th ee ee see eed c 2 ee fa | (+)INITIATING | (+)INDICATING | N.O (+) INITIATING Ta eae a avons e mecoae DEVICE DEVICE | AUXILIARY | DEVICE ala cae CIRCUIT 41 OUTPUT CONTACTS CIRCUIT 1 | Teap1 | TegP1 | 7Te812P1 | Tea16EP1 | CIRCUIT 1 | CIRCUIT 1 | LOOP OUT SS eee ee a rps al | | (4)INITIATING | (4)INDICATING | N.O | G@)INITIATING TB3P2 | TB7P2 | TBIIP2 | TBISP2 DEVICE DEVICE | AUXILIARY DEVICE } — ————}_ CIRCUIT 2 OUTPUT | CONTACTS | CIRCUIT 1 teap2 | tasp2 | tB12P2 | TBi6P2 I | ACIRCUUZ | CIRCUIT 2 ; —— IN jot ee S| = = | (4) INITIATING } NO. (+) INITIATING Tesr3 | Te7P3 | Te11P3 | TBISP3 | pEVicE | | AUXILIARY DEVICE — | cCIRCUIT3 | CONTACTS CIRCUIT 2 | | Teap3 | Teaps | Te12P3 | Ter6PS | fecincUlis ECOR OUT, | -) | [ey | freee | +) INITIATING | N.O (+) INITIATING Te3p4 | Ta7P4 | TB11P4 | TB15P4 DEVICE | AUXILIARY DEVICE + _ CIRCUIT 4 | CONTACTS CIRCUIT 2 Te4P4 | TeEP4 | TB12P4 | TBIGP4 CIRCUIT 4 LOOP IN licen { __| [ee {—) | 24 VDC 24 VDC RATINGS MAX | @3.0 AMP MAX | @30 ma. MAX ROBERTSHAW CONTROLS COMPANY CSD Form 052-NS-F-500/) (Rev. 1/79) * CONTROL SYSTEMS DIVISION ALL RIGHTS TO REVISE DESCRIBED DESIGN ARE RESERVED. 1800 GLENSIDE ORIVE ® O BOX 27606 - RICHMOND, VIRGINIA 23261 Qe DVI CONTROLS COMPANY “*.3,..0"" SHEET CLIMATRONIC ACTUATOR-MOTORS LIGHT—DUTY UL LISTED TYPE R LIGHT-DUTY ACTUATOR-MOTORS are specially designed to mount on and operate: TYPE MB Rotary Valves 4" thru 2”, screwed TYPE MC & MD Rotary Step-Controllers. TYPER COMMON FEATURES: | - a 1. 90° angular rotation in 3.33 minutes. 2. Torque: 18 in-Ib running. | RM-8601: [ ") 3. Construction: Brown metal case with beige cover. | ().>'s 4. Mounting: Drive shaft must be horizontal. | i 5. Ambient Limits: 0 to 95°F operating; —40° to 160°F storage. RZM-8201: 0 6. Wiring Access: Two knockouts for 44” conduit . fittings. i Jf 7. Position Indicating Dial (0-10). Rea RM-8601 ACTUATOR-MOTOR: Two-position reversing, 120 VAC, 60 HZ, 5 VA. Motor driven both directions by SPDT line- voltage controller or switch. RZM-8201 ACTUATOR-MOTOR: Modulating reversing, 24 VAC, 60 HZ, 0.5 VA, with 135-ohm feedback potentiometer. Motor driven both directions by: Proportional controller (feedback potentiometer connected), or integral controller (feedback potentiometer not connected). RZM-8202 ACTUATOR-MOTOR: Same as RZM-8201 above. except provided with two 135-ohm feedback potentiometers. HEAVY—DUTY UL LISTED Type A HEAVY-DUTY ACTUATOR-MOTORS are designed to operate valves and dampers within their torque ratings, either TWO-POSITION (120 VAC E AM) or MODULATING (24 VAC TYPE AZM). T 1 TYPEA COMMON FEATURES: | am-seo1: 9 Rotation and timing vary with models. AM-8401: 0 Torque: 50 in-Ib running. i: Construction: Brown metal case with beige metal faceplate. AZM-8401: © Mounting: Drive shaft must be horizontal. Ambient Limits: 0 to 125°F operating; — 40° to 160°F storage. | 47m-g4o2: (J Wiring Access: Three knockouts for 4" conduit fittings. AZM-8451: 1] 7. Position Indicating Dial, 0-10, 10-0 reversable, AZM only. |8. Damper Rating: Parallel 25 sq. ft.; Opposed 30 sq. ft. AM-8201 TWO-POSITION UNIDIRECTIONAL ACTUATOR-MOTOR: 180° angular rotation in 20 seconds. 120 VAC, 60 HZ, 75 VA. One SPDT auxiliary switch mounted. Space for one additional SPDT auxiliary switch provided. Holding torque 7.5 in-Ib. See notes 1, 2, 3. AM-8401 TWO-POSITION REVERSING ACTUATOR-MOTOR: 160° angular rotation in 2.5 minutes. 120 VAC, 60 HZ, 3 VA. One SPDT auxiliary switch mounted. Space for one additional SPDT auxiliary switch provided. See notes 1, 2, 3. OAapwne ROBERTSHAW CONTROLS COMPANY © CONTROL SYSTEMS DIVISION 2 ove vncnaoe AZM-8401 MODULATING REVERSING ACTUATOR-MOTOR: 160° angular rotation in 2.5 minutes. 24 VAC, 60 HZ, 1.8 VA. No auxiliary switches mounted. Space for one SPDT auxiliary switch provided. One 135-ohm feedback potentiometer. See notes 1, 3, 4. ~ AZM-8402 MODULATING REVERSING ACTUATOR-MOTOR: Same as AZM-8401 above, except two auxiliary switches mounted. See notes 1, 2, 3, 4. AZM-8451 MODULATING REVERSING ACTUATOR-MOTOR: Same as AZM-8401 above, except 90° angular rotation in 83 seconds. See notes 1, 3, 4. Note 1: Motor Terminal 3 Common; Terminal 2 runs shaft flat to top (opens D.A. valve); Terminal 1 runs shaft flat to oe bottom (closes D.A. valve). Note 2: Auxiliary Switch Terminal 4 Common; shaft-flat down, 4-5. Shaft-flat up, 4-6. Switch operates when shaft-flat is at bottom. Auxiliary switch is non-adjustable on AM.* The single auxiliary switch on AZM-8401 and AZM-8451 is adjustable to any point in motor travel. The AZM-8402 has two auxiliary switches; one may be set to any point within half the motor travel and the other to any point within the other half. Note 3: Auxiliary Switch Terminal 9 Common; shaft-flat up, 9-8. Shaft-flat down, 9-7. Switch operates when shaft-flat is at top. Auxiliary switch is non-adjustable on AM. See portion of Note 2 following asterisk(*). Note 4: When AZM Actuator-Motors are used with proportional (Z) controllers, feedback potentiometer ¢s connected. When used with integral (X) controllers, potentiometer is not connected. Note 5: Use damper mounting bracket 866-8-404 for wall-mounting AZM Actuator-Motors. Auxiliary Switch information: All Auxiliary Switches in Type A Actuator-Motors are SPDT, $0/120V, 5 Amp. Part number of accessory auxiliary switch: 831-8-206. , EXTRA—HEAVY —DUTY UL LISTED: KZM & KZSM UL RECOGNIZED: KM & KSM TYPE K EXTRA-HEAVY-DUTY ACTUATOR-MOTORS are designed to operate valves and dampers within their torque ratings, either TWO-POSITION (120 VAC TYPE KM) or MODULATING (24 VAC TYPE KZM). Spring return models of the KM and KZM are KSM and KZSM, respectively. | TYPEK COMMON FEATURES: KM.8202: oO 1. Rotation and timing vary with models. KM-8251: a) | 2. Torque: KM and KZM, 150 in-lb; KSM and KZSM, | 45 in-lb. KSM-8202: Oo | 3. Construction: Extra-heavy Aluminum Alloy Case, KSM-8252: Oo | brown with beige cover. | 4. Mounting: Drive shaft must be horizontal. : KZM-8201: o | 5. Ambient Limits: 0 to 125°F operating; —40° to | 160°F storage. KZSM-8201: O | 6. Wiring Access: Two knockouts for %" conduit | fittings. KZSM-8202: 0 7. Position Indicating Dial (0-10) KZM and KZSM only. 8. Oil-filled Gear Train. KZSM-8251: Oo 9. Damper Rating: KM and KZM; Parallel 55 sq. ft., eee Opposed 68 sq. ft. KSM and KZSM, KZSM-8252: Oo Parallel 25 sq. ft., Opposed 30 sq. ft. KM ACTUATOR-MOTOR COMMON FEATURES: Two-position reversing; 120 VAC, 60 HZ, 18 VA; One SPDT auxiliary switch rated 30/120V, 5 Amp. KM-8202 ACTUATOR-MOTOR: 180° Rotation in one minute. KM-8251 ACTUATOR-MOTOR: 90° Rotation in 30 seconds. KSM ACTUATOR-MOTOR COMMON FEATURES: Two-position reversing; 90° rotation in 1.5 minutes; 120 VAC, 60 HZ, 30 VA; One SPDT auxiliary switch rated $0/120 volts, 5 amp. KSM-8202 ACTUATOR-MOTOR: Clockwise Spring-Return. KSM-8252 ACTUATOR-MOTOR: Counterclockwise Spring-Return. KZM-8201 ACTUATOR-MOTOR: Modulating reversing; 90° rotation in 100 seconds; 24 VAC, 60 HZ,.15 VA; Two transfer switches for sequencing; one 135-ohm potentiometer; no integral auxiliary switch. KZSM ACTUATOR-MOTOR COMMON FEATURES: Modulating reversing with spring return. In normal operation, electromagnetic clutch is engaged continuously and motor is driven under power in both directions; when clutch is deenergized, spring drives motor shaft to one end of travel in approximately 5 seconds. 90° angular rotation in 100 seconds; 24 VAC, 60 HZ, 26 VA. No integral auxiliary switch. A. CLOCKWISE SPRING-RETURN: KZSM-8201 ACTUATOR-MOTOR: Two transfer switches for sequencing; one 135-ohm integral potentiometer. KZSM-8202 ACTUATOR-MOTOR: No transfer switches; two integral potentiometers: 135 OHM feedback; 145 OHM aux. B. COUNTERCLOCKWISE SPRING RETURN KZSM-8251 ACTUATOR-MOTOR: Two transfer switches for sequencing; one 135-ohm integral potentiometer. KZSM-8252 ACTUATOR-MOTOR: No transfer switches; two integral potentiometers: 135 OHM feedback; 145 OHM aux. lumber 831-8-204 (two SPDT auxiliary switches and one 135-ohm potentiometer) are available for fitting to Type KZM and SM Actuator-Motors. Rating of Auxiliary Switches: $0/120V, 5 Amp. With either kit, one switch may be set to any point within half the motor travel and the other to any point within the other half. ROBERTSHAW CONTROLS COMPANY © CONTROL SYSTEMS DIVISION ose ete wowo wasn 2226 CSD FORM 052-DS-B-601/1 (Rev. 11-77) a: AUXILIARY SWITCH INFORMATION: Accessory Kit number 831-8-203 (two SPDT auxiliary switches) or Kit REMOTE BULB TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS ELECTRIC GENERAL DESCRIPTION T316 through T319 Remote Bulb Temperature Controls feature rugged switch mechanisms enclosed in dustproof housings, with highly sensitive remote bulbs, and capillary tubes to permit mounting of switches and bulbs in any desired positions. Externally set indicators are calibrated in E; These controls are suitable for use in air or with liquids that are non-corrosive to copper, and may be used with accessory wells 100-52, 100-53, and 100-54 as listed below. Applications include high-limit, reverse-action, heating/ cooling, and outdoor thermostat functions, depending on model selected. SPECIFICATIONS VAN SHEEY MODEL 1316 THROUGH 1319 T318 shown MODEL 7316 1317 I 1318 7319 ~-'100°to 240F ~ 50° to 130°F ~ 30° to 90°F RANGE (38° to 116°C) (10° to 54°C). (18° to 48°C) DIFFERENTIAL Sto 45°F 3.5° to 14°F 4.5° to 40°F (Adjustable) (2.8° to 25 C) (1.9° to 7.8°C) I (2.5° to 22°C) SWITCH opens on rise closes on rise z . ACTION (NC) (NO) SPDT SPDT 240 Vac 6.0A | 240 Vac 7.0A | 240 Vac BOA | 240 Vac 37A SWITCH 120 Vac 10.0A | 120 Vac 14.0A | 208 Vac 9.24 120 Vac 74A RATING 25 Vac 6.0A not suited to lower 120 Vac 16.0A 0.3 - 12 Vde LOA voltages pilot duty: 24-600 Vae 125 VA 3-1/2” long x 7/16” diameter 5” long x 3/8” diam. i 5-3/4" long x 3/8” diam. Bure (89 mm x 1] mm) (127 mm x 9.5 mm) (146 mm x 9.5 mm) CAPILLARY 5 feet (1.5 m) | 8 feet (2.4 m) 8 feet (2.4 m) 5-3/8” x 2-5/16” x 2-9/16" 413/16" x 2-5/32" x 1-3/16" | 5-3/8" x 25/16" x 2-9/16" HOUSING (137 mm x 59 mm x 65 mm) (122 mm x 55 mm x 30 mm) | (137 mm x 59 mm x 65 mm) 100-52: 1/2” MPT; 4-7/16" (113 mm) overall; 100-54: 1/2" MPT; 7-5/8” WELLS insertion approx. 3-1/8" (79 mm). To 100-53: 1/2” MPT; for T318 (194 mm); insertion 100 psig (689 Kpa); 250°F (121°C) approx. 6" (152 mm) ROBERTSHAW CONTROLS COMPANY » CONTROL SYSTEMS DIVISION +" ORDER FROM: Local Office of CONTROL SYSTEMS DIVISION ROBERTSHAW CON or office noted below TROLS COMPANY 1800 GLENS'DE DRIVE 208 T7S0E~ RICHMOND. VIRGINIA 23261 INSTALLATION AND WIRING ~ Screw-type terminals are provided for simplified installation, with color coding on DPDT types. All electrical wiring should be e in accordance with N.E.C. and/or local codes. Do not use electrical loads which exceed the relay’s rating without intermediate relay contactor or starter control. T316: OPENS ON TEMPERATURE RISE 1317: CLOSES ON TEMPERATURE RISE . RED BLUE 8 YELLOW BLUE RED WHITE 7318: R-B OPENS; R-Y CLOSES ON TEMPERATURE RISE 7319: R-B OPENS; R-W CLOSES ON TEMPERATURE RISE MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR These controls should require no maintenance after installation. If a unit becomes inoperative, it should be replaced with a ee device. Your nearest Robert:haw Control Systems Division Office is equipped to perform this service. ROBERTSHAW CONTROLS COMPANY » CONTROL SYSTEMS DIVISION s'tss Sie Sacrwono wincinia nz CSD Form 052 CS-T-316'1 (iss. 4-77) @p)|APHRAGM CONTROL VALVES GENERAL DESCRIPTION ed for the control of hot steam. or chilled water. The VOT “closed control valve and the VO Sizes fram 1/27 vespecially de: low pressure series is a normally senes is a normally open control valve. ‘ yo to 2 available with characterized plugs. Top and Lettem guiding is provided in the [7 thra 27 sizes for stable operation loaded packing with 20 L-cups and 2 expander. # = 1 ! Spring provides a positive sclfadjusting scal around the valve stem These valves are operated by pneumatic actuators. which include a die-cast aluminum voke and case and a molded mibber diaphragm. SPECIF ICATIONS _ VALVE ASSEMBLY ACTION: V67 Normally Closed V68 Normally Open FLOW CHARACTERISTICS: Modified equal percentage. through 27 size- water, 300 psi (21 hefem). 35 to 250°F (1.67 to 121°C) steam. 25 posi (1.76 he/em2). ~ and 3/47 size~ water. 230 psi (17.6 ke/em?). 39 to 250° a. OF te 127 G): steam. 25 poi (1.76 khesjemn *) RATINGS: I” BODY: W2 Straivht Through 1/2™ through 2° NPT (1.27 through 5.08 em) Female NUT inlet and Material: Bri 300 psi body rating Seat: Bra-s. integral with bods Packing: Springtoaded rubber G-cup- VALVE TRIM. Pattern: Sizes: outlet Connections LYLASULAS SHI. MODEL V67 & V68 ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY ACTION: Direet Acting SIZE: 10 sy. in. (64.5 em2) effective area — RANGES: 4-8 ppig (. 28 - .50 kKele m2 2) = a p> sig (. 14-91 Revit) 8-13 psig (56 - 91 helen?) 2-6 psig (14-45 kelem2 ». VO8 only MAXIMUM AIR PRESSURE: 30 poy (2.) 1 have m2) AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RATING: 250°F (121°C) max DIAPHRAGM: Molded Rubber CASE & YOKE: Die-cast aluminum SPRING: Alloy steel. cadmium plated ORDERING INFORMATION: Specify Complete Model No.: V6e2G8 — 023192 a | | Vlog: Bra-- ee - uea robber [vacve]| action size &| |acTUATOR { position | Stem: sinle-~ steel { | RANGE INDICATOR! Back Seat: VO8 only. rubber O-ring | re. “ pvcoeas | CODE OPTION | i a 1 | Tablet | SUFFIX TABLE J — VALVE CODE TABLE WN = a ACTUATOR ' SIZE AND Cv inna CODE stodel, 1/2" | aan fom jax “fuse | 2 [actuator __| I re = — - RANGE | SPAN Cv | cy | Cy | Ce jc v| cv EE (ose) | (os) | CODE | valor] HUE tae | 22{ |s7 | 93] 47 | 25| «0 ale Jas se ves | jos! i 16 Lei pac] me] ae 40 a5 3 ! ‘ode 1013 10231 033 ! 043 053 1063 [153 163 | 253 1303 |353} 403 "NOTE: VEB only ROBERTSHAW CONTROLS COMPANY » CONTROL SYSTEMS DIVISION 1890 GLENSIDE DRIVE PO BOR IESE - RICHMOND WIRCINIA 23769 Creme V 6700 1/2 and 3/4” Shown V 6700 1 thru 2” Shown Control! valves are sized to the- demand of the system to be controlled and are frequently smaller than supply lines. They should be installed as close as possible to the coil being controlled. Preferably. a control valve should be installed in the vertical position so the actuator will be over the valve. but can be installed in any position if necessary. When installing a valve, these simple precautions should be taken: 1. Install a pipeline strainer just ahead of the valve. 2. Install the valve so it closes against the flow. t 3. Aliow sufficient clearance that the valve may be easily serviced if necessary. 4. A minimum clearance of 3%” must be allowed between the extreme top of the actuator and the nearest obstruction. Pp : This permits removal of actuator yoke and parts required to replace packing. TABLE Ill V67 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS cmlin C cmiin D cmiin E cmiin F in sze cmiin A cmiin B CMI Ib. mercer kg. Ya (1.27)|4%6 (11.59) 1%: (4.05)|4%/16 (10.95)] 1°78 (3.49) [1% (3.49) | 2% (6.99) | 3.1 (1.41) 1'%32 (4.05)/ 45/16 (10.95) 1°%32 a (4.05)! 3%16 is.10)| 3.3 (1.50) Ya (1.91) }4?¥32 (11.99) 1 (2.54) |5?%s2 (15.0)| 2"% (6.75)) 4%/16 (10.95)) 2 22 (6.35) lov, (6.35) 15 u2n|es (2.90) 1s (3.175) 5° (15.0}| 2% (6.75)/4 Sie ros] 2%i6 (6. en 2%16 (6.51)! 5/8 3.01) 8.0 (3.63) 1% (3.81) |57%32 (15 0)]27¥/ (6.75) 4%he (10.95)} 2%16 (6. 51)| 2%16 (6-51) | 5s w30n]e1 (3.67) 2 = (5.08) j67/i6 116.03) 2% (6.45) |4%ie (10.951 3%s (8.57) | 3% (8.57) | 6% 07.15] 15.5 (7.03) TABLEIV V68 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Y2 (1.27)|5%6 3.7 2/32 (1.98) | 4%/e (10.95), 1%s (3.49) liv. (3.49) | 27 (6.99) | 2.9 (1.32) ! 4%he (10. 95)! 1% (3.81) liv (3.81) 3 F.v2) | 3.0 (1.36) Ye (1. 91))5i%he (12! eoi! Ye (2. 22) (3.0) 1 (2. ca) ls (15 a 1% (4.76) |asne (10.95), 2'/2 (6.35) |2u (6.35) 15 n2n |e 1a (3.175) [5% 15 oy 1% (4.76) |4%i6 (10 gsi! 2% (6.51) | en. (6.51) | sv 013.0) 8.2 (3.72) 4% (10. ak ie (6.51) | 2%. (6. sui Se (13. on| 7.8 (3.54) ca 1 2.81i|5% 115.0)| 1% (4.76) 2 (5.08) [evs 15.95) 2% (5.40) 145/16 (10. 95h 3% (8.57) ‘|a% (8.57) lev (17. | 14.5 (6.58) The V67 and VOB require little maintenance after proper installation. It is recommended that field repairs be muted to the following: (No Special Tools Required) V6800 1/2 thru 3/4” Shown (Refer to 6700 for Nomenclature) V6800 (1° thru 2”) V6800 VALVE ASSEMBLY ACKING REPLACEMENT : If valve stem leakage is encountered, replace the U-cup packing (3) as follows: 1. Remove Clamp Nut (14) and lift Yoke (13) and assembled parts (7, 8 & 9) off valve. 2. Measure dimension “A” from end of stem (16) to top of spring adjustor (10) and record. During reas. sembly of the valve this dimension must be reset 2 1/16” so as not to change the actuator range. 3. Remove spring adjustor (10), spring seat (11) and spring (12). 4. Remove packing nut (1), top spacer (2), U-cups (3), expanders (4), and packing spring (5). Be sure the packing box in bonnet (20) and the valve stem (16) are Clean. 5. Drop packing spring (5) and expander (4) over stem into Lottum of packing box. Apply a bead of valve seal lubricant. accessory number NO-3. around the valve stem and push 1 U-cup (3) over stem into packing box, thercby Jubricating the inside diameter of the packing and filling the annular groove in the packing with lubricant. Repeat this procedure with another ea- £ pander (4) and U-cup packing (3) taking care with U-cup 6 not to damage the sealing lip. Drop top spacer (2) over stem, and screw on packing nut (1) to a positive stop. VALVE PLUG REPLACEMENT If indications of excessive valve seat leakage are encountered, the stern and plug assembly (16) may be replaced. (Details 18 (Disc Retainer) and (17) Valve Disc may be ordered separately if desired). The packing should be replaced anytime the stern and plug assembly (16) is replaced. Re- placement of parts is accomplished as follows: 1. Perform Steps 1 through 4 as shown in “Packing Replacement” above. 2. (a) V67 Control Valves: Remove Adapter (19) from Valve Body (15). Remove Stem and Plug Assembly. (b) V68 Control Valves: Remove Bonnet (20) from Valve Body (15). Remove old Stem and Plug Assembly from Bon- net (20). 3. (a) V67 Control Valves. Insert new Stem and Plug Assembly into Valve Eudy (15) and replace Adapter (19) (b) V68 Control Valves. Install O-Ring Scat (21) on new Stem and Plug Assembly and assemble into Bonnet (20). Re- a:-cemble Bunnet (20) into Valve Body (15). 4. Perform Step 5 as listed under “Packing Replacement™. IV Ww Pressure drop acting against the unbalanced area of the valve produces a thrust. This thrust must be overcome by the “actuator through the application of additional signal pressure above the top end of the signal range for normally open con- rol valves. or by reducing the signal pressure below the bottom end of the range for normally closed control valves. In either asc, the actuator span is increased. tight close-off, the valve must not be operated at pressure drops greater than those designated by the intersections of the valve size curves with the appropriate line selected from Table V. Maximum allowable pressure drop for any valve (including other actuator ranges) is 40 psi. ws FE Table V — CLOSE OFF LINES 5 Aye « é ACTUATOR z RANGE voz ves zg 4-8 | Line B Line C z 3 1” ves 5 z2 1” v67 = t %” V67 %" ves re PRESSURE DROP ACROSS VALVE (PSI) om i ee ee eeaeeeee ee > 1_! : ! ' ! SE ACE | 7 " eee Sa never Eee ea N.O. VALVE NC VALVE DLA. HW.S. TO COn Cc. Ws Noy, TO COW HEATING VALVE COOLING VALVE MAIN AR V67 & V6E APPLICATION & Do sccrsiaw CONTROLS COMPANY = CONTROL SYSTEMS DIVISION oe esti fait eowe vincowa 209 CSO FORM 052-DS-V-067/2 (Fev. 2-79) ALL RIGHTS TO REVISE DESCRIBED DESIGN ARE RESERVED. > | ONE, TWO OR THREE SWITCH TYPES IN A COMMON ENCLOSURE — 300 SERIES Ms ees i FA) Range limits: 30° Hg Vac & 6000 PS! | |x -100 & 41,000 kPa dn-off or proportional output two or three 15 amp switches and/or 35 ohm potentiometers Onoff Ditierentials to 0.07" W.C. Narrow Ranges to 0-2” W.C. UL Listed Versatile design TT 2 ECONOMICAL, COMPACT 54 SERIES | ] Range limits: 30° Hg Vac & 6000 PS! -100 & 41,000 kPa Standard 15 amp switch Wide selection of configurations COMPACT, SINGLE SWITCH Wy Range limits: 30° Hg Vac & 6000 PSI -100 & 41,000 kPa Standard 15 amp switch Ms see ee DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE Range lim'ts: 30° Hg Vac & 100 PSID -100 & 700 kPa Maintain difference between two source pressures On-off o- praportiona!l output with up to three 15 anp switches’135 ohm potentiorneters (300K Series) <r x (i SE Es SKELETON (WITHOUT ENCLOSURE) a= Range limxs: 30° Hg Vac & 1700 PS! -100 & 11,900 kPa _4 15 amp single or dual switch F ¥ Space & cost saving EXPLOSION PROOF Range limits: 30° Hg Vac & 6000 PSI -100 & 41,000 kPa Low set/hizh proof models 15 amp sizz'e or dual switch Imternal o- external efustment oration & shock resistant UL Listed ! a a Seg iss! 4300/3302/5303 Imernal Adjustment i External Knob & Dial Adjustments ENCLOSED SKELETON Jt Vibration & Weather Versatile, Sensitive, Single or Multi Switch en i Space/Cost ww 51 341 Saving Rugged Top Skeleton Duty Adjustment JIIOK/JIIOKB Differential H110/H110A External 3 : J10/I1108 “TY Internal a |. - (HOOPER) | t6715 AURORA AVENUE NORTH - ee | P.O. BOX 33579 ot Ley SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98133 becember 8, 1983 Alaska Power Authority Anchorage, Alaska hes Ot. Mary, Alaska-Rural Heat Recovery Gentlemens We hereby warrant all work performed and all materials, equipment, and other items furnished under the electrical contract to be free from defects for a period of one year from the date of acceptance. Tue warranty does not include incandescent lamps, but does include flourescent lamps. Any defects which occur during the one year warranty period will le remedied without delay providing they have mot been caused by misuse or abuse. No off-shore materials have been used in the pertormance of the electrical contract. Very truly yours, Heuper Electric Co a 2, A Cofe in etl Th /wh \ 363 1703 546.2491 _| 16715 AURORA AVENUE NORTH } P.O. BOX 33579 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98133 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURER general material as specified fixtures _ as noted ‘gear Cutler Hammer °* 303 1703 timerald City Electric kmerald City Electric . binerald City Klectric 546-2491 COMPranr Ul ING WIRES . _ PVC — NYLON E ite t TABLE NO. 1000 Type THHN-THWN 90C Dry 75'C Wet 600 Volts CONSTRUCTION: Solid or stranded copper conductor, PVC insulated with Nylon jaCReL Overall, using Compounds tor temperatures hot exceeding 105°C, Designed tur use in wet and oil resistant locations i homes and factories. oe eee eee Nypion Seeded vuoies Lon per Leng 8 | am | Vou | rat t \cuneaean | pan | EeaepaanTnT 14 Vs a | Wj 15 15 16 |500' Spls. 14} 19 | 15 4) 124 15 15 17 |500' Spis. 12 1 15 4 2137) 20) 20 24 |500’ Spls. 2; 19 | is | 4 | us| zo] 2 24 |500' Spls. 10; 1 | 20 4 | .le | 30 30 37 | 500’ Spls. lo | 19 | 20 4 17) 30 30 | 39 {500° Spls. a 30 5) | 221 ; 80 45 61 |500' Ctn. 8 | 19 | 30 5 23 | 50) 45 63 |500’ Ctn. 6 | 19 | 30 5} .27| 70 65 96 |500’ Coil 4 {19 | 40 6 34) 2990 | °985 | 155 1500’ Coil 3; 19 | 40 6 | .37 }**105 | **100 | 190 |500' Coil 2} 19 | 40 6 | .40 es **115 | 236 |500’ Coil 1; 19 | 50 | 7 46 | 27140 | +9130 | 301 Reel 10 | 19 | 50 7 | -80 jre155 [+150 | 375 Reel 210} 19 | bd 7 | .bS , 99185 | °r175 | 465 | Reel 3/0} 19 50; 7 | .vO ; 210 200 | 577) Reel 40 | 19 | 50) 7 | .60 | 235} 230 | 718 Reel 250 | 37 | 60 8 | .73 | 270 | + 255 | 858 Reel 300 | 37 | 60 | 8 .79 | 300 | 285 11019 Reel 350 | 37 | 60 8 64 | 325 | 310 | 1180 Reel 400 | 37 | 60 8 | .B8 | 460 | 335 | 1346 Reel soo | 37 | 60 | 8 } .97 | 405 |- 380 | 1658 Reel w00 j el ; 70 | ¥ | 1.07) 455 | 420 | 2036 Reel 750 | 61 70 | 9 $1.18 | 500 475 | 2523 Reel 1000.j 1 | 7 | 9 jPod) sep | bas [3300] Rest ‘ ' . NOTE: The 18 and 16 AWG “THHN" Style constructions are located in the Fixture We Section as TRIN of TERN. * 3 wires inconduit at 30°C ambient temperature. Aimperes tur GO°C rating apply in dry locations only. °* For 3 wire; single-phase residential services, max. amperes for service en- trance conductors are: 4AWG-100, SAWG-110, 2AWG 125, lAwG-150, L/OAWG-175 & 2/0AWG-20u. t Alternate packaging available. 14, 12 and 10 AWG available on 500’ curls or 2500’ non-returnable reels. ULTIPLE RATING USES: Gasoline Resistant (14 thru GAWG ualy) Larger sizes avdilaule Upon request, Ou Resistant 75°C 90°C THHN dry & 75°C THWI wet FR 1 or VW oI. 90°C MTW (19 strands of more only) AWM LODS*‘C dry, 80°C in onl, FR Lor VW 1 (Appliance Wire). NOTE: Contact Factury if CSA approval is fequited for TEIN 14 thru & AWG only, FILE NO. LL 40161. LISTED BY UNDERWRITERS’ LAGLORATORIES INC. FILE NO. E-1B9604 (FILE NO. E-5 1461 for the MEW items) ihe data listed above is approaimate and is subject to normal Manute turing tolerances. ad al a a KEV 1/78 eH BUILDING WIRES faba ol) HEAVY PVC iscsi! Type THW 75 C WET or DRY 600 VOLTS ell CONSTRUCTION: Solid or stiunded copper conductor, insulated with Under- writers’ Laboratories listed PVC compound tor temperatures not exceeding 79°C. Designed for use in wet locations in homes and facturntes.75°C oil resistant ~ Upon request. wpe [ae [xs | ss | alu | tome | Meme | geome | Some | a, | me | 14 Tas tre | |) | a5 23 | 50’ Ctn. Zs 45 V7 15 24 500’ Ctn. 12 1 45 A17)))| 20 31 500’ Ctn. 12 7 45 j; .19 20 33 500’ Ctn. 10 1 45 | .20 30 45 500' Ctn. 10 Fase eet 30 46 | 500'Ctn. Sit 60 .25 45 76 500’ Ctn, 8 7 60 | .27 45_ 79 500’ Ctn. 6| | | iz 60 3h 65 117 500’ Coil AW iz) 60 336 | 9985 172 | 500’ Coil 3 7 60 .39 | #9100 206 500’ Coil e)}) |) ||| eae | | | om "115 | ° 259 500’ Coil 1 19 80 .50 *130 328 500’ Coil vo | 19 80 54 | #9150 402 Reel 2/0 | 19 #0 | .59 | 99175 494 Reel 30 | 19 | 80 4 | 200 610 Ree! AIO) 1) 29) }) | 180 | if) | |270) | |!) | 230 760 Reel 250)))\|)| 37.) {) | 198 |i) ).78 255 | 904 Reel 300 | 37 | 95 | 63 285 | 1065 j Reel 3501) 37 95 | 88 310 1238 Reel 400) 7 95) Hl e938) aa5 1389 Reel 500 ST SS a ALO ae | | dal Reel 600 61 |; 110 | 1.12 420 2041 Reel 700 61 ,; 110 | 2.20 | 460 2425 Reel 750 ol | 110 1.230 495 201 | Reel 1000 el | 110 136 5 545 3371 Reel } ' ' i NOTE: 1 AWG and larger sizes ate aloo UL. Hsted as 90°C MIW. FILE NO. £-51461 - * Up to 3 wires at conduit at 30°C ambient temperature. ** For 3-wire, single-phase residential services, Max. amperes for service entr- ance conductors are: 4AWG-1}00, 3AWG-110, 2AWG-125, 1AWG-150, 1/OAWG-175 & 2/OAWG-200. LISTED BY UNDERWRITERS’ LABORATORIES, INC. FILE NO. E-18964 The data listed above is approximete and is subject to normal Manufacturing tolerances. a 5) ih kas ot My 1 Ts 1¥a" DEEP WITH CONDUIT KO * mer el seta Cater eine tate ee aoe CTD 9. 160 (No. 169 with insulated #12 Givending piyteal) 18.1 cubic-inch capacity © oe | KNOCKOUTS ’ : esti tel toot SIDES | toTtOM Sea. i Conduit Goadult ne Yi 10S 5214)-l 10-1" 5—!/)" 60 ; tno cht 1a" DERP WELDED WITH CONDUIT KO's} ee ee ot ee 22.6 cubic-inch capacity’ o nn yt KNOCKOUTS . irr |i Race Universal ) | Ne. We. stoas. noTToM Sed, y) o (UF Coadsit Condel? ba fs - eee Veh =A Vor b2161-% — tol", dom a eee eee ee 7 —_ Voz 6216-54 . we ae a Vey S216t-l/, oy," \) Va" DEEP WIT KO's Pe eee ys ‘KNOCKOUTS ra) me Meet! Accessories Maioas soTToM i ne BS 19082181) th" sa" so ver 52th y, i QI Vy2__ 52! i 194 ___52151-FH-SP 15 S218 1-8-SP Toy S2isi FH, Fd 9" 5 200 pS he ————— — 2057 $2151-J-/, 3 208 = 62151-W-'/, WF," (No. 197 with Inswletod #12 pivending piyteil) * aneaeeean Stee! Bax Catalog 8-774 FRAC) RmeerHa, ¢ ~ \: i> No. 753 Cubic Reco Universe! lech Sed No. No. Capacity DESCRIPTION Pao. Devicesears oPped 752 52C1 = Flot, blank 50 234" centers ; 7 mT iirear No. 756 No. 759 _ JDBC 8 oo : No. 757 No. 76/ 76? 823.1; rE) <i No. 758 756 52C3-% oe] 11 @ 759 52C3-% so. d foal iL) |) | ast ; 757 52C3-1 65 ‘Raised 1", open OS, l 758 $203-1%4 83 Raised 11/," open 25 a * * ‘ 2 EXPOSED WORK — RAISED 2" t 7.3 cubic-inch capacity { oo (- fom) 7 j ! ' ! . ! | ) j Roce Universal Sid { ie | A) | ee | No No. DESCRIPTION Pug { 7 ir e yy Ae 00 52-11 One toggle switch 1) 11) 25 hee ie 801 52-19 One single receptacle 1-13/42" D _ 25 ; to Ut No. bor 802-571 One duplex receptacle 25 Noy aot Ate 4 c 803 — 52-2T Two toggle switches 25 1 #04 52-28 Two single receptacles 1-13/32" D 25° ‘ 805 ——52-ST One single recept. 1-13/32" D. and une toggle switch 25 5 i mt 806 —52-DT_ One duples receptacle und enw tuygle switch 25 | e oil 807 —-52-2D Two dupios receptacles 25 ; ) He it 808 52-3D Three gong despard device 25, io | 6091) 52:60) Sit goayidewpard device 25 iM eeu 30.50 Amp. Single Receptacle 2-9/64" D. 25 UW, _30 Amp. Twist-Lock Single Receptacle 1.23/32" D0. 25 ie 20 Amp. Receptacle 1.19/32" D. La No. 805 30-50-60 Amp. Receptacle 2.437 D. 25 I ea) — i ( 4 e | rie fey 64 rh ee if + ; | | L | | { / ) | i ) | ice ii Wi yu DeSe dag j Y* J lf. | | y [i Lae | ve \ “pL ' rE { | a Nie ee 2 a vo i No. 808 No. 809 No. 810 No. 613 aN Steel Box Catalog B-774 RACO <q p iN No. 771 No. % No. 768 Nos /77 71 No. 769 4 «__} No. 7/2 775 No. 773 No. 774 — iS No. 79! Nos. 782-790 Nos. 792-797 Patent No. 2,987,211 Race Valversal rere See Ne. No. Capacity DESCRIPTION Pag 770 52C36 m 52C62 772, 82013 | 768 52C14-% 773-——~COCSC 774 52C15 775 «S2C16 787 «520 FOR TWO Pavia! 776 $2037 7 52C20 778“ S2C17 769 82C18-%" 779 S2C18 yao 52C19 781 5202) | 17.0 Raised 1/4" Square-drawn S25 1) 52C00 — Flot ~ 50 FOR ONE DEVIC Cubic Race Valver.ot Inch Sed. No No. Capacity DESCRIPTION Pho. 782 52C49-7, 4.0 Raised '/)" Square-cut 25 783 52049 % 60 Raised ¥%4" Square-cur 25 784 52C494 8.0 Raised 1° Square-cut 25 790 §2C49-4 10.0 Raised 1%," Square-cut 25 785 52Cs0 120 Roised 11/," Square-cut 25, 788 «5251 160 Raised 2° Square-cut 25 ~ FOR TWO DEVICES. 792 §2C52-"/, 50 793 52C52-% 78 794 52C82-1 10.3 797 52C52-4 12.8 795 - §2C53 “15.5 796 §2C54 205 1? mI C CONDUIT & FITTINGS RIGID STEEL CONDUIT EM. v. THINWALL CONDUIT INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT Tone Pout Lengthe with Que Coughing “Ven-towt Teo Poot tengthenNe Couplings Ver 100 Veet — bs, Mull | Tr ec Ob, dtl > ‘ t ee 180 ed roe ta0 we. HRT peti de be meet00 re r= oe Toe } \ . 37 $30.14 23h §1uB.70 | te 1H 36.67 S93 6 163.76 lable in hot dipped galvanised or chetra | }0 arz 60.56 4 403 216,52 Vur 10 Fest Te tag tts wate ise Yaa 66012 iY oeE 202 . reasded, apelin sevewed Un wits | Mm 6 W103 a 62 a36.6 . | Tea-Poot Lengths with One Co © “Also available ta black enamel! } | we tas 100 Fout—P.0.8, Mill ic wastand | ote Wi. bie. i. vor iee setts, ‘Sede’ [ot ke ; Hee 100 Fe, Dee 100 Fe ” 1% basa abot % At +d aur $169.00 % ob ST a nah ‘ wt lm 823 za8 00 1 163 hiub 71 ww .| |e wt i% 201 Loe ie 10 ne j ity mW if 645 . 958.00 1% ou Vz 120.n8 2 Vas 2 334 wn tozur fey nan 24 87 aun as | 4 et | INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDU T : ‘ i oS FITTINGS ] mm. . Bt 447.70 Vig avo 205.65 4 942 _ b17.42 | ve . 6 a4 957.22 woo de | tLaows Coueun 6 1710 131.42 1205.45 | THINWALL (E.M.T.) ELBOWS | sie Wh. r We the. ot Ask us fer delivered prices om ney Gunnitiy 90° sLsows \ ta. Fe Per luo Fee 100 fer 100 ALUMINUM RIGID CONDUIT. | : a $41.70 i $34.10 Ton-foot Lengihs with One Coupling | A 1 70 143.00 20 41.20 Por 100 Fest? ~ ¥.0.B. Gur Warehouse | 1% 205 202.00 36 60,00 my 410 271.00 su 63.90 | 6H 417.00 93. 90.90 | 2% 1120 780.00 360 244.00 | 3 2050 1243.00 300 334.00 Sm 2050 2165.00 440 802,00 Yn i | 4 3520 2535.00 400 943,00 one $44.25 | 2 aes || a 24.38 ee | FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT ‘ < » ‘aan | + tect in? toon | Ul. & CSA. LABELED PUEXIO¥E 1% Mag ° s 15d.26 i $u.u! th $7.00 SYMEL CONDUIT tte 243.06 me hus a 11.20 HA hy ea i“ : 19 RY ay I ah l z 20h veal 4 + 300.2 417.16 9 442.18 44140 | a 6 4789 929.37 777.03 | ¢ _ 6804 73,00 1057.27 | BAPANOID-AND LLEOWS 5 Prose prices eve Lue quasissiee of ince them 2000 ibe, | My Be - Por 100 dom ws for uriees om bal ger uesatiiivs oo Ver ee te Bagenden ¢ in, oye Une kad Buin Bode RIGID ELBOWS AND COUPLINGS za and ERP] Sizse us Bi sei ud * ao ' 104 ana ome thus 67 a0 ve toe nh 2361 .tM | _ pelt 1M 4 bee 2228.90 B7OUb2 | er bee |” Mute, 408A ivume are aatwe ples [ois wT eae et eat l | | * woo 16 $iaty $i2.v0 . “uo 26 22.55 16.46 | E.M.7. FITTINGS | % 100 a7 _ $4l3o 23.90 | ;o% bo be 4ulb8 32.28 ' i bo b¥¥o 62.30 ‘ We | fender” iy so Mibas 716.06 ‘4 re \ ” a 142.00 v4.65 = 66 sis ae eats ||| || Nena a ey 2 + lagb 16.60 seo aT ee yo ze tov az | mi a” oat Zeno 184.06 4.07 41.33 7 on so | UPLINGS NE ii 7 3 43.96 4799) 7a.da 14.30 | : SReeerone | Alu wvustabie in alundnusn, . Hh 60,63 65 246.41 21295 | ta | T6.n8 65 340.02 246.27 Perio rg bes ia | 2 al4ay bo.u8 501.76 sua jae ’ ”% sau - 2% auee1 = 20262 oeut2 oor tn | 4 t eros ai nt ||| (gaad od ALUMINUM FLEXIBLE CONDUIT ! 4 : 3 44nud . ; 406,00 2u4.o8 Sake Wiig Vy 4 489.00 a b40 00 610,48 441.22 2770.87 2017.00 | ‘ io r a" 671.18 = 470 Be 4260 zaxe00 | * 6 646.00 ta 600.00 6 4402.23) 1147-71) w5aY.75 —TIsI 40 | | 4 714,92 1385.08 11637.77 764.08 | { SUNNING THREAD S-Coot lengths, perfectly thresded, & AE Te % 928.70 106.06 : i 12075 | a. be couplings offveve used with Clét ead rigid cuades = Reeiga! | lis . systema, U.L. Listed. ILE W. Union mate, 20 311.96 ote id he =~ threeds reo binee Prie velcoton. ___tnanens. gy Somes q ~ Sue cou 12. oe js Vath, We, din, Max, so 100 0.376 0,610 GALVANIZED CONDUIT NIPPLES ‘% 100 0.628 0.920 bine Chamerttiy ute Abert oma Leng Mivyiee test * Ours t.1u8 -— <= bongin, teehee ee — 1 1.600 1.480 kere we ’ a ae ‘ . . i’ L250 1.646 te 1 $0.25 gu.30 $0.94 $0.59 $0.30 $0.42 50.44 90.08 g0.7u | 1% E500 1,960 e haog Mipote * 1 A439 SM AA 64 6 BH 2000 2450 - 1 1 san 1872 67 3 47 2 aa | aw 2.600 3.080 1% 1 167 72 (677% 63 ‘a? (wa bias a | 3 3.000 4 600 ad 1% 1 43 be bd 07 V2 tae Los | aw 4000 4.060 2 or) Maz ala? Lae Lae Live 200 | 4 20 4.000 4,060 EAT CUMCWIALLY CONNECTORS & COUPLINGS 45 biw.T. COINWALL) HITTINGS de ty VES\Raw | | ti. naeel Lneminied dententon Connection 1 a (3 ) ¢ S18. INDINTER CONNECTORS partes cow oe Tem meet My leet ed ae on Te-t4t wwhose te72, bo $ioie - Trad wyors - ts72 60 26,00 Petes wuTIOU nn. tele ob 46,00 COMPRESSION TYPE CONMECTONS — SiktL leeomead alae ATELL INDENTER COUPLINGS ver see mee Cotetee ho in. ee tee etcee) | Wace EB ae | ie Ta see City Apyieiee Mire Mace uy ome Gs . en oe ee Th-iat s7'Tose Ius2 60 16.20 i ren oes eis Nba) 8 Ee greg SoS 7s2U 2014 102.10 79.20 | 3 Thei43| 977108 jvde 46 39.30 26,00 Sa 291s 206,40 129.00 | saan zoe 304.00 190.00 7SoU 2vi8 £ 444.00 4376.00 | STLEL INSULATED INGENTER CONNECTORS merits ord a COMPRESSION TYPE CONNECTORS — STEEL We pcinlieeesae es oe ber ive Lee aera $22.10 17,30 he sieseee| (TOE Fam reet Cue Aled Meee tes &t |i | veaa aes san an TC 280 doe $340 $30.00 | i ‘ 20 TCstz seturs Fer 2vod zy 63.10 41.50 | 21 TC-113) SeTiue 782 zves 10 a0 64.70 | Bazi Tie t2$ 753 zH0n 5 + 161,00 dol ot %" 0 . S821 TCs "160 754 2v0ou 2 236.20 42.00] . sa Pee ise I Best TC-ite velzvO 755 sous : $40.80 213.00] TT vam mortem meres! || Sarmes| (panes hes ove 4, Ton 4 6 00 , COMPKISSION TYPE COURLINGS — S145K : winien 4eas || |e eeiea! vasiae ‘ ‘ lee 26 v.60 30.00 Fae B mont Cur Aires Mace ee . ' , . Biso TK.tIt 1 aoua $4010 “OME SQUEZER" INDENTER TOOL 20 TKS auz3 4,20 Us ber dolotoat 30 TKD qea 2046 187-30 TK. z ut ice 20 Thetis jos geae 240,00 . eae ae aaeeen leon. lndeater puluts are i r $020 TR-lie wulz0u Tee suze 34720 ai7.ue To ears TWO PieC® CONNEC URS | re ‘ Vetetne Ma ‘. P LY a Ver tee Vem meri cus wiriwe Rives a oot Cute tom mace ’ eae ir. £0 2 1 . TOI too 1gvenC Z262 Lo $30.00 {T.. 19 was 1 TC-232 ezT078 2703 63.80 IT-1uu " twee i OAT BCabWw COMmEcIOm — 314k — INSULATED | Veinte tor All iadeater Towle 7 Une ccow Type ate | B16 secur’ . tet sone etalon Me V0 ‘ FeO mes iny Abeirice Nine Meco ETP. (WI? hed iss, || I ao _ 663) TC-721 TWoOK! 720M 2Izz ICs! bo $2u.40 $23 00, , iy) BO339 TC-72a TWIGS! WIN 2123 IC-s2 bo 47,20 36 vo | Wr Wi 6038 TC-733 Twidw-si 72a 2126 us “2 77.40 6u.00 | we . Ah fT | ® e Twe Serew Try \. 3 ‘i Wii! 2 bosy TC.72¢ TWIadS! 729 2128 16-34 10 139.60 5720), oJ wy 4a yap nd : BO30 TC.725 TWI50-5! 724 2120 IC-46 10 205-20 127.00¢ = . 804) TC-726 TW200-U! 728 zize IC-S0 5 200,00 148.00 | : Wie Cot tie _ Dis 4 Conmesiet Get urew Covpling —Campresaina Conanston Compressive Eangling BAT BCREW CONNECTORS om Sint | Une Scrow Type Fer vee | Sif SCKEW CONNECTORS AND COUPLINGS Mee Corsten No fim tees Concrete Tight — Die Coat TAB Hiewilay tGedney River Mace E.T.P. Ayyietoe We Cin ce | — Cannes iors ae Cpe ting ae, post TC) 40b0 720 guur Gr 3) TWH0-3 bu $22.00 $17 60 Vat We. Wor 169 : f boos TC-123 4075) 12h gous) C44 TWIES $0 37.00 4100 742 2uve Css TWLOUG 25 62.20 Ine tirdy sities arsine ’ wel Becawi type 23D "2000. aat-De 41260723 2008 C34 TW126-S 10 121,90 Zs2-bC 45.60 242.DC 43160 724 C-36 Twio08 10 176.00 a33%0C 74.78 243. 728 C34 TW200-8 6 249.60 234-DC 118.60 24. 728 C37 TWus0S 9 782.80 236-DC “28 2 727 C-3u TWHOOS 1 . 236-0€ 621.80 24 720 C-30 TW400-5 ..... aac 237-DC 626.30 247. Ott SCREW COUPLINGS —~ BTLKL Z20-DC Bau.46 24o- Twe ticrow Type ry 230-DC 438.00 240-1 Carere ne oe) te COMPRESSION CONHECTORS AND COUPLINGS pucch Fup “*Gecney liens Meee ¥.T.P. Apetoten tu. RE cie jal Coane tit Eruint —- Dio Cant , goad TK-121 — pu80 «730-2022 OP-41 TWCAOW 60 $20.40 923 00 Cam Perle eee orm » BOS2 TK-1220 hO7H «= 731-2023) CPha2 TWCIE-S 60 46.00 325.60) mao ‘wth Atom. lene Alice» biug 732 aude Chas TWCLOO-S 26 71.00 66.50) | Sie; Gewese, Deidevoeet) | |iti) «| Wale | Meavens) Belapaneet) | Dae : So St MEAS gas ee tr seks entse Veer berew Type 1 15 BOL 282-DC 60.00 46.00 ost aaa. qeee HB . is to 964) 285-UC LIT AO 84.00 Bot $12) G32 doze Grae twelsos toetvene taseo] | soul geebE 17140 a5u wd wast 6400 736 «2026 CP-46 TWC200-5 :20 167.00 au Nae sroe SaeiuG aroun cede vist $260 «736 2180 CY47 TWO2D0S 403.00! 4 Hore 267-00 1OWR LO 6 $300 737) 2182 Cham TWC3008 B12 te) Sy u TLD asm eou.te aus Ieuvie bavue 7328 abe Craw TWC400-y oe¥uw) | ba 68-WC 1646.00 Lue 7 debe,eo cere ae ‘(| AC SWITCHES '. Specification Grade - ‘| Back and Side Wired eam tide tere ete tmbee io edeme ee. : Featuros- Specifications { CATALOG NUMBER . B96-E (1P-2P-3W) | @ CSA Certified File #LA375 — | Guide #380-W-19.7 © | = it ‘ nal oo - : 1 DESCRIPTION Be oe eee eee ees (198 120-277 AC | 20A 120-277 AC! 30A 120-277 AC | 5; G . ee _ —— ? — CONtrolling as permitted by the | BLUE FACE REO FACE GREEN FACE | AMPERE RATING COLOR CODED re $ N.E.C., resistive, Inductive, (araeo janis 4901 | 3001 | Singie-pole, brown nandie “ tungsten-filament, fiuorescent | 4801-GLIe | 4901-GLie | 9001-GLie | Single-pole, ivory glow handle ,, + and motor loads for AC branch | 4801-GRY | 4901-GAY ; = | Singie-pole, gray nandle ' lighting and appliance circuits =| quot ™ > 4901-t } 30014 | Singie-pole, ivory handle .i + ® Color coded face indicates | abore 4900-L | - _ | Singie-pole, lock type ampere rating | 4601-PLA120 | 4901-PLA120 | 9001-PLA120 | Single-pole, red pliot handle, 120V «" @ Side wiring: Large brass binding | 4801-PLA277 | 4901-PLA277 | 3001-PL R277 | Single-pole, red piiot nandie, 277V : i head screw terminals approved = |_4u01-W. i A901 w |= Siagie-pola, white hancle @ ti Only — accepts up to 4302 agu2 suu2 | Doubdle-pole, Drown handie f : | 2 pay Pt 4suz GHY | 4902-GRY - - Double-pole, gray Nandle . © Bac! boar Q: : eer a abuzt ~ ay024 gou2 Doudle-pole, ivory nandie terminais app Over a Only 4oueb 4902-L - | Doubie-pole, lock type ; = accepts up to #10 wire | 4u02-PLA277 4902-PLA277 3002-PLHZ77 | Double-pole, red pilot handle, 277V— | ! @ Quiet operation ; | 4eu2-W asu2.w j | Oouble-pole, white handle . © Silver cadmium oxide contacts r : | 1— r (+ © Copper-alloy contact arm for iis | 4903 suo3 | 3.Way, brown Nandle excellent conductivity | 4003-GLIs | 4905-GLIe 2003-GLI ew | 3-Way, Ivory glow nandle | ‘ 7 | 4303-GHY | 490u-GHY - 3-Way, gray handle ® Exclusive heavy-duty neoprens ; | : ee | ' rocker s 4805-1 ' 4903-1 suost | 3-Way, ivory nandie | i y ; | 4b03-L 49U3-L { = | S-Way, lock type | oe: 1 itn green t Nead | | Let ERM ee aera oe _3Way, white nandle | | ¢ Rust resistant orass plated 4004 | 4904 - | Way, brown handle | yoke provides maximum | 4b04-GHY | 4904-GRY - 4-Way, gray handle li surface contact pcan | 49041 = | 4Way, ivory handle i| © Strip gduge for accurate wiring 4808 Bie - | 4-Way, lock type ni! © Thread cleaning captive Sent Deore iba | 4-Way, white handle i eee ae p |\% 6006 ¥ 6006 | 26000 “OWS | Key supplied with lock switches i 4, ® Break-otf plaster ears [ Sy iil ® ory urea base : i! ® UL Listed File #E1464 — Guide | ie #WMUZ | © Verified under Fed Spec. #W-S \ ' i i Horsepower rated | ! | fare a | SINGLE POLE SWITCHES 2P, 3W, 4W SWITCHES pen: FENOI lated by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Ing of CSA Aad eullia “BLK” lor bieck Randle, “RED” lor ied handle . 8 rie ee 5242-22 1 Gravely ; nh hes Features- a eareas CATALOG NUMBER ilk DESCRIPTION : eee tl arc: $242 | Duplex Brown, Side wired, self grounding Hi 3 7 d 1 | $242-GRY | Ouplex, Gray, Side wired, self grounding 1 @ Heavy-duty wrap-around stee 5242-1 | Duplex, Ivory, Side wired, self grounding yoke locked in for maximum | 5242.W | Duplex, White, Side wired, self grounding “trength and security. ' Jne-plece triple-wipe brass & “contacts. saneas : : e 3 Wiring: Large brass CATALOG NUMBER | DESCRIPTIO} 4 os as ——+ — ION ee eee *§242.22 j Duplex, brown, Side wired to agcept spade type terminal. accepts up to #10 wire. " we |__Less plaster ears, mounting screws & sell grounging strap__| ¢ Heavy duty copper alloy self-grounding strap. * Double wipe brass QUICK CONNECT TERMINALS ‘ i pues eee [ CATALOG NUMBER | DESCRIPTION ge 9 | *8242.44 | Duplex, Brown (Nylon Face) with tour .250 inch quick | | 1h 2 Pole 3 Wire 15A 125V Grounding | " muass Specification Grade Receptacles | grounding screw. Thread-cleaning captive | mounting screws. ea ray Strip gauge tor accurate wiring. Break-off tab for two-circuit wiring. Rust-resistant yoke. Snub hole for quick, easy side wiring. Exclusive open-face grounding slot reduces breakage resulting from abrupt removal of plug. (5242, 6242-22) UL Listed File E2258 Gulde ATAT. (5242, 5242-22) , CSA Certified File LR16215 - ulde 365E1. 142-44 Is recognized under components by Underwriters Laboratories, inc. connect terminais. Less Mounting yoke, Mounting screws & ~ | __sall grounding strap L_ ti 2 §242-22 §242-44 * Azo available in 1BA 250¥, 20A 126V ang 20A 250V, Coneull factory for ordaving information. Adg aullin BLK" lor Heck Face, “RED lor Red Face Consuit lactory tor delivery ‘ COVER PLA‘cS ; STANDARD ‘ } WEATHERPHOOF - | SPECIFICATION GRADE SIERRA GIVES YOU THE ENDURING BEAUTY AND PROTECTION AFFORDED BY 302 STAINLESS STEEL These are the first and only Weatherproof Cover Plates with the beauty and long-lasting protection of stainless steel. Both the cover and plate are solid Type 302 Stainless — which is universally recognized for its exceptional corrosion resistant properties. The ninge pins, springs and plate screws are also made of stainless steel. The new design features a total'y enclosed hinge which is pro- “tected from damage and contact with foreign matter. The cover is extra deep — permitting it to fit all wiring devices. Twin-seal PVC gaskets for plate and cover are grey to blend with the stainless steel finish. DEVICE O€VICE COVER/OPENING DESCRIPTION +} CAT. NO. COVER/OPENING DE&SCAIPTION CAT. NO = T t al 1 1 Togyte Switcn TR a } 1 Sterrapiex Single Outer | 18 1 Smati Cover, Vertical 1-Gang Piate we-t Ut LBL) 1 sma Cover, Hortzcintal 1-Gang Plete | WPH-16 otis el [ol] fT ee 1 Toggle Switch | if q } 1 Sierraplex Duplex Outlet } 1 Sati Cover, Horizontal 1 Gang Plate | WPH-1 Hy ae! 1 Long Cover, Vertical 1-Gang Plate wWP.28 —= ms Ap ol re 2 feKéle Switcnos 1 Sierraplex Ouplex Outlet - | 2 Smal Covers, Vertical 2 Gang Piate | WP? 1 Long Cover, Horizontal 1.Gang Plate | WPH-20 = { + — / Ps Oo! ’ 13 Togyle Switches | 2 Sierrapiex Duples Outlets 3 Small Covers, Vertical 3-Gang Plate wPa 2 Long Covers, Vertical 2.Gang Plate WP-282 + + 5 el 1 Single Outiet 1 f i 1 Bipiex/Triplex Outlet } H | 1 Small Cover, Vertical 1-Gang Piate we-T by Ay 1 Long Cover, Vertical 1-Geng Plata weg Te] nN 1 Single Outlet r oma | 1 Bipiex/Triplex Outlet 1 Small Cover, Horlrontal |-Gang Plate | WPH-? 1 Long Cover, Horizonte! 1-Gang Plate | WPH® ot A 1 Duplex Outlet Y ti Fy 2 Biplex/Triplex Outiets is) )) 1 Long Cover, Vertical 1-Gang Piete wR 4 oI } j 2 Long Covare, Vertice! 2.Gang Plate wP4a2 fee) 1 Duplex Outlet a FA | 1 Telephone Outlet 1 Long Cover, Horizontal 1-Geng Plate | WPH8 EY ty 1 Smal Cover, Vertical 1.Gang Piate [oe] 1 Duplex Outlet a Ton 1 (Te 1 Telepnone Outlet 2 Smaii Covers, Horizontal 1-Gang Piate| WPO-8 US (FJ 1 Small Cover, Horlzontal 1-Gang Plate | weH-tz — i . YG) 2 Duplex 0 mI Fal 1 Telepnone Jack { 2 Long Covers, Verfical 2-Gang Plato | WPO2 —) | 1 Smali Cover, Vertical 1-Gang Piste WP. \ . tam = { Fl 1 Slorrapiex Single Outiet Ty se) 1 Telepmone Jack | . 1 Smati Cover, Vertical |-Gang Piate wPrele Lo] } L@ 1 Simall Cover, Horizontal 1.Gang Plate 1 WPH-16 L Bre 7 | a c= Ge ae WALE FLATS PLASTIC & METAL Refer to the dimensioned drawings below for tne correct spacing. If a question Still remains, refer tu the SELECTOR GUIDE, page J-17, for specitic device dimen (eee eR a § STANDARD 4 SPLEIICAT ON GHAUE : PLASTIC WALL PLATES a METAL WALL PLATES . All Sierra plastic wall pistes are of a nun Combustible, mat Svea ferrous and nou ferrous wall plates ure precision drawn ie yes proot thermosetting material, muniniuin .100" thick. These from stock with a nominal 040" thickness. Alter fabrication, “i plates are listed by Underwriters’ Luborsturies, ad afe indi. these plates are sanded, deburred, doubly inspected, and vidually inspected and packaged in protective film with color- packaged In individual protective film with finish-matching Matching screws. All afe dvailable in iwory, Golme, grey, write, screws, For plates with otner decorator finishes and/or other @nd brown, plus otner special colors as listed on page K-13. Materials, SEE page K-4. ' SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS , 1 All receptactes and switches shall be provided with Sierra A‘! metu! wall plates shall be Specification Grade by Sierra, it Specitication Grade Plastic Wail Plates, ether P line (mouth) and conform to standard finishes of U.S, Bureau of Standards i or O-line (Decor) in gangs and openings to accommudate tor brushed brass, etched and anodized aluminuin, 430 satin {i devices as indicated in plans and specifications. Plates shall stainless steel, or 302 satin stainless steel according to the ; conform to Fed. Spec. WP-455A, and ail other requirements scnedule. Plates meet the requirements of tne Notional t ot NEC, UL, CSA, NEMA & ASA, Engraving shell be by tne Electric Code and Federal Specifications. Engraving shall be \ Pilate Manutacturer according to the schedule gone by the plate manufacturer according to the schedule. t ! \ ——> STANDARD PLATES ! Plate mounting holes depend upon the type of device used, which may be STRAP r MOUNTING, BOX MOUNIING, INTERCHANGEABLE MOUNTING OR CENTER i HOLE MOUNTING. If a question on type of mounting occurs, refer to the SELEC- I i TOR GUIDE, paye J-17, for tne specitic device type, hole centers wiil be indicated. { : i ! ' : . JUMBO PLATES eat | Plate mounting holes are independent of the plate type and depend only on the ee $ ' bd +4 device style. Mounting may be CENTER, STKAP, BOX OR INTERCHANGEABLE. OM 8. dio are ae fie els fe = ame Bs + ee A sions. NARROW PLATES All plate rnounting holes are standard for narrow plates; how- ever some plates are lOO naifow to ucCuliimiodate al! Gevices. Refer to the NARKOW FLATE section, page H-}b, tor complete listing of devices which may be accommodated. Reter to the dimensioned drawings below, or to the SELECTOR GUIDE, for specitic dirpensions un device muuntings. eee ee ee epee be ee LE FARR pO} Oyj Of oy ay ol ily i i t pee eee eee used for these plates, refer to the TANDEM PLATE section, page H-15. Eta nll z Speen ty eet) aa TANDEM PLATES fe $4) 1G) : if | =f 4 Plate Mounting dimensions are NON-STANDARD on the two and three high tan- | (@) al | 1] OG | | dem plates. For detatled dimensions and tor the range of devices that may ve he 44 | of | at | PLATE MOUNTINGS CENTER STRAP BOX Indicated are tne four standard metnods of plate mounting. Other than these, there are many non-sfundard methods which depend upon the special debice used. For a complete listing of standard and non-standard devices and mounting dimen- Sions, reter to the SELECTOR GUIDE, page J-17. G-2 BIGRRA ELECTRIC s|/B T ig _ i noma | SND 20104) | \ | ooRy | vor | aReyoRwDIN | MERZ «| GT | | | 49 WORND9;N14 \ | onr2 | yor de en cent ——— eel | Sippaay Re r . | é . | SHUNIO;SUPDY | | ony. | AM 1 axeg | atrioa wna — | aggzea% =| | aUYHa | | .. | jOUONrAIGd — | | . 00r2 | yor } fie a = — he aa at el ee t / uning | uOieridedy Sunes i ody OF OA | poquudg oeng teem GM SSID Se OHAPPAP YY 09 O10 SON PHP YO OL HON USSU atadtiuie anne e@ UOHPINYISSPL? HOA OOF TA Fpvay © “PEN AN BSPR UNSING 8# POIs “TNE JAIN PPO PNUD UALWEINH? (911992 SUN? SUMETNAdS BLU) BIOW Ides yoo not i PIS ate, AM OP ve £9 parte £99) Un R19 Fun OW UIA Ing SH SSR IOUT IOI nee F SSHID SPH PENY QMLe i és on “Rann : yoos-o i cou sending jerons) yono'or " 7 Avie IONE VRYRINIE SVT BRANT ‘ aaa ee a rE ee eee ned Se eee ee eee 1 | STM | . ending ye 19%) v 00001 a ” Asa vot 0 3$Ns Snid Sshe i _— os aoe | eae eg ee aes em i ‘ SAdde (tO 10ye 194 1PODI) ATA ing |r s Te § AG?T fence aenenee ae | ener oe ee SS eel ' cmccanane: Bac ©) | (xemyayy any (Pa01) wRnding j# 198) vom nl on) 3 | ASTI ggny grqg reemeye-reep womLTens Sa a AN nf Ng Sos F199 UDNEIG BTOdINY [F995 yom'na 9 ——— ea \ Sees — | ON | peoding (ria9y vomat ou apc aera Fee flag soacasll = | e UNE DBNO NY 18 7 4 7 L su mie) np 7 900% ¥ 900002 ‘ oA am F5Nd Beri9e-yoteD MOM ! ee ees 4 — Ne secant Fee | Sep pei i \ 2 OO a 7 Heth | sour Laer atssaeeT diy ynon'nor 5 . net nom 7tN4g Aeep- eer aw94 naneenanernetenrestien i _ ne t =u } + { vor-o | MLNy t 1eniuey ‘te 199. wih ' Ago9 Vihg Seuse-s0e) MOLI | }« VERDUN penwa) “SM IHD WOUETA | 7 | i | (uererreny-ywesimg yo enitoq uted ! j . ' . ‘ i rr Auortuaung pry Gig ews vy pon'on2 1 at i aa vont ; VON 1H weong WEE | ee | Mn ig Dene we : : 4 al —t | as . iH Woy ' | MU ea Oo ie Si je aon i ow i worraiorg senraiq NN =| y aM 'ONZ [eee rend Se as Sees | . : 0y penusununsey AyPtseds) | ys WNW Anse | ‘SiN IR T vopeey UIE in wi \ | = i = me ah os ey | \ ( ynoe-g atny ruouays sux 4547 Ane . | jenp venseny veuy Fonunyaainy | Gu Sal yoee-9 | 8947 | ayo) srowinjuey, g vianjaw = | YONA 'NNE ees pe a ne aa JOA ePmEL FE NYE MOT | | P01 14 PenUeWwIEN AjwIDedsy — [ “GuN War Ane? UND peng we | sy | may . eae — | | | ‘GWM W5NE \ | | Ryo NRE Ye . ! ow ' SKA | A) _ yme-0 | Si4 | eimavy 194 peovesmnnay fitwrn90tey Yooo'm2 f-----'------/--- aene womeye emp ioenasn | | 91ND 19 7 190884 WIRY ' §WN wd Ange Yo pam 4. Doth ~be Ng orl _ * eee | UNE seNeMD NID te i voO09- 108 | su | sag. ‘107904 “view Auisedey ytiy 1 nin Aom 7Ns PHEW) NOWLIAT — a eee ee eee |. ak - — ' — —— San SPIN BOI FIED IN9, 7 ” VOOOe 109 1 su | a 7 pepeey ‘wie Ayreon Ua n oan ase ren & eet <a ‘ a a ee to eee von arn | | ene sprig | | = | unos bending perme iy uanreiny | gan ede, | gee | acqinits Tau SMTi | waar | iy penvawnyoray bade ny wn Tees amen + Via Dasnd | j ueperndidy ae i t 4 bee = - SEI PUY THOA ON9-F AEN APAIEHWUNIING YOURS appeals er ee trp: paso orors AGI |) = : SIO OOTY PUY DOPZ— SEEN OBMIOA wnipoR ‘s i 25% UPLIGHT _AFILATLAS INDUSTRIAL SERIES. pear oy we Lamp/4 and8 Foot, Lengths Rapid Start -Slimline HighOutput—1500 M.A. Bakéd Enameliand:’* -Porcelain: Reflectors | VOLTAGE | WEIGHT ATA T CATALOG NO | NO TYPE OF LAMPS [isrecirv one) | DIMENSIONS | Wigs BAKED ENAMEL REFLECTORS ® Dic-formed aiid constructed from T 240 Two Ff 40 h y gauge cold rolled steel: 240 | Four F40 | beni bt Soha) 340 | Tree © 40 } @ Re flectotdie-cmbossed'f 340 Six F40 added rigidity. | 248 Two Faat 12 e . : 348 Three F48T12 Lee r -onti $ 296 | Two F 90112 | 27 For Build Cee Che ay 396 | Three F96T12 (Contact row installations. * - ——{ factory 7 F a 248 HO [two Faati2/Ho | for other ©@ Thru wire-way for 348 HO Three £487 12/HO | woltages J Pi 4 . 296HO | TwoF96T12/HO | continuous runs. 396HO | Three F96T12/HO © Snap-in pressure lock sockets are AF 248 PG | Two F46PG17* } e%* | 5 Fi AF 296PG | Two t 96PGI7* j 1334" x 96" 50 enclosed in a dic-forme - ie mee g lige gtr PORCELAIN REFLECTORS Uv ra CATALOG NO oricadi SHIPPING SUFFIX pesenietion WI ADDER Porcelain Enamel Reflector Example: AF 296 HO PO OPTIONS Single circuit Plug tn Mult-circuit Plug-in (Gallast wired to red circuit.) Multecircuit Plug-In (Ballast wired to black Cucuit.) ACCESSORIES CATALOG NO OESCRIPTION AF 48ME | "30° x 30° metal eq) . rate 48" louve AF 48 A12 Framed a8” acrylic Orismatic tens AF 48 P12 Framed 48" polystyrene prismatic tens Pair of totatty enclosing end plates. ling type ker Han HR UN? spacer type Hooker Manger 2 per fixture Chain Hanger ~ 2 per tixture Swivet Stem Hanger -- 2 per fxture Re de es a) tae Wire Guard eek eee ee al ae eh AEA A | *These- fixtures will accomodate VHO or SHOJamps in iat ne Ct ORDERING:E XAMPLE? Atlas Pi uplight, two Jamp, cight Pet igh ‘Output, porcelain: ee a eae | par plates and egg crate‘ louver, would: > « eel re mee ws iB Oe bie a |) (Seperate! rd AF ere ha bhi oR 2 Cae 5 Ye" DIA. K.0.(2) 10" DIA. K O.(5) Ye x ¥4"K 012) Ye" O1M. KO. (2) te 'e" DIA. KO. RAPID START (7) SLIMLINE (5) ed | Ya" ram" | ne & PG ONLY | “ne bh 12" r-12 — - —-48 4 "ye DIA. KO. RAPID START (9) OTHERS (7) ta 4") HOLE (2 Me aa KO12 ve OIA KO '3) (RAPID START ONLY) 10 « ah - 48 - L NDF and RAPID START ONLY ' sriisea ay 6 . 4 aR weet we ee eee ite 96 OF 99'% a2 OTHERS RAPID START MOUNTING RECOMMENDATIONS Individual Fixtures: Minimum of two hangers €or 4 ft. units. Continuous Rows: Minimum of one hanger per channel plus one extra hanger per row. Hooker Hanger: Minimum of two hangers per channel, either individual or continuous rows, Vie" DIA. KO. ww" DIA. £0. paren il “2 Y fr \ . 13% + Shielding angle 13° when using T12 lamps and % whea using [17 lamps. (A L/THONIA’ Pes eg) BL de Se od (RAPID STARTONLY) 12" 48 OF 491M — 4 SLIMLINE wer pia.’ | 6 RAPID START END PLATES are supplied with each» fixture. Note: Fullend plates available as accessories. _—- CHANNEL CONNECTOR is a screw installed connector for continuous row installations and fixture alignment. (supplied with each fixture) _—— BALLAST is held in place by one self-tapping sheet metal screw to prevent backolf, and a positive-lock ballast lance for easy replacement \ _-—= TURRET HOUSING is easily removed or replaced by snap-in action, — CAPTIVE LATCH (00 one end) to hold eal reflector to channel — to remove reflector, simply unscrew latch. A REFLECTOR ALIGNERS (Metal aligners for Rapid Start only. Plastic aligners for Slimline, High Output and Powergroove.} (Supplied with each fixture!) 2LAMP ZONAL CAVITY ? ftw Bom PC Leer. Len : UL LISTED ANO LABELED LB.£.W,— elas ae = FIXTURE GUARANTEED ONE YEAR AGAINST OERECTS IN MANUFAC cae EIVE STAGE PROCESS DEGREASES AND PHOSPHATIZES METAL, INSUR- tebe tithes, fale Tes aicoet toe ELECTROSTS FINISHED IN Calls [he aetna REFLECTOR | 23-GA. STEEL }NoT TO SCALE — (olan ints 20 GA. STEEE | Dimensions are subject to change. Please TURRET PRCU NaS PeolarsViiaas-lencs la erg sacle 3 20:GA-STEEL BRIDGE PUORCY: asad 1 ers pe ie c ar Chane AA x BLUE SUA SERIES. The perfect solution ‘ t security lighting, for low these mercury vapor wall brackets offer diecast | aluminum construction and the economies of long life and high lumen output 93048 100W, A-23 Med. Basi integra! transtommer h 8° sonere of white p glass High qualit, s 120V 414 Suitadie tor w el! available (see Pro a Selection Catalog tor details) 93049-WG8 100W. A-23 Med. Base Wali bracket with guard Integral trans former housing White polished guarded Thermopal glass dittuser High quality brusned aluminum 120V standard Suit abie tor wet locations Proto cell avail atie (see Product Selection Catalog tor details) C.S.A rere me oT REET A TER TT SLT SOLER I I EL Olic UUW DELUAE WHITE CANOLEPOWER COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION Zonal Cevity Method t LATER. ANCE IN UNITS OF MOUNTING FEIGHT f MERCURY VAPOR DISTRISUTION LAMP ‘oo f RATED AT 4000 LUMENS 200 300 *g LUMINAIRE 400 a SPACING = CRITERION 500 s Le 600 2 700 $s s é B00 8 300 z 1000 3 z Zz 8 z (S3N G3HSVO) NOUWZINLA 4O LN3IOISS309 ‘% Wail Refectance 7© 80 30 10 70 80 30 10 60 30 10 80 30 10 50 30 10 j ‘% Effective Colting Cevity Reflectance oom 7TOo% 60% 320% 10% INITIAL HORIZONTAL FOOTCANDLES Mounting ! CAT. NO. 3606 ONE: 70W COATED CANDLEPOWER HIGH PRESSURE eareuoae SODIUM LAMP RATED AT 5400 LUMENS LUMINAIRE SPACING CRITERION 1.36 LONGITUDINAL DISTANCE IN UNITS OF MTG HT (S3NI7 G3HSVG) NOUVZINLA 40 LN3IDIS45090 Mounting Wagnts A 8 | 10’ | 9.26 | 3.70 | 1.96 93 | 37 + | 4.12 | 1.64 PRESCOLITE 77 PANEL =] BOX DIMENSIONS PANEL MTG ” MARKING 1 sune-|cap LINE Inches BRANCHES SPACES & OPTIONAL FEATURES , CATALOG SERVICE ace [ams lenxs | ----- | se NOs [rrus pau ze 1207 ZOBV _ | |P8303<c3eeXx Boa} 7 S loo EB Tied PANEL PANEL = wOTta: Ch ITEM CH ITEM : _ \- NOW AuTOMATIC McB oe — | fa _|« 2- cco AEE CB's | 7 - 4 B3- Suse. LABEL _| ° 10 WwW | 12 % [P 16 138 17 18 | fs 2 4 _ {2 22 aa 23 \24 I 28 2! To o> oo l2e8 — oT fw pe _Jj 31 Toa — — Pe —— APPROVED EXCEPT ot 7 = AS NOTED | [38 40 7 & - 2 ai [42 j u _] ef teu 1 a,b. Tithe PANELBOARD SCHEDULE ST. MARYS Drawn By Checked By Approved By aE poe Treced By Type Pp 8 A 8 Cc Order No.: D a - HOOPER SrEeTAc OROER oi DRAWING WO.: eane CUTLER - HAMMER Cutler-Hammer” PANELBOARDS 7/10/81 T ecrnicat 240 Volt (Max), Type PB, Plug-on or Bolt-on Breakers PB DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS (Continued) DT NFORMATION P UB. CATION APPROVED EXCEPT 30 CIRCUIT PANELBOARD WITH FLUSH TRIM 30, 4 WIRE 225 AMP MAIN LUG INTERIOR PANEL WITH SEPARATE INSULATED SOLID NEUTRAL WIRING DIAGRAMS SINGLE PHASE. 3 WIRE. S/N 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE, S/N DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS *© Application — A-c only. Lighting and power circuits. Type CH Plug-on and/or Type CHB Bolt- | on Branch Circuit Breakers may be intermixed. | | © Specifications — Meet Federal SpecificationW-P- | 115a, Type 1, Class 1, for panelboards and W-C- | 375b for circuit breakers in panelboards, Ciass | 10a and 10b for 5000 AIC; Class 11a and 11b for | 10,000 AIC; Class 12a, 12b, 14a, 14b, 15bforother | voltages and interrupting capacities. Underwrit- | ers Laboratories listed in files E8741, £3624, E9565 and £11713 | © Service — 120 or 240V, single phase, 2 wire; 120/240V, single phase, 3 wire; 120/208V, 3 phase, 4 wire; 120/240V, 3 phase, 4 wire delta; 208 or 240V, 3 phase, 3 wire. e Interiors — Symmetrically mounted in boxes up through 225A sizes. so they may be inverted for either top or bottom entry. Standard 400A MCB is bottom feed only. Top feed available on request. Standard vertical bus is plated aluminum, but branch circuit fingers are plated copper for breaker connection points. Maximum Short Cir- cuit Rating of panel interiors is 65,000 Amps RMS Symmetrical. Note: Rating of the panelboard is limited to the lowest interrupting capacity of any circuit breaker installed. Separate, insulated solid neutral through 225A sizes. May be bonded to the box when required. May be diagonally mounted in opposite cornersin pre-drilled holes for 15" wide boxes. Drilling tem- plate supplied for mounting in other locations. 400A neutral is mounted on interior opposite the incoming line. * Mains and Wire Range — Lugs: 125 amp, (1) #14 — 2/0, Al/Cu 225 amp, (1) #6 — 300 MCM, Al/Cu 400 amp, (1) 1/0 — 750 MCM, Al/Cu or (2) 1/0 — 300 MCM, Al/Cu Breaker: 100 amp EC, (1) #6 — 1/0, Al/Cu 150 amp CC, (1) #1 — 4/0, Ai/Cu 225 amp CC, (1) 1/0 — 300 MCM, Al/Cu 400 amp TJD, (1) 2/0 — 600 MCM, Al/Cu (2) 2/0 — 250 MCM, Al/Cu ; 400 amp TJD, option, (1) 750 MCM, Al/Cu © Branch Breakers — Amp Interrupting Capacities (Symmetrical) of 10,000/22,000/65,000 available in single pole, two pole and three pole, piug-on or bolt-on types, 240 Volt, ac, maximum. 10,000 AIC breakers: — Single pole, 120V, 15-50 amp ratings — Double pole, 120/240V, 15-125 amp ratings — Three pole, 240V, 15-100 amp ratings Single pole 15 and 20 amp breakers suitable for switching duty are available Shunt trip may be installed on one, two or three pole breakers, requires one extra pole space. Two wire, 120V, GFCI breakers available in 15, 20 and 30 amps. * Cabinets — Galvanized steel! boxes with knock- outs in top and bottom in sizes up through 225A Removable blank end walls standard on 400A size, knockouts available as option. SAFE-TRIM™ locks the fully concealed hinge and clamp fasten- ers behind an absolutely flush door. Finish on trim, door and panel deadtront is medium grey, ASA4Q, enamel. Circuit directory, 3% x 5'4". is mounted inside of the door © Options — Sub Feed Lug Kit available for field installation or supplied on factory assembled panelboards when specitied Copper bus also available. gad use of Cutie: Hammer products should be in accordance with the provisions of the US. Natvonai Electical Cade and/or other local codes a standards that are pertinent to the particular end use Instellation oF use not im accordance with these codes and standards could be hazardous to personnal and/or equipment t a —— - —— = Se a L © VW. Ag Electricai/ Electronic 2 2 T ecunicat Cutler-Hammer” PANELBOARDS 7/10/81 O NFORMATION P upiication PB APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS 18° WIDE BOX (100A THROUGH 2254 onty, APPROVED EXCEPT FLUSH ! TRIM | Are Vien lat BH GUTTERS: TOP AND BOTTOM — 5° MIN; SIDES — 4" MIN 240 Volt (Max), Type PB, Plug-on or Bolt-on Breakers 21° WIDE BOX (100A, 225A 400A‘) S NOTED Z, BP REMOVABLE END WALLS + WITH KOCKOUTS STANDARD UP THROUGH 225A 400A REMOVABLE BLANK END WALLS STANDARD ~ KNOCKOUTS OPTIONAL. 5 A 1 SPACE FOR 314" GUTTERS. 225A TOP ANDO BOTTOM — 614" MIN; SIDES — 77 BAIN 400A TOP AND BOTTOM — 814” MIN.; SIDES — 77 MIN : WITH MAIN LUGS OLY | WITH CIRCUIT BREAKER MAIN Max. Max Main Mumber sas Dimensions Ld laches Number Amos. Rees Dimensions ta Inches 7 of Main Wide Nigh Deep and 6.8. Wice High Beap | Felon Amps. bi om} es | | ow | SINGLE PHASE 3 WIRE ee | 18 125 5 3 | 5 18 woec | 45 2 5 | 24 125 5 29 5 30 150.2206 | 15 3 | § 30 25 5 29 5 42 | 2sce | 15 42 | 5 2 a es | : 18 roo.zsec | of | lw 6 | 18 125 a | 6 20 150 225CC | 2 6 | 24 125, 2 | 4 6 42 zscc | 2 46 6 0 25 2 4 6 ) 400 TJ0 21 54 | 6 ad ad a x 8 2 aot | ot 3 | 6 » 40 2 6 6 uM 400 TD a 6 6 2 400 2 50 6 . a 400 2 5A 6 Jt 1 THREE PHASE—4WIRE - : | eo | 5 a | 5 18 100 EC 5 a | 8 80 125 15 r=) 5 24 100 EC 15 u 5 @ 25 5 u 5 0 150, 225 CC 5 x 5 7 ae ci a 1 a 225 €C 15 2 5 _ Fi) 125 2 | 34 6 18 100 EC 2 u 6 f a2 225 af xB 6 24 100 EC Pa B 6 zte@lais{|s] 2 | eek] P ppt YY 2 400 21 50 6 = - a 400 2 54 6 0 400 Tyo 2 s4 6 @ 400 150 2 ‘9 6 & 400 130 21 6B 6 eS .W .. Ba Eloctricy /Flectronic 104 CUTLER-HAMMER TRANSFORMERS Z -—- N83 | CxS Dry Type Distribution Transformers — 600 Volt Class "“HREE PHASE — For Prices contact your local Eaton Corp. Cutler-Hammer sales office : | Approximate Dimensions Temp- | insul- Imped- Full Capacity Taps Enclosure | Wirini Ship kVA ere ation alain | ance AN = ‘Above cima | Style | Diagram ftetstntactat in Inches Wt Rise | Value _ BN = Below Normal | Indoor @ | Number | Height | With Depth Lbs Perret ” 480 V DELTA PRIMARY — 208 ¥/120 V SECONDARY — 60HERTZ = 3 115°C | 185°C | CXS-33-414F 580 (2) 5% BN F o| og) | 27 6 |] 81/2 70 _ 6 | 195°C | 185°C 63-414F 30 | Escola Fit Metil 16 | 16-1/2 | 7-1/2 | 115 1 150°C 4 anata ial arabe 23-174 | 18-174 | 12-1/2 | 160 9 | 115°C (2) 5% BN Dain? 23-1/4 | 18-1/4 | 12-1/2 | 190 | 80°C fee aaa | D mene? 23-1/4 | 18-1/4 | 12-1/2 | 190 | 150° | (2) 5% BN | 23-174 118-174 | 12-172 | 190 15 | 115°C oD 7 27 | 23-1/2 | 15-1/2 | 310 80°C | 27—| 23-12 | 15-1/2 | 320 150°C | ne: 27] 23-172 | 15-1/2 | 310 30 | 1o0:¢ peeenrnts 27 | 23-1/2 | 15-1/2 | 315 i 115°C a? 29-1/4 | 26-1/2 | 17-3/4 | 340 80°C 7 20-1/4 | 26-1/2 | 17-3/4 | 390 150°C T 29-174 | 26-1/2 hrs 340 15°C pee aay) 29-1/4 | 26-1/2 | 17-3/4 | 390 80°C ul | | 29-174 | 26-1/2 | 17-3/4 | 410 c T 7 | 29-174 [26-172 | 17-374 [390 C D 18 | 29-1/4 | 26-1/2 | 17-3/4 | 395 °C 7 = | 29-174 | 26-172 | 17-3/4| 410 Cc 1 it | 36-1/4 27-1/2 | 19-1/2 | 580 Cc | 29-174 [26-172 [17-3/4 | 470 Dan | ai? 3-1/4 | 27-1/2 | 19-1/2 | 580 (6) 2-1/2% Taps — | 36-1/4 | 27-1/2 | 19-1/2 | 580 (2) AN & (4) BN | 7 | 36-174 [27-172 119-172 | 580 D 18 = | 36-14 | 27-1/2 | 19:1/2 | 590 rz 39-1/4 | 3-1/4 | 21 810 eeu 30-1/4 | 3-1/4 | 21 810 b + Lene pee | 3-1/4 | 37-174 | 27 810 : 0 ' 7 40-1/2 | 35-3/4 21 920 30 im 40-1/4 | 35-3/4 | 21 920 00 | | 40-174 | 35-3/4 | 21 $20 05 0 7 49-1/2 | 40-1/4 | 27-1/4 | 1350 01 zi 49-1/2 | 40-1/4 | 27-114 | 1350 0. 49-1/2 | 40-1/4 | 27-174 | 1350 64 Daan an 49-1/2 | 40-1/4 | 27-1/4 | 1590 57 | 49-1/2 | 40-1/4 | 27-1/4 | 1590 505 Di 49-172 | 40-174 | 27-174 | 1590 326 Ea | 65-3/4 | 48-3/4 | 31-1/4 | 2645 30 Ef | 694 | 48-374 | 31-174 | 2665 5.90 fe 7 6 faba | 30-174 | 2600 480 V DELTA PRIMARY — 240 V DELTA SECONDARY — 60 HERTZ FSi iiniocOil | i18586 FL 580 1 «0, Tn 13-172 70 * 6 | sn5E | 185°C 330 (2) 5% BN F rue 16 115 eo rT S0sC in| Do aragonite 9351/49 160 9 | 115 3.49 (2) 5% BN 0 | 9 | 23174 190 ‘a 80°C 348 REE EC 23-1/4 190 1 150°C “6.25 2)5%8N | “9 | 23-1/4 190 150°C 6.25 1 5 5¢% BN 10 23-114 190 1 15 | 135°C 214 ST Te | 9 27 310 t 80°C 2.02 : 9 | 27 310 P| ee iz eg ben a i 80 220°C 257 o 9. | 29-1/4 390 ; : 2a 1 9” | 214 73/4 | 330 434 (6) 2-1/2% Taps — 9 29-1/4 390 434 (2) AN & (4) BN D 10 29-114 390 2.02 9 29-1/4 ; 410 2.76 q iro 3-1/4 12: {19-12 | 580_ f 412 9 3-176 [27-1/2 | 19-1/2 | 580 ; 412 " | 10 | 36178 | 27-172 | 19-172! 580 i i 3.69 9 39-1/4 | 3-1/4 | 21 810 iE 8 3.64 {i119 39-1/4 | 31-1/4 | 21 810 @ Carve modified tor outdoor service by 10106 BRE Dre Page 106 This accessury is Nut avanabie tor ail sizes ee @ Erectrostanc Smeiaed transtormers © Weather Shieid must be factory installed on thus transformer to obtain UL labeling Continued Next Page & @ with 120 V center tap Center tap on one phase tu provide a maximum of $% of ¢ AVA rating fora singie phase load A N MerouNT ScHENIN Ee PALN T echnicat CUTLER-HAMMER’ CERTIFIED DIMENSION DATA 1/83 j NFORMATION _ General Purpose Dry Type Transformers P usuication Three Phase — 600 Voit Class — 60 Hz Cxs 150°C RISE — TYPE D 30 AND 150 kVA SIZES 480 4 PRIMARY 240 OR 480 OR 600 A PRIMARY 240 & SECONDARY 208Y/120V SECONDARY WITH TAPS WITH TAPS OPTIONAL WEATHER SHIELD 3 OPTIONAL MIN WALLMOUNT BRACKET —— 2° ——+ ISOLATION FOR WALL MOUNTING UNITS i MOUNTS RATED 30.75 KVA 38 asus od us Notes: 1 All units are UL listed and are designed in accordance with ANS! C89 2 and NEMA ST.20 (4) x 1° SLOTS standards 2. Transtormers are dry type. class AA. ventilated Dimensions - Inches in Approx. enclosure for indoor use Optional weathershield - kits are available tor adapting the unit for out- i os At | é £ D 7 . We.-Lbs door use, without voiding the UL label 30 | 26% | 23% | 15% | 20% 7 11% 310 3 Transtormers have 220°C class insulation system 7 | | at with 150°C average winding temperature rise aver 375 | 340 40°C maximum ambient : », : 4 Transformers are tloor mounted For units rated up 45 29% | 26%0 | 176 | 23% | | 20% | V3" | 330 | thru 75 KVA, optional wail mounting brackets are 50 | | 410 available slea oo 4 | ia 5 Paint coloris ASA #49. gray 15 36" 19% 25 202 | 15% 580 6 Primary and secondary terminals are aluminum ai —- a | + t bus bar Installation instructions are provided 1125 | 39% 28% | 18% | 24 | 17 | 810 jor each unit | | 7 Wining compartment temperature suitable for 40" y ig compartme p o ad uk a3M Lis 2% | 15% | Bm | at fw a 4 60 C rated cable or higher Voltage | Drawings KVA Quantity Catalog Number Primary Secondary Taps | = 7 1 | | Approval fi APPROVED LI Recor =r oF ; | |omer Job Name 7 Shop'Ordér ’ Engineer es ee Contractor = = Distributor 7 7 Distributor Purchase Order Submitted By a oeeeee Date. “apg aes E:T-N hociri 1 / Electronic rN Cutler-Hammer® SAFETY SWITCHES 10/15/80 T ECHNICAL E nroRmation stig 30 Amp. Heavy Duty, Type DH DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 12 P usucanon DH MAXIMUM HORSEPOWER RATINGS NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 12 — 30 AMP. © Quick make, quick break © Current carrying parts cadmium or tin plated — protects against corrosion © Line protection shield, visible blades Provision for three padlocks in OFF position — modified to lock in ON position UL Listed, File E5239 Meets Federal Specifications WS 865c Suitable as Service Entrance Equipment Finish: NEMA 1, 3R, 12 — ASA 49 medium gray enamel : NEMA 4 — stainless steel (30-200A) NEMA 4 — ASA 49 medium gray enamel (400-600 A) over carbon steel LINE AND LOAD TERMINAL LUGS [ #14 Min. to #6 Max. — Cu or Al CONDUIT KNOCKOUT SIZES — NEMA1 Horsepower ® Horsepower © « Phase | Standard | Maximum Volts | Standard | Maximum 9 ie ie 2 125 2 3 1 1% 3 250 5 _ 1 3 % 600 10 15 1 3 10 2 2 3 2 3 10 2 T™% 20 2 10 25 3 % 3 3 3 % 3 5 1S 3 ™ 2 ke @ Maximum Hp ratings apply to non-fusible switches and to fusible devices equipped with time delay fuses. | Condult Sizes jin Inches) and | Catalog Knockout Location Key Kumber ca 3 ce ce co | oHaat | HT he % hl 261 %%1 BY? Yd he, Ye 1 2610 1 he % Ya 21 ¥d 4% 4%, 1° _ 361 4%! he %d BY! % Yet dei %. %1 Ye Hd 221N Yd by. % WI. Me 421 od aM %.%.1. 1% -—- 461 ww WU [| KUM %. Ye 11% | 461U hd Ye BWM fo | 321N eH! %.% Met ale | lems 361N 1 2H! Mal) |e APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS — NEMA 1 (Genera! Purpose — Indoor) a i | Maximum | Mumber Dimensions In Inches Volts Rating | Humber | — at Catalog a Fusible Humber Poles Poles | Neutral 01221 2 2 Mei 261 2 2 ae 2610 2 son = 321 3 3 ce I 3 3 Laake 361U 3 — oe or ; zi ihe Sy, OIA. 2 MTG a 4 ‘ = HOLES pt ; : a -CA 461U 4 -- =A — 321 4 3 Yes | 361N 4 ms Yes J D Continuous isad current net to exceed 80% of the rating of fuses employed In other than motor circuits. The installation and use of Cuties Hammer products should be im accordance with the provisions of the standards thet ere pertinent to the particular end use. Installation oF use not in accordance with (hase codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment. ‘or other local codes of industry PrnweaiaUSA pe oR Electrigat/ Electronic nr ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS . 330/83 Circuit Breakers and Enclosures aYPE CC, CCH, AND CHH — THERMAL MAGNETIC — 240 V ac Fixed Trip 1 Circuit | Breaker Only T Enclosure Only With Groundable Neutral : | a1 qT General Purpose ° a, "System | Ampere 10,000 AIC 25,000 AIC 100.000 AIC ewe Rainproot ss | | Surface [Flush NEMA 3R @ Select interchangeable piate type hub trom page 14 DISCOUNT SCHEDULE 2200-8 TYPES KB AND DA= THERMAL MAGNETIC Enclosure Only Circuit General Purpose Breaker Only NEMA 22C0-3 CUTLER-HAMMER PRODUCTS, Eaton Corporation Printed MUSA 42 ies a ywe3 os - en en a — Circuit Breakers and Enclosures WHEN ORDERING SPECIFY © Circuit breaker and enclosure catalog numbers — Type HFB TYPES HFB, HFC AND HKB TYPES HLA, HLB AND HMC Enclosure Qaly Genera! Pur NEMA s oe Ci Breaker em | pare ircust Brea _ Rata, Onl: Price 2-Pole al S8Ss58aan S8SsESRSq TYPE HKB—600 VOLTS A-C-—-250 VOLTS D-C— INTERCHANGEABLE TRIP 70 | WkB2070] $1389 [ TYPE HMC—600 VOLTS A-C INTERCHANGEABLE PLUG—{Solid State Trip Unit) 2-Pole | 400 pheacaeeny $2715. Esa] $221. » | 150 [HKB21S67 1389. i 175 | HKB2I754 1389 | 200 | HKB220@) 1339. 100 | HKB3i0R%4 1680 125 | HKB3E 1680 150 | HKB31 1680. 175 | HKB3175 | 1680. | 200 | HKe3200 | | 4KB3225 Z APPROVED ft. {22 DISCOUNT SCHEDULE 2200-3 “e . CUTLER-HAMMER PRODUCTS, Eaton Corporation & 45 Approximate Enclosure Dimensions NEMA 1 SURFACE MOUNTED Dimensions ia Inches Deep Conduit Sizes c (Inches) 25} 2% | 8% | 3% | 1%, 22%, 400 | 24% | 15% | 7% | 14,2 24'3 10 | 1% | mH | 4m | %,%11%,1%,2 25 «| 20% | 10% | 6M | 2,2%,3 60 | 27a | 13% | BHA 1200 | am | 2% | 137% | ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 51 332063 Technical Data TERMINAL WIRE DATA INTERRUPTING CAPACITIES nee eee ‘erminals listed as standard are included with the enclosed circult breaker. Terminals Iisted by catalog ; | UL Listed | a Later os crollsuis ees ets cosy must be specified oa the order. - 5 : Rus Ssramenncal Aaonee E r , Wire Range Type > Breaker mov | 277¥ | asov | Goov | zsov ‘ Breaker Ampere | Torminal | No. of |——————______| + Type we | a | me | Re rey : Type Rating Cat. No. | Cables | Minimum | = Maximum Wire te 10,000 ala ; Spon, own 100 | Standard | 1 | #4 Cu pa | [aaa janes | weve f 1 [RA fo Cu/Al 2 — ae j 10,000 > = rf os i pe @ PCC, CCH, CHH 125- 150 | Standard | 1 | 91 H/o Gu/Al | 5 ! fc een ea £ 17S- 225 | Standard | 1 2 300 MCM | Cu/a Bea rie oe vas ig ito os “e F 250- 350 | Standard 1 | 250 MCM | S00 MCM cu vee | MY | 19, S Standard ¢ 2Poou | aun co co z,o00 14,000 | 14,000 | 10,000 250- 350 | TA3S0DA FB 6, 2s 18,000 | 10, ro ’ wo TAMOODAL | 2 | 3/0 : | 250MCM arc re 000 Bi i ie "er 8 15. 100 | Standard | 1° #8. (#1 Du/Ai Ha, mu $3000 Bee) oe | ea “EB, EXB, B . , ania % , x + FB, 125. 150 | Stang 1 |ge “s |jap | Owl amd 65,000] : | $0,000 | 25,000) :... i WFe 1550 | Standard | 1 {old (e8 cu/Al as. Ka 3.000) .... | z2,090/ 14,000) 10,000 EE Be FC 6-100 | Standerd | 1 | 4 an Coal ae AROS) See! oc: | Stel Boe] Oe 125150 | Standard | 1 | wt an CusAl mam |, | ate] | 30,000 | 22-000 | 10,005 | &B, NC 2, ..e+ | 30,000 | 22,000 38, KB 125- 250 | Standard i fi eer 350 MCM | Cu/Al 2 eee). | Boe] eee 2. La 25420) LACORS t —| ie : nae uc bu/Al @ Single pole EB rated 10,000 AIC at 120 V. Ac, 5000 AIC at 125 V. De. LAB, LA 250- 400 | Standard 1 | #4 250 MCM, and | Cu @ Single pole ENB rated 10,000 AIC at 125 V. De. : 1 3A 600 MCM {Cu @ Rating only for 2 pole breakers. “LAB, LA 250- 400 | TASOOLAL | 1 | af 250 MCM, and | Cu/Al . 1 | 39 600 MCM o/Al "LB, LBB 250- 400 | Standard 2 | 250 MCM cu 1B, LBB 250- 400 | TAOODAL | 2 | 30 250 mM Cu/Al | Seoiccael O e| ee erent peace A 500- 2 | 250 MCM cu fa 500- 2 | 250 mcu Cu/Al 5 9 700- 3 3 3 HBSS E. T- ‘2. | 0 mow | Cu/Ai S: a: APPROVE TALoOONBI | 3. ‘Standard 4 GS - | TALZ00NB1 | 4 | TAIZO1NB | 3 Standard 6 6 4 Standard 64 114 CUTLER-HAMMER CONTROL AND ACCESSORIES (For complete selection, ask for the C-H INDUSTRIAL CONTROL CATALOG) AiO AS50 ‘ee phase, full voltage magnetic starters are most com- monly used to control polyphase squirrel cage motors. Starters consist of magnetically held contactor(s) to establish the power circuit, and a 3 coil overload relay to provide running overcurrent protection for NEMA Class A and B motors. Reversing starters have two contactors which are mechanically and electrically interlocked. All starters listed below have: 330/83 Three Phase Magnetic Starters DESCRIPTION — A10 & A50 — Non-Reversing and Reversing Types. —Reset button in cover. Other cover control options are available in kit form—see table on opposite page. —Three coil eutectic alloy overload relay—also available with Bimetal overload relay. —Magnet coil wired for Common control—except 120 volt magnet coils wired for Separate control. —One N.O. (normally open) holding circuit auxiliary con- tact. See page 120 for add-on interlocks and other ac- cessory kits. RESET ONLY — 3 COIL ST'D EUTECTIC OVERLOAD RELAY — A10, A50 Volts & H.P. NON- REVERSING REVERSING Motor Max. | Coil Volt. HP | Voltage (00 Hz.) mew = 4 i NEMA 1 NEMA 3R NEMA 12 | NEMA 1 F General Rainproof Dusttight Industrial General i Magnet External Reset | Purpose i @ (NEMA 3 & 3R) aw Al0 NEMA | With Reset Button Only in Cover Prices ef startors do net Include heater colls. STARTERS WITH BIMETAL OVERLOAD RELAYS For starter with Bimetal O.L. Relay,(convertible manual to auto. reset), substitute Al} for Al0, or AS! for A50. Same ratings and Priées. EXAMPLE: Al 1BGOA instead of AIOBGOA. Al0, NEMA 3R Encl. Protective Boot (also supplied with NEMA 12 Encl ) accommodates Suze 2-4 Cover Controt Kits PPROVED Wed for separate 120V contre! sivcutt. For maximum Mp a! listed moter veltagos, use the rating of ather starters of same NEMA stro. EMA 12 enclosures are suitable ter eutdoer application when properly installed. @ Bee page 116 tor Size and 1, cover control kits. CUTLER-HAMMER PRODUCTS, Eaton Corporation _ 114 DISCOUNT scHEeDULE TCD CUILER-HAMMEK CON 30/83 TROL AND ACCESSURIES iis Cover Control Kits-& DESCRIPTION — B10 Single phase, full voltage magnetic starters are most com- monly used for control of self starting single phase motors up to 15 horsepower at 230 volts. —Single coil eutectic overload relay, standard. --120/240V. magnet coil wired for common control. COVER CONTROL KITS— A10, B10, A50 For field installation. Pushbutton Kit includes all wiring and mounting hardware. The operators mount to enclosure cover without drilling or knockouts and the switch unit mounts on starter insuring easy cover removal, For A10, 810 in NEMA 1, 3R & 12 Enclosures Except Sizes 0-1 NEMA 3R is | Ticats Bi) Start-Stop Pushbutton (Momentary Buttons) Sizes 00-4 Hand-Auto Selector Switch OC) seers: (Maintained § Buttons)@ Sizes 0-4 Test-Oft Auto Sel. Switch (Maintained Bu' Buttons) @ Sizes 0-4 Stast-Stop Pushbutton and ccute Pitot Light (For use with Sel. (Momentary Buttons) Sizes (For complete selection, ask for the C-H INDUSTRIAL CONTROL CATALOG) Blo Single Phase Magnetic B10, SINGLE PHASE MOTOR STARTERS RESET ONLY— 1 COIL, STD. O.L. RELAY Prices of starters de ast Include heater coll. © Caver control — page 116. STARTERS WITH BIMETAL O.L. RELAYS For B10 Series starter with Bimetal Overload Relay (manual reset convertible to automatic reset), substitute B11 for B1Q APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS-A10,B10,A50 7H] a +1 te e Pree eon (eo ata lt Sr fee 3a; | ‘ A Ree ASO Reversing Sw. in cover—NEMA | only— ff ect at drilting required for Lens) Dimensions in Inches Sizes 0-4 : T Wt. =r NEMA Mounting Ship. © Add code letter from table below to cateieg nuciber, EXAMPLE: C490KG48. Size Wide Hi Deep ————| Lbs. @ Test bution ts momentary seperation. A igh Cc 0 E i @ Cover contrat kits tor NEMA 3A, Size 0-1), cee page 118 € AIO & BIO—NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE Transformer Selection For Pilot Light o | om | 5% m | mM 6% - 01814) 3% | 10% | 5% MY 8 1% 2 m | 13% 6% 6 10% 7 3 ny | 18% 8% 8% | 15 42 4 1% | 2 8% 8% | 17 46 ee % | ih Wh | 3m | 12 AIO & BIO—NEMA 3R ENCLOSURE T BL F NEMA 1 Enclosu 018141 8 1h 5M 5M 10% 12 - Pr ne Od sisal 2 a | 16% ™% 5% | 15% 23 OU LR LR Le Forward-Stop-Reverse Me Ye 1 | et 2) Pushouttons + 1 : A10 —NEMA 12 ENCLOSURE ‘Momenta: ittons ‘ =— oat | m1) u% | om | m™ | 0% | 2 Up-Stop-Down 4 2 &% | 16% A 5% | 15% 2 Pushbuttons | C4oOKR2 | 80. 344 | 1h | 2% 9 % | 23% 58 (Momentary Buttons) Le | “4 A50 —-NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE CES ic om oonttien em RTT ETS ‘usnbuttons | i Ye % | | APPROVED 1% | bs | bh | i 10% 0 (Momentary Buttons) fy 18% 8% & DISCOUNT SCHEDULE ICD (Except kits, 100-13) CUTLER-HAMMER PRODUCTS, Laten Corporation 118 CUILEK-HAMMEK SF Prinoc stianisknas ™MAGNELIC -e 4/6/81 TT : nine a Multispeed LAz00 \ EN ORDERING SPECIFY e 2-Speed Selective Control: For 2-Speed other than Selective Control: © Catalog number plus magnet coil code suffix. EXAMPLES: ® Catalog number plus magnet coil code suffix and option Size O — A700BG022B, Size 2 — A7000G022BB required. EXAMPLE: A700BG022B except Compelling @ Heater coil number, or full ood current for each speed. @ Heoter coil number, or full load current for each speed. NOTE: All standord storters are wired for Selective Control. An explanation of Selective, Compelling, Progressive and Automatic Deceleration Control will be found on Page 63. Stre 1, 2-Speed Size 4, 2-Speed Reconnectadle Winding Reconnectabie Winding Moter Starter Motor Stertor * “PEED — SELECTIVE CONTROL — SEPARATE WINDING # Con7e2AcTOR TO Aus Maximum Horsepower — 60-50 Hertz Constant or Variable Torque Constant Horsepower nsv. | roov. | 230v. an/s75v. | lisv. | 200v. % 3 3 5 1 2 3 ™ | ™% 10 2 5 ss] 19 15 5 --- | 7% Sun! || 135 xn 0 --- | 2 --- | @ 50 100 --- | % --- | 75 | 100 200 --- | @ --- | 19 | 200 r") tl | 100 Prices of starters do not include heater colls. Select 6 coils (2 overload relays, one for each speed) et $5.00 per coil. Heater coti selection, page 267 2 SPEED — SELECTIVE CONTROL — RECONNECTABLE WINDING * 3 5 2 | 7% 10 2 5 10 | 15 % |---|] 3% | 2 D |---| % 0} # 10 |---| ® - 75 | 100 200 «|---| © 150 | 200 Wo |---| 100 ~~~ Series Bl starters. Far descriptive iatormstion, see Page 10. APPROVED. SPECIAL MODIFICATIONS. page 63 DISCOUNT SCHEDULE 1CD (HEATER COILS 1€D-13) DIMENSIONS, page 64 Ce HET E ‘T N Electrical Electronic Pumas ou a iy 7 7 ; al? Controt - Lene 61 4/6/81 -——— FILE es . Multispeed £4700. OPTIONAL FEATURES — FOR CAT. A700 5 NEMA Type Starter Size and Price Addition ____ Addition of Special Feature |__Enctosure 3 ays sé 7 8 PILOT DEVICES iM COVER OR FLANGE ~ “Fast-Stop-Slow” Rotary Selector Switchgear sinless heise 1, 3&@, 4, 12 $82. $388. $83. $88. $88. $83. “Fast-Stop-Slow" Pushbuttons........... Reece cessereeeeeeee \ 100. 100. 180. 160. 160. 160. Pilot Light — Interlock N ncluded commen =“ | Te | Me | Te | a | ee — Interlock Not Included cet ccmmeae ssc eceeeceeee . i 4 . ‘ . , 3k, 4, 12 108. 108. 108. | ---.-]| ----] ---- PresTest® Indicating Light:........ssssesseeeesesseseeseeneees 1, 3h, 4,12 Yo. | tao. | ta. | 120. | 120. | 120, CONTROL CIRCUIT Extra Auxiliary Contact, Factory installed N.0. of N.C. — Aa u. au. “4. 88. &. 132, Separate Control Circuit - Al w/c we n/c we wc NC Fused Control Circuit (1 or 2 Fuses — Specify on Order). ........ 1, 12, Open 8. ke 88. 8. 88. 88. Centro! Circuit Interlock, Catalog Number C360, Factory installed ea Motor Circuit Switch or Circuit Breaker Operator. .N.O.-W.C. 1, @, 4,12 @. @. |----|----|----|---- fT _ 2.N.0.-2 4.0. 1, 3, 4, 12 8. @, |----}|----|----|---- AUXILIARY RELAYS @Contro! Relay — Type AA or M, 4 Poles Maximum — Specify . Type, Pole Combinations and Voltage (One per Controiler)..... 1, 3R, 12, Open 204, 320. x20. 320. 320. 320. . 47-9 312. 424, 472. 472, 472. 472. @Pneumatic Timer — 3 Minute Max. Timing Range (One per Con aor, UOMO). ..cccccccecccccceccroscccesessescscseccvenssenes , 12, Open is 3s. 3%. 3. 36. 336. 336. 336. ‘ 473 | a) 4 40. | 440. | 40. | Mo. | 400. Phase Monit: 1, 12, Open a mM 5 704. 704, 704, 74. 704. ng 7 Aa : t MA. 1 WA | Md | 264. | 264. | 28h | 8. Spano of Decelerating Retay. Sassassosessedeoed aa 616, 66. | 616. | 616 | G16. | G6 | Gle. {GOMTROL CIRCUIT TRANSFORMER fal DEN - arr 5 eee may taN. lv, wy sya - ‘ 7730/460V. NSv. w/e 50/€0 " ’ 200/480M, ly. S/O a s/o * “a ye ‘a 7 0/60 . : : Fused Secondary except NEMA 7, 9 are not Fused see 3 - Sos ; 2 Standard Sure and Voltage Transtormar,,....-2c.e. eee srovene] UR, ee - a ry 38. | 32.) BY. m. With 100 Watts Extra Capacity .. 1, eT ee a i . _— ™ ma} me} mo | | Sie. |---| ----|---- ‘Wath 200 Watts Extra Capacity. 1,3, 7. a. 38. 4B, a2. With 300 Watts Extra Capacity. ume me, | mo. foe] Ot | oe. ‘Special Voltage Vraasformer, Other bove A 1.8, sip ae (On : {Fused Transtormec Primary LR, mm f° e. &, 5 bi “OVERLOAD RELAYS 5 a Cn . Stee fe ; Substitute Automatic Reset (Bimetal Overload) for Manual eek eo PREF , : (, (Eutectic 8 5 i aA A ye ft owye Towve |. -~ “Substitute Ambient _ 7 “3 a8 err: 22 we. w: i Add Alarm Circuit Contact to Eutectic Type Overicad Relay . he | . ‘ r.* — 1 Normally open of Normally closad _ | am mw] we EWCLOSUR uo : Floer Stand. Rea see 4, @, 4,12 200. } m0. | mo | m0. | mM. . 1, 4,12 72. a. 122, 264. RR. 134 18. ¢ 1st. 308. 4%. TH. Breather end Orain. 7-9 24. 2, 24. 24, 24. Omission of Enclosure i — Sized 16. __ Price Deduction. . Suze} 24. | | on {me | a. | a. | ---- | ---- METERS DOOR MO , - Ammeter or Voltmeter, Single Phase J 1,12 72. TR. | 79. 722. 782. 792. 792. 7%. Ammeter or Voltmeter with Switch. | 1,12 ) 1200. 1200. | 1200. | 1200. | 1200. | 1200. | 1200. 1200. Wattmeter 1,12 | 1624. 31624. | 1624. | 1624. | 1624. | 1624. | 1624. 1624. Elapsed Time Meter i, 12 | 2%. 722. 232. 232. 722. 232. r2. 2m, Olf controtier has @ control transformer, relect and price transtormer with edditional 100 Watt capacity for rolsy or timar required. @Mot available ter NEMA | enciosure im this size. DEFINITIONS Selective Control — Permits starting the motor on any desired speed winding. To change the speed of a running motor to # higher speed, press the desired * speed button. To change to a lower speed, it is necessary to first press the stop button before setocting the new speed. This allows the motor a short time period to decrease speed, and reduces shock to the motor, gears and machine. Can also be controlled by automatic pilot devices. Compelling Contro! — Provides that in accelerating the machine from rest it must always be started on the low speed winding. To reach higher speeds, the Pushbuttons must be operated in the speed sequence. This compels the operator to accelerate the machine gradually. To change to 8 lower speed, it is necessary is required for each higher speed on which sequencing is desired. Progressive Control — Provides automatic, definite time delay acceleration of the motor to the selected speed by energizing the speed windings progressively from the lowest to the desired speed. To start the motor from rest, or to change the speed of # running motor to a higher speed, press the desired speed button. The stop button must be pressed to change to a lower speed. A timing relay for tach higher speed 1s required. Automatic Decelerating Relay — Provides automatic time delay to 8 lower speed. On high inertia loads, sudden transfer to a lower speed may cause damage to first press the stop button and then proceed as if starting from rest. “KSB R he motor of machine. A timing relay for each lower speed is required. oved DISCOUNT SCHEDULE 1CO Price a USA ac a ET: Lethe Electrical Electronic Control 63 122 CUTLER-HAMMER CONTROL AND ACCESSORIES (For complete selection, ask for the C-H INDUSTRIAL CONTROL CATALOG) ‘ - 33083 : 9101 Toggle Type Manual Starters ‘OR SINGLE PHASE FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS .-atings, 115-230 Volts — Single Pole 1 H.P. A-C — Two Pole 1 K.P. A-C and 0-C | ENCLOSED TYPES | OPEN TYPES | ee General Purpose | Water Dusttight | in ne Flush Plate |. Without Operator Feature | NEMA | NEMA4 | — Flush Plate | (Stainiess Steel) | Flush Plate 1 Me | Cat. No, | Price | Cat. No. | Price [at No. | Price [cat No. | Price Cat. No. | Price SINGLE POLE STARTERS — WITH SINGLE COIL OVERLOAD RELAYS Starter Only Pilot Light (Neon) Toggle | Padlock Guard Pilot Light (Neon) & Padlock Guard Key Starter Only } Pilot Light (Neon) Lever Starter Only Starter Only Pilot Light (Neon Pilot Light (115 Voit Incandescent) : Pilot Light (230 Volt “Toggle Incandescent) Padiock Guard ; Pilot Light rats a t io Switch and Pilot Light (Neon) Starter NEMA 1 with ke) and Hoon pliot tight ». Key | Starter Onty Pilot Light (Neon) Lever Starter Only Flush plate mount — starter and selector owtich Prices of starters do not Include heater coll. Select proper heater coil at $4. per coil. Heater coil selection, below. HEATER COIL dental ana TABLES —9101 — For Motors With 1.15 Service Factor Price $4.00 Each For ail enclosed 9101 except with incandescent pitot light — we Seuntrial Control Cateiog ter that tabte, 7 CUTLER-HAMMER PRODUCTS, Eaton Corporation -.__/_ 122 -912-. 877-953 4.12-4.55 -982-1.10 S54-1.06 4.56-5.01 1.11-1.22 1.07-1.17 5.02-5.54 1.23-1.33 1.18-).28 §.55-6.02 6.03-6.79 6.80-7.56 7.57-8.47 “B.48-9.44 0! 9.45-10.4 10.5-118 11.9-12.7 128-13.9 140-15.) 15.2-16.0 129-144 2.85-3.11 3.12-3.40 341-374 * 3754.11 Discount scHeouLe 1CD — Except Heater Coils, 1CD-13 ) CUTLER-HAMMEK CUNIKYUL ANY ALLEDIVRIFG tee (For complete selection, ask for the C-H INDUSTRIAL CONTROL CATALOG) Button Type Manual -Starters and Drum Switches FOR ONE & THREE PHASE, 1-10 H.P. MOTORS Neuake Genera! Purpose NEMA 3-4 | (Stainless Stee!) 34, Size 0 160-178 | 162-178 | .170-.188 179-201 | 1179-201 | “189-.212 202-222 | (202-223 | 213-.234 (223-245 | (224-247 | 235-259 247-278 | 248-279 | 260-296 279-2316 280-316 295-332 317-352 317-383 .333-.370 353-401 | 354-.401 371-421 02.453 02-453 422-476 ASSL 454-511 A77-: 512-.564 512-566 | 539. 565-629 | .565-.629 593-, £30-.697 630-697 3 698-175 698-775 776-855 776-855 Prices of starters do net Include heater colts — Select from table — $8 each, 3¢, Size! ° SM4-1.08 1.05-1.15 1.16-1.29 1.30-1.45 1 46-1.66 147-166 1.67-1.86 1.67-1.86 * 137-206 | 1.87-2.09 207-229 | 210-232 | 2:30-2:57 |, 233-260 | 2.58-2.89 | 261-289 | 2.90-3.23 | 290-323 | 3.24-3.54 324-354 | 3.55-4.02 355-402 | S116 Withew: O.L. Aciey 403-4.40 | 403-444 sree rere | tet cicero 441-497 | 02 Reversing Drum 4.98-5.60 65 5.61-6.16 23 REVERSING DRUM TYPE without overload relay pee 6.8 Maximum HI P. | Surtace pouene = ¥ Type ot | General Purpose —- NEMA 1 7.60-8.47 Operation intl 8.48-9.43 20- (Field s eee ie Ne | ; ; 10.6-11. | convents) 118.132 133-145 16. ~ 146-15.7 17. way i | a 15.8-17.3 -19) “zs cn 17.4-18.0 22. [Wan wz | Nae ae a | ~T Maintaned | [38] vas8 | ae 48 | 982) Gain & Moi ed ee ee oo 6 Salina lmaciaeel| --- 3-37 Maintained oe DISCOUNT ScHEDULE ICD - ~ Except Heater Cols, icD- 13 AMMER PRODUCTS, Eaton Corporation os 123 AWIRE, 36 WYE rome ” Element ® f t ves S5S, S5A & SSF Watthour Meters Class 20 @ 3 4 Wire Wye — Two Stator FORM 148 ® Socket, bottom-connected & semi-flush mounting Class 100 & 200 With Clock Type Register FORM 6A re joao ° ‘o c Se FORM 14A oogoac00 Meter Voliage Register Descrip. Reg. Dials & Mult. Amps With Cyclometer Register 100 15 120 | Cyclom sx1 | 18% | 108 | $58 | 63691 100 15 240 | Cyclom 5x1 We | 216 sss 64685 100 15 277 Cyciom. | 5x1 Whr 216 | $§S 66846 200 30 120. | Cyclom | 5x1 ger | 216 $58 63692 200 30 240 | Cyclom. | 5x1 4% | 43.2 S5s 65012 200 30 277 64270 20 120 64877 20 240 | 65194 277 Mechanical Demand Register Catalog No. With DE-5 APPROVED G/we & Full Scalekw Time Int. Register | Reg. Dials Descrip. | & Mult. Meter Voltage DE Demd 100 DE Demd 100 DE Demd 100 DE Demd 0 DE Dema DE Dema ta Catalog No. Catalog No. 66880 66881 66882, ) 66476 *